LvlUp Changelog

New features and fixes will be reported here
chat widget
improved
2 months ago

Redirect CTA Now Available in All-in-One Chat

We’ve extended the Redirect CTA feature to the All-in-One Chat widget, making it easier to guide users to external links directly from the chat window.## What’s New?- You can now add a custom message and link that appears in the chat after the contact form.- Clicking the message will redirect users to any website you choose.- This feature is ideal for driving traffic to support pages, booking links, or promotional content.✅ Previously available in Email/SMS and Live Chat widgets, this feature is now fully supported in All-in-One Chat for a unified experience.⚠️ Note: This feature is not recommended when using Conversation AI.
Image without caption
content ai - text and image
brand boards
new
2 months ago

🚀 Brand Voice Integration in Content AI – Now Live!

We’ve upgraded the Content AI experience to deeply personalize your content using your Brand Voice settings—this includes not only the tone but also parameters such as Target Audience, Brand Purpose, Unique Selling Proposition (USP), and Pain Points.## ✨ What’s New:-
Brand Voice Toggle:
Seamlessly enable or disable Brand Voice from within the Content AI modal. It is ON by default if a Brand Voice exists.-
Smart Autofill:
When Brand Voice is ON, the Writing Tone field is automatically filled based on your selected Brand Voice.-
Other Metadata:
Additional elements like Target Audience, Call to Action (CTA), Brand Purpose, Values, and Promise subtly influence the AI prompt behind the scenes.-
Brand Voice Selector Dropdown:
Choose your preferred Brand Voice from saved options, with your default pre-selected.-
Custom Overrides:
Want to tweak the tone? You can manually override fields, and your inputs will be respected.-
No Brand Voice?
We prompt you to set one up with a quick call to action linking to Brand Boards.-
Preview Parameters:
Want to see what each Brand Voice includes? Quickly preview before making your selection.-
Helpful Tooltip:
Receive guidance throughout so you understand how your brand parameters shape the content.## 📈 Why It Matters:This update enhances your content, making it feel more authentic, targeted, and consistent with your brand's identity—without adding friction to your workflow.## 🔍 Where It Works:Available across all Content AI-enabled modules:- Social Planner- Blogs- Email Builder- Funnels & Websites
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
content ai - text and image
new
2 months ago

🚀 Thumbs Up/Down Feedback for Content AI

We’ve implemented a structured feedback mechanism across all Content AI outputs—both text and image—to better understand what works and what doesn't. Your feedback is crucial in helping us improve generation quality and fine-tune the AI to meet your expectations.
Where This Is Available:
- Social Planner- Blogs- Email Builder- Funnels & Websites- Quick Actions like Fix Grammar, Rewrite, etc.
How It Works:
- Each variation of AI-generated text or image now includes 👍 / 👎 icons.- Clicking 👎 opens a mini form where you can select a reason and optionally leave a comment.- For Quick Actions (like Rewrite or Fix Grammar), feedback is collected with just a simple 👍 / 👎—no reason picker, keeping it lightweight.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
documents & contracts
fixed
2 months ago

Documents and Contracts: Auto-invoice type update in based on optional product selected

# OverviewPreviously, if you added a mix of recurring and one-time optional products to a document, the recipient selecting only one-time items would still generate a “recurring” invoice. This would appear in the recurring invoices section and cause confusion.## What’s Changed- Documents now respect the selected product frequency. If only one-time products are chosen, you’ll receive a one-time invoice. Recurring products will generate recurring invoices as expected.## How It Works1. Navigate to
Payments → Documents & Contracts
.2. Create a product list with both recurring and one-time items, marking them as optional.When the recipient selects only one-time products, they’ll receive a single, one-time invoice—without a recurring schedule.## Why It MattersThis change ensures clarity and consistency when offering optional products, preventing unwanted recurring invoice entries.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
2 months ago

Tag Contacts Directly from Campaign Statistics 🚀

You can now add and automate tags based on campaign interactions—right from the statistics page.# 🔍 The Problem Statement- There was no quick way to segment contacts after sending a campaign.- Tagging required pre-planning, bulk actions, or workflows.# 🚀 What’s New-
Tag by Interaction:
Add tags to contacts who opened, clicked, etc.—right from the campaign statistics page.-
Auto-Tag Future Interactions:
Select “All” to auto-tag future opens, clicks, etc.-
Trackable Logs:
See tagged contacts and logs right in the statistics page.# 🎯 Benefits- Instant segmentation for better personalization.- Automated tagging as new contacts interact.- Easy tracking in Tags & Bulk Actions.- Multi-tagging supported for advanced targeting.# 👷‍♂️ How to Use1. Go to Marketing →
Email Campaigns
.2. Open campaign
statistics
(3-dot menu on a sent campaign).3. Click
Load More
→ scroll to Opened, Clicked, etc.4. Select contacts and click on Add Tags.- To auto-tag future contacts: Select All → Add Tags → Enable Auto-Tagging.- Track tagging in the Tags and Bulk Actions sections.# 💡 Notes- Future auto-tagging is not available for Skipped.- All actions are logged under Bulk Actions, except future auto-tagging.- To enable future auto-tagging, select all contacts.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
voice ai
new
2 months ago

Separate During and Post Call Actions in Voice AI

# 📌 OverviewWe’ve overhauled how actions are managed within Voice AI agents to provide you with a cleaner, faster, and more intuitive experience. With a fresh user interface, smarter organization, and clearer guidance, configuring your AI agents is now simpler than ever.
Note
: To enable this feature, go to
Settings > Labs > Enable Voice AI - Separate During and Post Call Actions
.# ✨ What’s New1.
Card-Based Interface
: Actions now appear as individual cards, making it easy to scan, organize, and manage your configurations at a glance.2.
Tabbed Layout
: Actions are divided into
During the Call
and
After the Call
sections, each featuring action count indicators to provide you instant context.3.
Streamlined Creation Flow
: A new, prominent
“New Action”
button makes it quicker to add actions and encourages better structural flow.4.
Individual Action Modals
: Each action type now opens in its own focused modal—no more cluttered forms or confusing tab-switching.5.
Quick Delete Option
: You can delete any action directly from the card’s menu without needing to open the edit flow.# 🎯 Key Improvements1.
Improved Visual Hierarchy
: Clearer labeling and visual grouping make it easier to distinguish between different action types at a glance.2.
Simplified Editing & Deletion
: You can now edit or remove specific actions directly from their cards—no more tab-hopping and unnecessary clicks.3.
Built-In Constraints & Guidance
:-
Visual counters
show usage limits in real-time.-
Smart tooltips
provide context-aware hints and restrictions:1. Max
15 total actions
during a call.2. Only
1 appointment booking action
allowed.3. Up to
25 contact field update actions
post-call.# 💡 Supported Action Types
During the Call
- Call Transfer- Trigger Workflow- Send SMS- Book Appointment- Custom Actions (Beta)
After the Call
- Update Contact Fields
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
phone system
new
2 months ago

New Filtering Experience in Sub-Account Settings

We’ve rolled out an improved filtering experience in the Sub-Account Settings tab under Phone Integration (Agency view), making it easier for agencies to find and manage specific locations based on telephony and messaging configurations.With the new Filters panel, you can now segment sub-accounts with precision—whether you’re managing migrations, auditing compliance, or checking phone capabilities across hundreds of accounts.# What’s New## Located in:Agency View → Phone Integration → Sub-Account Settings → Filters (top right corner)## Filters Panel UI:A new panel accessible via the “Filter” button in the top right corner of the sub-account list.## Default All-Selected View:All filters are selected by default when the panel is opened, giving you a full view to start with.## Managed By (Telephony System)### Filter by:- Native Phone System- Twilio- None / Third Party## Phone Rebilling (Plan-Specific)Visible only for agencies on the $297 and $497 plans. Choose between:- Enabled- Disabled## Other Filters:- Number Intelligence (Enabled / Disabled)- Messaging Ramp (Yes / No)- Have Phone Numbers (Yes / No)- A2P Verified (Yes / No)## Clear & Multi-Select Support:Clear all filters with one click, or apply multiple filters simultaneously to narrow down results instantly.# Why It Matters- Quickly surface sub-accounts matching specific tech or compliance setups.- Reduce time spent on audits, phone number management, and migrations.- Improve accuracy when switching providers or checking feature coverage.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
app marketplace
improved
2 months ago

Marketplace | Ability for agencies to pay on behalf of sub-accounts while installing an app

# We've released an enhancement that allows agencies to pay on behalf of sub-accounts while installing an app.## What's new?When an agency owner or admin is installing a marketplace app to one or more sub-accounts, they now have the option to choose from the following:1. Charge the sub-account(s) - selected by default2. Charge my agency## Why is this important?1. Our data shows that a significant number of app installation failures for paid apps occur because sub-accounts do not have a payment method set up.2. This issue is particularly common among customers on the $97 plan, who often set up their payment method only at the agency level during onboarding and intend to use the same method at the sub-account level.
Image without caption
phone system
new
2 months ago

Voice Call Pricing Changes – Effective May 12, 2025

📥
Overview
Our downstream carrier has announced pricing updates for Programmable Voice outbound minutes and toll-free local incoming minutes across select countries. These changes will take effect starting May 12, 2025, and will impact the cost of outbound voice calls and toll-free inbound minutes.📊
What’s Changing?Outbound Voice (Programmable Outbound Minutes)
- Mauritius – Mobile: $0.2030 → $0.2233- Burkina Faso – Mobile: $0.5420 → $0.5962- Mali – Mobile: $0.5200 → $0.5980- Liberia – Mobile: $0.5650 → $0.6498- Cameroon – Mobile: $0.5010 → $0.5511- Slovenia – Mobile (from EEA): $0.5183 → $0.5701- Maldives – Mobile: $1.1700 → $1.2870- Bahrain: $0.1540 → $0.1771- Bahrain – Mobile: $0.1820 → $0.2002- Jordan – Mobile: $0.2290 → $0.2634- Japan – Tokyo: $0.0650 → $0.0683- Poland: $0.0720 → $0.0856- Jamaica – Mobile: $0.3050 → $0.3355- Samoa: $1.7700 → $1.9470- Armenia – Mobile: $0.3000 → $0.3450- Austria: $0.1550 → $0.1705- Italy – Mobile: $0.3308 → $0.3473- Mozambique – Mobile (Vodacom): $0.4000 → $0.4600- Macedonia – Mobile: $0.6200 → $0.6510
Toll-Free Local Incoming Minutes
- Philippines: $0.3345 → $0.3680⚡
What You Need to Do
No action is needed! These rate changes will automatically apply to your account from May 12.🔍
Why It Matters
We understand how important it is to manage voice call costs, especially if you’re running high-volume call campaigns. By keeping you informed about carrier pricing changes in advance, we help you plan proactively and avoid surprises in your billing.
payments
invoicing
new
2 months ago

Support for Custom Payment Providers on Invoices

# What's New?Businesses can now take advantage of several new features within Invoices when transacting through a custom payment provider:## Payment Schedules- Businesses can enable scheduled payments for invoices when using supported custom payment providers.- Users can view and manage upcoming scheduled payments made via these providers directly from the invoice.## Partial Payments- Partial payments against an invoice are now supported when using custom payment providers (if supported by the provider).- Users can track payment history and outstanding balances for invoices that have been partially paid through custom payment providers.## Tip Inclusion- Customers can now include a tip amount when making payments through supported custom payment providers.## Late Fee Calculation- Automatic late fee application is now compatible with custom payment providers for overdue invoice payments.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
automations
whatsapp
new
2 months ago

Send WhatsApp Media (Images, Video, Audio, Document) via Workflow

# We’re excited to introduce the WhatsApp Media ActionThis brand-new workflow step allows you to automatically send rich media (images, videos, documents, and audio) through WhatsApp. Enhance your campaigns and support flows with eye-catching media and clearer context.## 👀 What’s New?- 🖼️
Images:
Supports JPEG, PNG, and more.- 🎞️
Videos:
Accepts MP4 and other WhatsApp-approved formats.- 📄
Documents:
Compatible with PDF and other file types.- 🔊
Audio:
Supports MP3, OGG, and more.Add captions to images, videos, and documents for richer storytelling or clearer instructions.## 🛠️ How It Works1. Create or edit your workflow.2. Add an action and select "WhatsApp: Media."3. Choose from Image, Video, Document, or Audio.4. Upload your file and, if supported, enter an optional caption.5. Save and publish—your workflow will now deliver media automatically at the appropriate step.## 📌 ConsiderationsPlease note the following constraints:- Audio files are sent without captions; any text in the caption field will be ignored when Audio mode is selected due to WhatsApp API constraints.- Media size limits follow WhatsApp Business API guidelines. Keep files within WhatsApp-recommended limits for optimal delivery:-
Images:
JPEG or PNG less than 5 MB-
Videos:
MP4 or 3GP less than 16 MB (H.264 video + AAC audio)-
Audio:
AAC, AMR, MP3, M4A, or OGG (OPUS) less than 16 MB-
Documents:
TXT, PDF, DOC/X, PPT/X, XLS/X less than 100 MB## ✅ Business Benefits- 🎨
Richer Customer Interactions:
Showcase products, send how-to videos, or deliver PDFs directly in WhatsApp.- ⚡
Streamlined Automation:
No manual sending; media is sent automatically as part of your workflows.- 📈
Higher Engagement:
Media messages stand out in chat feeds, boosting click-through and response rates.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
client portal
new
improved
2 months ago

New Notifications for Invoices, Estimates and Contracts on Client Portal

# New Notifications for Invoices, Estimates, and Contracts on the Client PortalWe’re excited to introduce a powerful new addition to the Client Portal—email notifications for invoices, estimates, and contracts. With this release, users will now receive streamlined emails whenever one of these documents is shared with them, making communication seamless and access more intuitive.Plus, Client Portal users can now manage and access all important documents that are clearly organized in the Client Portal.## What’s New?### For Client Portal Owners:- Enable or disable email notifications for invoices, estimates, and contracts.- Configure custom email templates to personalize the content sent to users for each document type.### For Client Portal Users:- Choose to enable or disable email notifications when you receive new invoices, estimates, or contracts.- Stay informed through tailored emails designed to highlight key document details.✅ Access and manage all shared documents—invoices, estimates, and contracts—in one organized, easy-to-use interface in the Client Portal.## How to Use It?### For Client Portal Owners:1. Go to
Sites → Client Portal
or
Memberships → Client Portal
.2. Navigate to
Client Portal → Settings → Email Settings
.3. Based on the apps enabled in Client Portal Settings → App Permissions, relevant notification preferences will appear.4. Toggle email notifications on/off as needed.5. Use the
Default Email
button to switch to a custom email template for each notification type.### For Client Portal Users:1. Click the
Profile Icon
on the top-right corner of your Client Portal home page.2. Select
Manage Your Account
.3. In the sidebar, click on
Notifications
.4. Scroll down to manage your preferences for invoice, estimate, and contract email notifications.
Image without caption
blogs
new
improved
2 months ago

Blogs - Improved Flow for Blog Post Creation

We’re excited to announce a significant improvement: we have removed the requirement to fill out the SEO model with the title, description, and image upload at the beginning of the blog post creation process.Now, you can start writing your blog post and complete the SEO details—such as the blog post title, description, and image (including alt text, which is optional)—once you’re ready. You will also receive a preview of the SEO OG meta tag.Additionally, we have integrated SEO metadata throughout the entire UI of the blog post schedule/publish screen and moved the "Move to Draft" button to the three-dot menu.
Old Flow for Blog Post Creation
1. Go to
Sites > Blogs
2. Click on the name of the blog to edit3. Click on
Create New Post
4. Fill out the SEO model with the blog post title, description, and image (with suggested dimensions)5. You will then proceed to the blog post content.
New Flow for Blog Post Creation
1. Go to
Sites > Blogs
2. Click on the name of the blog to edit3. Click on
Create New Post
4. You will immediately access the blog post content5. Once you navigate to the schedule/publish screen, you will notice an improved UI that includes the option for SEO Meta Data along with a preview.
Image without caption
Image without caption
url redirects
new
improved
2 months ago

URL Redirects - Accessibility Enhancements

# We are pleased to announce improved accessibility support for URL Redirects.This update ensures that all users, including those using assistive technologies, can effectively utilize the URL redirect functionalities, enhancing the overall user experience.## What’s New-
Improved Accessibility:
The URL Redirects interface has been upgraded to align with accessibility standards, making it easier for users with disabilities to navigate and manage redirects.-
Screen Reader Compatibility:
Key interface elements are now fully compatible with screen readers, offering clear instructions and real-time feedback.-
Keyboard Navigation:
Users can efficiently navigate through the URL Redirects feature using keyboard shortcuts, increasing usability for those relying on keyboard input.## Why It MattersThis enhancement reflects our commitment to inclusivity by ensuring our platform supports users of all abilities. With improved accessibility in the URL Redirects feature, we’re creating a more seamless and equitable user experience in line with accessibility best practices.
domains
new
improved
2 months ago

Domain Selling - Accessibility Support

We are pleased to announce improved accessibility support for our Domain Selling feature. This update ensures that all users, including those using assistive technologies, can effectively utilize the domain selling functionalities, enhancing the overall user experience.## What’s New-
Improved Accessibility:
The Domain Selling App interface has been enhanced to comply with accessibility standards, making it easier for users with disabilities to navigate and manage domain sales.-
Screen Reader Compatibility:
All key components within the Domain Selling App are now fully compatible with screen readers, providing users with clear instructions and consistent feedback.-
Keyboard Navigation:
Users can now navigate the Domain Selling App using keyboard shortcuts, improving the experience for individuals who rely on keyboard-based interaction.## Why It MattersThis update reinforces our commitment to building an inclusive platform that meets the needs of all users. By enhancing accessibility in the Domain Selling App, we are ensuring equitable access and usability, in alignment with modern accessibility best practices and standards.
domains
new
2 months ago

Domain Connect - Accessibility Support

We are pleased to announce improved accessibility support for our Domain Connect feature. This update ensures that all users, including those using assistive technologies, can effectively utilize the domain connection functionalities, enhancing the overall user experience.## What’s New-
Improved Accessibility:
The Domain Connect interface has been upgraded to meet accessibility standards, making it easier for users with disabilities to navigate and manage domain connections.-
Screen Reader Compatibility:
Key components within the Domain Connect feature are now fully compatible with screen readers, offering clear instructions and accessible feedback.-
Keyboard Navigation:
The Domain Connect feature now supports keyboard shortcuts, enabling smoother navigation for users who rely on keyboard-based interaction.## Why It MattersThis enhancement reflects our dedication to building an inclusive platform for all users. By strengthening accessibility within the Domain Connect feature, we are helping ensure that everyone can confidently connect domains, in accordance with recognized accessibility best practices and standards.
domains
new
improved
2 months ago

Domain Selection Logic Improvement for Funnels, Websites, Stores, Blogs, and Webinars

We’ve improved the domain selection process across the Funnel, Website, Store, Blog, and Webinar features by excluding fully redirected domains (those with an "All" redirect type) from the domain connection dropdown.# What’s New
Filtered Domain Options:
Domains or subdomains configured to redirect all traffic to another domain (using the 'All' redirect type) will no longer appear in the list of available options when connecting a domain.# How it WorksWhen a domain is set with an 'All' redirect, for example, if
exampledomain.com
redirects all traffic to
www.exampledomain.com
, the original domain (
exampledomain.com
) will not appear in the connection dropdown for Funnels, Websites, Stores, Blogs, and Webinars.# Why it MattersThis update helps avoid user confusion and potential misconfigurations by ensuring users do not attempt to connect assets to a domain that automatically redirects traffic elsewhere. It streamlines the setup experience and ensures domains are targeted correctly.# Important Notes- This update is backward compatible. Any previously connected domains that are now excluded under this new logic will continue to function as expected.- Only domains using the ‘All’ redirect type are affected by this change.
domains
new
improved
2 months ago

Domain Purchase Flow – Enhanced with Clear Value & FAQs

We have refreshed the Domain Purchase experience with a more informative and trust-building interface. While the core functionality remains unchanged, users will now see clearer value propositions and contextual FAQs to support their purchasing journey.# What’s New## Updated Interface Design- The Domain Purchase section now features an improved layout that highlights key benefits such as competitive pricing, enhanced security, and seamless platform integration.## Contextual FAQs- For agency users, relevant FAQs are labeled with "(For Agency)" to indicate their applicability.- Location-level users will see tailored FAQs without any tags.# Why it MattersThis enhancement to the user experience is designed to increase confidence and clarity for users purchasing domains. By clearly communicating value and addressing potential concerns upfront, the update reduces friction in the decision-making process and encourages successful transactions.# Important Notes- The core functionality for domain purchases remains the same.- This is a visual and informational update focused solely on improving user experience.- The FAQ content may be updated over time in response to user feedback and emerging needs.
Image without caption
domains
new
improved
2 months ago

In-App Troubleshooting Links for Domain Setup Errors

# OverviewWe’re improving the domain connection experience by introducing in-platform troubleshooting links. When users encounter common domain setup errors, a new "Troubleshoot This Issue" link will appear, guiding them to targeted help documentation.# What’s New
Contextual Troubleshooting Guidance:
Users setting up domains manually will now see a "Troubleshoot This Issue" call-to-action when specific DNS errors are detected, including:- Multiple A records found- AAAA record conflict- CAA block issuance- CNAME/A record mismatch
Integrated Help Documentation:
Clicking the troubleshooting link opens a dedicated help article in a new tab, providing step-by-step instructions specific to the detected issue.
Universal Availability:
This feature is available across all areas where users connect domains, including Funnels, Websites, Blogs, Webinars, WordPress, Email, Client Portals, and Branded Domains.
Why It Matters
Previously, users often had to rely on support to resolve DNS setup issues due to limited guidance. This update empowers users to resolve common configuration problems independently, reducing the volume of support requests and enabling faster setup completion.# Important Notes- This feature is informational only; it does not automatically fix DNS issues.- Users must follow the help documentation to update or remove conflicting DNS records (A, AAAA, CNAME, etc.).- Available platform-wide wherever domain connections are supported.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
domains
new
2 months ago

Enabling Domain Purchase Feature at Agency Level!

# Agencies with Domain Purchase Feature DisabledAgencies with the domain purchase feature disabled at the agency level will now see in-app prompts encouraging them to enable it. This helps ensure that all sub-accounts can easily access domain purchasing, increasing feature adoption and platform reach.## What’s New- When an agency admin or owner visits any location’s Domains page and finds that domain purchase is disabled at the agency level, a popup will appear prompting them to enable it. Additionally, a “Purchase a Domain” call-to-action (CTA) will be shown; clicking it triggers the same popup.- Once the admin clicks "Enable," domain purchasing is activated for all locations under that agency, and the user is redirected to the Domain Search page to proceed with the purchase.## Why it Matters- Many agencies onboarded before the domain purchase feature was introduced still have it disabled by default. Data shows that 59% of these agencies remain active, and of those, 91.3% have not enabled domain purchasing. This results in 52% of active agencies today lacking access to this feature.- By introducing nudges, we aim to raise awareness, boost adoption, and empower more users to get online with ease.## Important Notes- Only agency admins or owners can see the popup and enable the feature. The popup includes Terms & Conditions based on the agency's plan.- Once enabled, the feature becomes active for all associated locations. No prompts will appear if the domain purchase feature is already enabled at the agency level, regardless of the location-specific setting.
Image without caption
Image without caption
voice ai
new
2 months ago

Appointment Booking Now Available in Voice AI

# ✨ OverviewAppointment booking using AI agents streamlines scheduling by automatically offering and confirming meeting slots based on predefined rules. No separate workflows or booking links are needed. If a contact's email is missing, the agent will prompt for it before proceeding.# 💁🏻 Note:To enable this feature, go to
Settings > Labs > Enable Appointment Booking for Voice AI.
# 🔍 What’s New?-
Calendar Selection:
Choose which calendar the AI agent uses for booking.-
Days of Offering Dates:
Set how many consecutive days of slots to offer (e.g., 3 days).-
Appointment Slots Per Day:
Define the maximum number of slots per day (e.g., 3).-
Hours Between Slots:
Specify the gap between appointments in hours (e.g., 3).
Note:
If the contact's email is missing, the AI will request it before proceeding with a booking.# 🚀 What Does This Mean?-
Enhanced Availability:
Reduce manual scheduling and prevent double-booking.-
Seamless Experience:
Offer and confirm appointments without leaving the call.-
Improved Efficiency:
Automate scheduling tasks, saving time for both agents and contacts.# 🔧 Use Cases1.
Sales Meetings:
Automatically offer available time slots to prospects during discovery calls.2.
Support Calls:
Schedule follow-up sessions with customers within the same conversation.3.
Service Appointments:
Book on-site service slots for field technicians without additional workflows.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
phone system
new
2 months ago

Sole Proprietor A2P Registration Reinstated with Enhanced Identity Verification

# Sole Proprietor A2P Registration Reinstated with Enhanced Identity VerificationSole Proprietor A2P registration is now re-enabled in LvlUp, allowing individuals and small businesses without an EIN to complete their A2P registration. This update introduces mandatory identity verification to enhance compliance and align with carrier standards.## Key Updates:
Identity Verification Requirement
: All Sole Proprietor registrations now require identity verification, which is triggered at the final step of the registration process, just before submission.
Unchanged Registration Flow
: The existing Sole Proprietor registration flow, including form structure and validations, remains the same to ensure a familiar user experience.## What This Means for Users:
Enhanced Compliance
: The addition of identity verification strengthens compliance with carrier regulations, reducing the risk of fraud and abuse in the messaging ecosystem.
Seamless User Experience
: Despite the added verification step, the registration process remains straightforward and user-friendly.
Immediate Effect
: Users can now proceed with Sole Proprietor A2P registration, completing the necessary identity verification to finalize their registration.## When Verification is Triggered:
Trigger Point
:Verification is always triggered at the final step, after business and campaign information has been submitted, and before submission.
Flow
:- User completes Sole Proprietor-specific A2P registration steps- Before final submission, the user is prompted to verify their identity- Upon success, the submission is completed and the campaign is created
What the Verification Step Looks Like
:- A live selfie with simple head movements- Upload or capture of a valid government-issued ID- Instant result: Users are returned to the flow immediately upon success
Image without caption
Image without caption
seo
new
2 months ago

SEO i18n - Missing Language Keys Added

This release delivers comprehensive internationalization (i18n) support to the SEO module by integrating all previously missing language keys. The goal is to enhance the localization experience for global users and streamline translation consistency.## What Changed
i18n Enhancements for the SEO Module:
- Audited the entire SEO module to identify missing translation keys.- Added all missing language keys across SEO-related features.- Standardized key naming conventions for clarity and consistency.- Grouped related translation entries for easier future maintenance.- Ensured fallback mechanisms are intact for unsupported or missing locales.## Benefits- Enables consistent translation of all SEO module elements across supported languages.- Reduces the risk of untranslated or broken UI components in international environments.- Simplifies future localization updates through better structure and naming conventions.
voice ai
new
2 months ago

Updated Post-Call Email Notification options - Voice AI Agents

# ✉️ OverviewWe’ve enhanced post-call email notifications to give you full control over who receives them. Previously, notifications were limited to admins, and users could only add one additional recipient. Now, there are no restrictions on admins or a single recipient.## 🧩 Why It Matters-
Personalization:
Notify only the people who need to know.-
Reduced Noise:
Avoid sending unwanted emails to all admins.-
Improved Usability:
Easily configure multiple recipients.## 📧 What’s New?1.
Flexible Selection:
Choose one or more recipient types instead of just one.2.
Admin Opt‑Out:
Notifications no longer default to all admins.3.
Recipient Categories:
- All Admins- All Users- Contact’s Assigned User- Specific Users- Custom Email4.
UI Update:
New multi-select controls in the
Agent Goals
tab.## 📌 How It Works1. Go to the
Create or Update Agent
flow in Voice AI.2. Navigate to the
Agent Goals
tab.3. Toggle on
Receive Email Notification Post Call Completion
.4. Select one or more recipient types (All Admins, All Users, Contact’s Assigned User, Specific Users, or Custom Email).5. If
Specific Users
is selected, choose users from the dropdown list.6. If
Custom Email
is selected, enter the desired email address.7. Click
Save
to apply your notification settings.## 📝 Points to Note- Available by default for all agents—no additional setup required.- Configure under
Agent Goals > Receive Email Notification Post Call Completion
.
Image without caption
payments
e-commerce stores
new
2 months ago

Duplicate Products on Product Page

# What’s New?We're excited to introduce the
Duplicate Products
functionality on the product page! Now, merchants can easily create copies of existing products directly from the Product List page, significantly simplifying catalog management for similar or repeat items.## Key Highlights:-
New "Duplicate" Action:
Available under the product's Actions menu.-
Preserves All Details:
Copies the title, description, pricing, variants, images, and settings.-
Auto-Naming:
The new product is titled “Copy of [Original Product Name].”-
Quick Edit:
You’ll be redirected to the product editor to make changes before publishing.## How to Use It:1. Go to your
Product List
in the Ecommerce dashboard.2. Click the Actions dropdown on the product you wish to duplicate.3. Select
Duplicate
.4. You’ll be redirected to the new product’s edit screen, where you can make any desired changes.5. Save and publish when you're ready!## Key Points to Note:- All variants and images are carried over, saving time and reducing manual effort.
Image without caption
Image without caption
documents & contracts
improved
2 months ago

Document viewed: Easy notification set up for better follow ups

# What's New?- In the in-house tool for Documents & Contracts, where you can collect legally binding e-signatures, you now have the option to easily enable notifications whenever your document is first viewed by any of your recipients.- This feature will help you stay better informed once any contact has accessed the document.## How to Use-
Navigate
: Go to Payments > Documents & Contracts > Settings > Team Notifications-
Enable
: Turn on "Document Viewed"(Optional)
Customize Email
:- Edit the subject (e.g., “Document Viewed”)- In the body, insert {{Preview URL}}-
Behavior
: Only the first view (across all recipients) will send one alert to the sender's email.If you want a viewed notification for all recipients when your document has multiple recipients, you can configure a workflow:- Use trigger: Documents & Contracts → Document Viewed (Status = Viewed)- Add actions (e.g., send email)## Why We Built ItThis feature was developed to notify you as soon as your recipient views the document for the first time, allowing you to follow up and move the document towards completion.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
funnels and websites
webinars
new
2 months ago

Audit Logs Now Available in Funnels, Websites, Webinars & Stores!

We’ve rolled out Audit Logs across Funnels, Websites, Webinars, and Stores. By capturing detailed logs of actions,
this feature provides a transparent and traceable history of how your digital assets evolve over time.
## Audit Logs are now active for the following areas:- Funnels- Websites- Webinars- Stores (eCommerce)Each area has independent filtering and navigation, making it easy to find relevant events.## Tracked ActionsThe following user actions are recorded in detail:- Folder Delete- Move to Folder- Funnel Delete- Funnel Settings Change- Domain Removed- Step Edit- Step Reorder- Step Delete- Step Restore Variation- Step Delete Variation- Choose Split Test Winner- Stats Reset- Page Edit🔴
Audit logs will show logs for the last 60 days!
🔴## Where to Find It- Navigate to Settings > Audit Logs in your location/account.- Use tabs/icons to switch between modules.- Filter by: Module (e.g., Funnels, Websites) / Operation type (e.g., Updated, Deleted) / Date/time range.
Image without caption
Image without caption
mobile app
crm
documents & contracts
contacts
new
2 months ago

Mobile App - Docs & Files in Contacts

# You’ve been waiting for a better way to manage documents — and it’s here.Introducing
Docs and Files
, a brand-new tab at the contact level that brings all your important files together, right where you need them.Whether you’re sending contracts, sharing estimates, attaching invoices, or tracking signed agreements, the
Docs and Files
tab consolidates everything in one place. You can upload up to 10 files at once (up to 250 MB) in popular formats like PDF, DOC, JPG, PNG, PPT, and more — directly under each contact. Documents are automatically sorted into folders like
Internal
,
Sent
,
Received
, and even
Custom Fields
, so your files are always easy to find.This update brings us another step closer to a truly unified contact experience — where your communications, tasks, and documents live side by side.---## 📁 Docs and Files Tab — Now AvailableYou’ll now see a new tab called
Docs and Files
when you open any contact. Inside, you’ll find:-
Internal
: For manually uploaded files.-
Sent
: Files auto-saved from your outgoing conversations.-
Received
: Files received via conversations.-
Custom Fields
: Auto-organized documents linked to specific fields (nested under
Internal
).## 📄 Supported File TypesDOCX, PDF, JPG, PNG, PPT, GIF — up to 10 files per upload.---## 📲 How to Use It?1. Open any contact.2. Swipe to the
Docs and Files
tab.3. Tap
Upload
to add your documents.4. Browse by folder or preview files with a single tap.It’s your contact’s digital filing cabinet — organized, streamlined, and built for the way you work.---
Availability:
LvlUp v3.97.3 and aboveLeadConnector v3.97.3 and aboveWhite Labelled apps - Update to be requested
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
voice ai
new
2 months ago

Test Voice AI Agent Quickly While Creating the Agent

# 📝 OverviewWe’ve made it even easier to validate your AI Agent before going live! Now you can test your AI Agent directly in the final step of the Create Agent flow. There's no need to navigate away—just enter your number, receive a call, and experience your agent in action instantly.# 🧩 Why It Matters-
Instant Feedback:
Test your agent immediately after setup.-
More Control:
Validate configurations on the spot without extra navigation.# ✨ What’s New?-
Seamless Testing:
Run a test call right after setup, without leaving the Create Agent flow.-
Real-Time Call Insights:
Access transcripts, recordings, and summaries immediately after the test call.-
Faster Validation:
Ensure your agent’s prompts and logic work correctly before going live.# 🔧 How It Works1. In the Create Agent flow, reach the
Phone & Availability
step.2. Enter the phone number you want to test with.3. Click
Call Me
to receive a test call from your AI Agent.4. Interact with your agent to evaluate its responses.5. After the call completes, review:-
Call History
– View past test calls.-
Transcripts & Recordings
– Analyze conversation details.-
Summaries & Feedback
– Rate the interaction and refine your agent’s behavior.
Image without caption
Image without caption
voice ai
new
2 months ago

Number Pool Support for Voice AI Agents

# 🚀 OverviewWe now support assigning a Number Pool—a collection of multiple phone numbers—to your Voice AI Agents. Calls to any number in the pool will route dynamically based on your agent’s configuration.# 🧩 Why It Matters1.
Single-Agent Efficiency:
Handle calls to multiple numbers with one agent, reducing the need to create and manage separate agents.2.
Streamlined Workflow:
Centralizes call routing, simplifying operations and minimizing redundancy.# ✨ What’s New?1.
Number Pool Assignment:
You can assign a Number Pool to your agent under
Create/Update Agent → Phone & Availability
.2.
Dynamic Call Routing:
Incoming calls to any pool number will route through LvlUp, with AI handling based on backup and availability settings.3.
Agent Listing Visibility:
Agents with a Number Pool will appear on the Agent Listing Screen for easier management.4.
Call Tracking & Logs:
AI agent call logs and dashboards now display the specific phone number used, enhancing visibility and insights.# 📝 Points to NoteEnsure you have at least one Number Pool created in order to use this feature.
Image without caption
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
2 months ago

Calendly Event Importer – Sync Past Events

We’re excited to announce an enhancement to the Calendly Event Importer!# What's New?
Previously
, only new events (created after connecting) were imported. With this update, we
now
automatically import both
upcoming events
and
past events
created within the
last 180 days
at the time of connecting your Calendly account.This feature helps you utilize
LvlUp’s full suite of tools
—contacts, conversations, automations, marketing, and more. With this integration, each Calendly event will be imported into LvlUp, enabling you to take immediate actions and
fully leverage
LvlUp’s capabilities.When you connect
Calendly to LvlUp
, the system will now:- Import all future scheduled events- Import all events created in the past 180 days
⚠️ Important Note:
- Workflows will only trigger for future events.- No workflows will be triggered for past events synced during the initial connection.# How to Use?To connect your Calendly account, follow these simple steps:1. Navigate to 'Calendars' > 'Calendar Settings' > '
Connections
.'2. Click on '
Add New
.'3. Choose '
Calendly
' and click '
Connect
.'4. Complete the
authentication
process by signing into your Calendly account and granting the necessary access.5. Once your Calendly account is successfully connected,
select the calendars
from which you want to import events.6. Give
consent
to import your events by checking the consent box and clicking 'Save.'7. Your integration is now set up and
ready to use.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
e-commerce stores
webinars
fixed
new
2 months ago

Thumbnail Generation for Webinars and Stores

# OverviewThis update resolves an issue where thumbnails were not being generated properly when creating new webinars or eCommerce stores. The changes ensure that thumbnails are created consistently and reliably across both workflows.## Fixes and Improvements
Thumbnail Generation Fixed:
We have addressed the issue where thumbnails were missing when:- An eCommerce store was created from a blank template- A new webinar was created## Improved ReliabilityThe thumbnail generation process has been refined to improve its reliability and consistency across different creation scenarios.
Image without caption
Image without caption
funnels and websites
e-commerce stores
webinars
new
improved
2 months ago

Websites, Ecomm and Webinar Pages View Performance Updates!

# OverviewThis release includes several key optimizations designed to enhance the performance and responsiveness of the Websites, Webinars, and E-commerce Pages view. These improvements reduce loading times, minimize unnecessary data usage, and streamline the user experience—especially for accounts with a large number of pages.## What's Improved
1. Optimized Thumbnail Loading
- Thumbnails are now lazy-loaded, optimized, and cached.- They load only when needed, resulting in significantly faster and more efficient page rendering.
2. Smarter Page Data Loading
- Page details are now fetched only when their corresponding cards become visible on the screen.- This reduces unnecessary background data loading, improving performance for large websites with many pages.
3. Reduced API Calls
- Redundant API calls have been eliminated.- Previously, loading a website with around 5 pages could trigger up to 15–17 API calls.Post-update, the number of calls has been reduced by more than half, leading to better speed and lower resource usage.
contacts
api
new
2 months ago

Contacts | Bulk Update Tags using APIs

# We're Excited to Announce the Release of the Contact Update Bulk Tags Public API!This new feature allows you to easily create and remove tags using public APIs.## What's New?Managing tags for contact notes just got easier! With these new public APIs, you can now:-
Create Tags:
Add new tags to up to 500 contacts in bulk. The maximum limit for tags is 50.-
Remove Tags:
Remove all tags from contacts in bulk.
client portal
contacts
new
2 months ago

CRM Contacts And Client Portal

# 📌 OverviewWe’ve added a new feature to the Document Management System within the Contacts section, enabling seamless integration with the Client Portal. CRM users can now share files directly with contacts and also receive files back, all from within the Documents area.# ⚡ Why Does It Matter?1.
Centralized Files
: All shared and received documents are located under a single Documents tab, reducing fragmentation.2.
Improved Collaboration
: Businesses and clients can exchange files without the need for email or third-party storage.3.
Enhanced Control
: Users and contacts can manage their own uploads, and CRM users can revoke access instantly.# 🔍 What’s New?### 📂 Share Documents from CRM to Client Portal1. Under CRM > Contacts > Documents, each file now has a Share toggle.2. Turning it On grants the contact immediate access in their portal.3. Turning it Off revokes access instantly, without file deletions or extra clicks needed.### 📥 Client Uploads to CRM1. Contacts can click "Upload Document" in the Client Portal; files will appear under CRM > Documents > Client Portal.2. Contacts can delete their uploads at any time to keep their portal organized.3. Both CRM users and contacts can preview or download any shared or uploaded document.# ➕ Points to Note1. This feature will only be available to contacts who are users of the client portal.2. Documents and Contracts cannot be toggled for sharing or unsharing at this time.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
whatsapp
new
improved
2 months ago

WhatsApp: Location Rendering & Inbound Contacts

We’re excited to announce two powerful enhancements to the WhatsApp experience inside LvlUp’s Conversations page. These updates improve visibility and efficiency when handling WhatsApp messages—whether you're receiving shared locations or managing contact cards sent by your customers.# What’s New?## 1. Location Rendering in ConversationsWhen a customer sends their location via WhatsApp, it will now visually render as a map preview right inside the Conversations page. Similarly, if your business sends a location to the customer, it will appear in the conversation with a map preview.➕
Bonus:
The shared location is clickable and opens in Google Maps in a new browser tab, allowing your team to quickly view, navigate, or share directions externally.## 2. Inbound WhatsApp ContactsWhen a customer shares a contact via WhatsApp, the contact’s name and phone number are displayed on the Conversations page.# How It Works:1.
Location Rendering:
Go to Conversations > Select a WhatsApp Chat. If a location is shared, a map preview will appear along with a clickable link that opens the location on Google Maps in a new tab.2.
Inbound Contact Display:
When a customer shares a contact via WhatsApp, the contact’s name and phone number are displayed on the Conversations page.# Business Benefits📍
Better Context for Conversations:
Easily identify and respond to location-based queries with an embedded map and instant access to Google Maps.
Image without caption
Image without caption
communities
new
improved
fixed
2 months ago

Communities Enhancements and Fixes - profile slug is now editable!!

# Communities Enhancements and Fixes
Profile Slug is Now Editable
We’ve just made your community profile more personalized! You can now edit your profile slug in Communities. Instead of using a default URL, you can customize it to match your brand, name, or style. Here’s what you can do:- Change your profile URL to something memorable (like
yourcommunity.com/u/shauncominatya
).- Boost your credibility with a clean, branded link.- Make it easier for others to find and share your content.Whether you're a coach, creator, or community leader, your profile just got a professional upgrade.
Head to Settings > Profile and hit the pencil icon next to your slug to get started.Skool Importer Just Got Smarter
You’ll now receive complete threads, including all comment history, making migrations seamless and organized. Bring the full conversation over without missing a beat, along with your posts.---
Other Fixes We've Rolled Out Recently
- Group owners are now correctly restored as Channel Managers in their respective private channels.- Access and moderation controls are back to normal—no more “locked out” experiences.
Image without caption
communities
new
2 months ago

Communities group filter in Smartlist

We’ve introduced a brand-new Community Groups filter to LvlUp’s Smart Lists, giving you enhanced control and precision when managing your contacts.## What’s New?A “Groups” filter is now available under the Client Portal section in the filter panel. You can easily search for “community” or "Client Portal" to quickly access the new filter.Filter contacts based on the Community Groups they belong to—eliminating the need for manual sorting or guesswork!## Why You’ll Love It:- Quickly segment users by community membership.- Easily run targeted campaigns or communications for group members.- Save time managing large communities with smarter filtering.- Keep your contact list focused and driven by community engagement!Try it out now in Contacts → Smart Lists → Filters → Groups.
Image without caption
Image without caption
blogs
funnels and websites
e-commerce stores
improved
fixed
2 months ago

Fixes and enhancements to right sidebar

# Enhancements-
All panels expanded by default:
All settings panels are fully open when you launch the builder, allowing you to collapse whichever ones you don’t need. Previously, some panels were collapsed to show all categories on one screen.-
Switch to General whenever a new element is added:
New sections and elements that are dragged and dropped automatically open the
General
settings tab. In earlier versions, the previously opened settings tab remained open.-
Reordered controls:
We’ve shuffled and organized some settings panels for a more intuitive flow.# Bug Fixes- Fixed an issue where the width setting for the button and video elements wasn't displaying the correct preview in the builder.
certificates
new
2 months ago

Manual Expiry Date Selection for Templates

1.
Manual Template Expiry Dates
: Users can now choose between two options:- Set a specific expiry date for the template.- Select "Never Expire" to keep the template active indefinitely.2.
Remove Expiry Option
: Users can easily remove the expiry date by selecting "Never Expire" again.3.
Reminder Email Customization
: After setting the expiry date, users can continue to customize the days for reminder emails as usual.
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
2 months ago

Chat Widget Now Loads After Cookie Consent

# We’ve Enhanced the Chat WidgetWe’ve improved the Chat Widget to load only after users accept cookie consent on Funnel websites.## What’s New?- The widget will now check for cookie consent before rendering on LvlUp funnels websites.- If cookie consent has already been given, the widget loads as expected.- If consent has not been provided, the widget will wait and only load after consent is granted.## Why It MattersThis improvement prevents the widget from overlapping the cookie banner and ensures a smoother, compliant user experience.
Image without caption
mobile app
phone system
conversations
contacts
new
2 months ago

Mobile App - Spam Management

# We’re Excited to Announce the Rollout of Spam Tagging on MobileSpam Tagging is here to help you and your team identify suspicious calls in real-time, avoid distractions, and stay focused on what matters.Whether it’s an incoming spam call or a missed one, the app now alerts you with a clear “Spam Likely” tag throughout the entire call experience—from the incoming screen to call logs and call details. Your mobile phone just got a lot smarter (and quieter).This feature is now live in the public beta for LvlUp and LeadConnector, with a full rollout coming soon.---## 📲 What’s New on Mobile?### 🚨 Spam Tagging — Now Live Across the App-
Incoming Call Screen:
Instantly see “Spam Likely” labeled on suspicious calls as they ring—right on both Android and iOS.-
In-App Call Screen:
Answered the call? You’ll see the “Spam Likely” label during the live call view.-
Call Logs & Details:
Navigate to your recent calls and instantly identify spam-marked numbers. Tap into a specific call log to view the tag upfront.Whether you pick up or miss it, you’ll know exactly what kind of call it was.---## 🔮 What’s Coming Next?### ⚙️ Spam Call Detection as a Workflow Trigger
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
2 months ago

Mobile App - DND Enhancement

DND is no longer buried behind six clicks and three menus. It’s now exactly where you need it — right in the middle of your daily workflows.Whether you’re fielding incoming calls, managing conversations, or reviewing logs on the go, you can now mark contacts as DND (Do Not Disturb) with just one tap, directly from the screen you’re on.This is more than just a shortcut — it’s a powerful upgrade that puts cleaner automation, safer contact handling, and frictionless control right at your fingertips. DND is finally as mobile as you are.Now live in public beta for LvlUp and LeadConnector, with a full rollout coming soon.---# 📲 What’s New on Mobile?## 🔕 Contextual, One-Tap DND Access – Right Where You Need ItDND has been reimagined for mobile — no more navigating deep into contact settings. You can now add numbers to your DND list instantly from:-
Incoming Call Screen
→ Tap “DND” during a live call to immediately block inbound calls and SMS from that number.→ This will also end the ongoing call, giving you full control without any extra steps.-
Call Logs
→ Tap any recent call, and you’ll now see a DND option ready to go.-
Conversation Swipe Action
→ From the main Conversations screen, just swipe on any thread and mark it as DND — choose which channels (calls, SMS, social channels, etc.) to apply it to.This update ensures that your outreach remains clean, compliance-friendly, and distraction-free, especially for users handling high volumes of calls and messages on the go.---# 🧠 Why It Matters-
Efficient Contact Management
Keep DND contacts out of campaigns, workflows, and automations effortlessly.-
Reduced Friction
What used to take five to six taps can now be accomplished in just one.-
Designed for Mobility
Perfect for teams in the field, sales reps, and anyone managing fast-moving conversations from their phone.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
2 months ago

Email Statistics Dashboard Updates 🚀

# What We Did- Made the Statistics page the new default landing page in Email Marketing.- Introduced a dummy data view so new users can explore without sending a campaign.- Added UI indicators to clearly show when you're viewing dummy data.- Once you send your first campaign, the page will automatically display real statistics by default.## Benefits- Instant overview of campaign statistics for new users.- Preview widgets using sample data.- Easy demos without sending real campaigns.## How to Check It- Go to Email Marketing.- You’ll land on the Statistics page.- If you're new, you’ll see a prompt to view with dummy data.- Click “View with Dummy Data” to preview the full statistics.- After you send your first campaign, the page will automatically show live statistics.
Image without caption
Image without caption
online listings
improved
2 months ago

Improved Post-Subscription Experience for Listings

We’ve enhanced the onboarding journey for Listings with contextual call-to-action buttons that facilitate a faster and smoother setup—especially for users managing multiple entities.## What’s New:- After a successful purchase, users will now see a
“Complete Setup”
button at the top of the Entities view.- Clicking this button opens a modal listing all entities with pending Listings setup.- Each entity displays a
clear status
: Pending or Completed, allowing users to complete them in any order.This modal is accessible across both the Listings Dashboard and Reselling Config screens.## Why It Matters:✅ Reduces drop-off rates after purchase✅ Improves setup completion rates✅ Streamlines onboarding for multi-entity usersGet your Listings up and running in just a few clicks!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
conversation ai
new
2 months ago

Multiple Knowledge Bases in Conversation AI

# What's New?We’ve introduced the Multiple Knowledge Base feature—allowing users to create and manage separate knowledge bases for each Conversation AI bot. Unlike the previous system where all bots shared a single knowledge base, you now have complete flexibility to tailor knowledge sources for each bot.
Use Case:
Let’s say you have the following setup:- Knowledge Bases: A, B, and C- AI Agents: Jane and ParkerWith this feature:- You can assign Knowledge Bases A and B to Jane, so she will only be trained on those.- Meanwhile, Parker can be trained exclusively on Knowledge Base C, allowing each bot to serve different use cases or clients independently.# How It Works
Access the Knowledge Base Section:
- A new “Knowledge Base” menu item has been added to the left navigation panel.- This is your central hub for creating and managing all knowledge bases.
Create a New Knowledge Base:
- Click “Create Knowledge Base.”- Enter a name for reference and click “Save & Continue.”- You can create up to 15 knowledge bases.
Train a Knowledge Base:
- Add training data via URLs and FAQs.- Note: File upload support is coming soon!
Attach Knowledge Bases to a Bot:
- Go to any Conversation AI Bot training.- Use the Knowledge Base dropdown to select up to 7 knowledge bases to train the bot.- Each bot can be trained on different knowledge bases, offering tailored responses for each use case.
View & Manage Assigned Knowledge Bases:
- Assigned knowledge bases appear as tabs in the bot training section.- Click “Create New” within the bot view to make a knowledge base on the fly.
Please Note:
The existing knowledge base that you have cannot be deleted because it is used by default for the workflow bots. Support for multiple knowledge bases for workflow bots will be released soon.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
reporting
dashboard
new
2 months ago

Sub-Account Dashboards & Reporting: Reschedule Filter for Appointments

You can now track rescheduled appointments in both your dashboards and appointment reports, providing deeper insights into scheduling patterns.# What’s New?- New
Rescheduled
filter available in appointment dashboard widgets.- New column for rescheduled status in Granular Insights.- New column for rescheduled status in table widgets.- New chart on the Appointment Reporting page:
Top 5 Calendars with Reschedules
.# How It Works:1.
Appointment Reporting:
Go to the Appointment Reporting page and scroll down to view the new
Top 5 Calendars with Reschedules
chart.2.
Dashboards:
Add or edit any appointment widget, go to the Conditions tab, and apply the Rescheduled filter. Save your changes.# Why It Matters:Quickly identify which calendars have the most rescheduled appointments. This feature is useful for understanding trends, optimizing scheduling, and improving customer experience.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
affiliate manager
improved
2 months ago

Sub Account Affiliate Manager: Streamlined Affiliate Profile Editing

Managing affiliate details just got faster and simpler. The improved editing flow allows you to easily view, update, and take action directly within the affiliate profile — all in one place.# 👀 What’s New?- New tabs for structured information including:
Basic Info
(Email, First Name, Last Name, Company Name),
Details
(Website, Phone Number, Country, Address, W-8/W-9 Forms), and
Socials
(Manage social media handles).-
Quick Actions from Profile:
Add/Remove from Campaign, Suspend Affiliate, Delete Affiliate, Add Manual Sale, and more.# 👷 How It Works:1. Navigate to the Affiliate Manager.2. Click on an Affiliate Profile.3. Tap the Edit icon next to the name to update profile details.4. Use the 3-dot menu for quick actions like suspend, delete, or campaign updates.# ⭐ Why it Matters:Affiliate management is now centralized and more intuitive. This reduces back-and-forth, improves data accuracy, and speeds up day-to-day operations — especially for users handling high volumes of affiliates.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
new
2 months ago

Bulk Action Campaigns Now Visible in Email Marketing 🚀

# What’s New:As part of the All-in-One initiative for email campaigns, campaigns created from Bulk Actions now appear in the Email Marketing section, providing consistent statistics and list views across all campaigns.## Benefits:- Centralized campaign view- Consistent reporting and stats- Improved transparency## How to Check It:1. Create a campaign via Bulk Action in Contacts.2. Go to Email Marketing > Campaigns.3. Select Bulk Action Campaigns to view your campaigns.4. Click the three dots to view stats.⚡
Coming Soon:
Consolidated statistics in the email marketing dashboard. All campaigns, one place—simplified and streamlined!
Image without caption
Image without caption
wordpress hosting & reselling
new
2 months ago

SSH Access + SSH Key Management for WordPress Hosting

You can now securely access your WordPress server via SSH using public key authentication — perfect for developers and power users.✨
Highlights:
-
SSH Access Toggle
: Enable or disable SSH from the WordPress Dashboard → Advanced Settings → Server Settings → Access SSH.-
SSH Key Support
: Authenticate using secure SSH keys (password authentication not supported).-
CLI Access
: Run commands directly on the server via WP-CLI — manage plugins, clear caches, import large files, and more.-
Improved Efficiency
: Bypass browser limits, automate workflows, and streamline site management with command-line tools.
Why it matters:
This feature provides advanced server-level control and speed for power users and agencies — especially beneficial for large sites, automation workflows, or troubleshooting.
How to Use:
1. Go to WordPress Dashboard → Advanced Settings → Server Settings → Access SSH.2. Toggle SSH Access ON.3. Upload your SSH Public Key.4. Use the provided connection details to log in via your preferred SSH client.Take full control of your WordPress environment — enjoy faster workflows, deeper access, and professional-level flexibility now at your fingertips.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
contacts
new
2 months ago

Activity Section Upgrade

# OverviewWe’ve fully redesigned the
Contacts → Activity
section. You’ll now see a continuous activity stream featuring distinct icons, date groupings, clickable cards, and backend optimizations that deliver faster load times and a cleaner interface.## 🚀 What’s New?1.
New Event Icons
: Each activity type (calls, emails, notes, etc.) has its own icon for instant recognition.2.
Date Groupings
: Activities are grouped under headings like “Today” and “Yesterday” for chronological clarity.3.
Clickable Event Cards
: Each card displays the title, timestamp, campaign/source labels, and links.4.
Database Optimizations
: Under-the-hood improvements lead to quicker loads, faster processing, and more reliable data.5.
Responsive Design
: Enhanced interaction and layout consistency on desktop and tablet screens.## ⚡ Why This Matters?1.
Performance Boost
: Enjoy faster page loads and smoother scrolling thanks to optimized queries and indexing.2.
Reduced Clutter
: Clear icons and date headers make it easy to scan for specific events.3.
Increased Productivity
: Click-through cards provide detailed interaction data in one tap, keeping you in context.## 🔍 How to See the Redesigned Activity Section1. To enable this feature, go to Settings > Labs > Activity Section Upgrade, and toggle it on.2. Go to Contacts → Activity.3. Click any event card for details.4. Click any event’s link icon to jump directly to that external URL.## 🔗 Pro Tips1.
Direct Access
: Click an event’s link right from the card to jump to related records or external URLs.2.
Use Date Headers
: Collapse older groups to focus only on your most recent activity.## ➕ What’s Next1.
More Activity Types
: We’ll soon add new event categories (e.g., SMS, form submissions).2.
Attribution Filters & Columns
: Upcoming updates will allow you to filter and display attribution data directly in this stream.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
wordpress hosting & reselling
new
2 months ago

Add Popular Plugins on WordPress Site Setup

You can now select from a curated list of popular WordPress plugins during the site creation process, making it faster and easier to set up your site with essential tools from day one.# What’s New-
Curated Plugin Selection:
During site setup, choose from a list of widely used and recommended plugins.-
Automatic Installation and Activation:
Selected plugins are installed and activated automatically when your site is created.-
Flexible and Optional:
Choose only the plugins you want—no defaults, no forced installs. You can manage, deactivate, or remove them anytime after setup.# How It Works1. Go to
Sites → WordPress
Dashboard.2. Click
Create Site
.3. On the
Popular Plugins
step, select the plugins you want.4.
Finish Setup
—your selected plugins will be pre-installed and active.5. Manage all installed plugins later from the
WordPress → Plugins
section.# Why It MattersThis update streamlines your onboarding experience, saving time and helping you customize your WordPress site quickly with the tools you actually need—all while maintaining full control.Quickly set up your site with essential plugins during creation—saving time and giving you full control from the start!
Image without caption
Image without caption
wordpress hosting & reselling
new
improved
2 months ago

Seamless Onboarding with New WordPress Site Setup CTAs and Emails

We’ve made it easier than ever for users to get started with their WordPress sites immediately after payment. This includes clearer prompts, a smoother dashboard experience, and new targeted email notifications! 🚀## Email NotificationsWe’ve introduced three new email triggers to guide users through their WordPress setup journey:-
Payment Confirmation Email:
Confirms payment and prompts users to start setting up their site right away.-
Utility Plan Subscription Email:
A special welcome email for Utility Plan users, highlighting plan benefits and next steps.-
Truly Unlimited Plan Subscription Email:
A premium welcome email for Truly Unlimited Plan users, emphasizing unlimited hosting benefits and access to premium support.## Additional Improvements-
Enhanced Dashboard UI:
Key calls-to-action (CTAs) are now more visible for users with incomplete setups or failed payments, making it easier to take action.-
Refined Post-Payment Flow:
Setup actions are now prioritized, helping users launch their sites faster.-
Quick Access Buttons:
New action buttons have been added on the WordPress Dashboard and Sub-Account Reselling Page for one-click setup access.## Why It MattersFaster setups, clearer guidance, and better support — all designed to help users get their WordPress sites live without any confusion or delays!Get your WordPress site up and running faster with smoother onboarding, clearer CTAs, and helpful email guidance — right from payment to launch! 🚀
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
new
2 months ago

Rearrange Elements and Layouts with Arrow Controls 🚀

📌
Problem:
Rearranging elements and layouts was manual and time-consuming, requiring multiple steps. The drag-and-drop option was not very intuitive for users.🎯
What We Did:
We introduced up and down arrow controls that allow you to move elements and layouts directly within the builder.🚀
Benefits:
- Faster and easier organization.- More intuitive design experience.- Reduces time spent on editing layouts.👷
How to Use It:
1. Navigate to Email Marketing.2. Open a Template or Campaign.3. Hover over an element or layout.4. Click the up or down arrow to move it to your desired position.
Image without caption
documents & contracts
improved
new
2 months ago

Documents & Contracts: Cloning of Documents

# OverviewPreviously, users could only clone templates, and there was no straightforward way to create duplicates directly from existing documents. You had to first convert them into a template and then use that template to create a similar-looking document.## What's New?- You can now simply click on "Clone" within a document to create a duplicate.## How to Use?1. Go to
Payments
->
Documents and Contracts
->
Dashboard
.2. Click on the sub-menu options and select
Clone
.3. A new document titled "Document Name Copy" will be created.## Why We Built It?This feature is designed for users who frequently send similar documents with minor changes. The cloning process is now much simpler.
Image without caption
Image without caption
online listings
improved
fixed
new
2 months ago

Listings Subscription – Payment Grace Flow & Access Control

We’ve rolled out a smarter way to handle overdue payments—keeping agencies in control, users informed, and business listings running smoothly.## What’s New### Access Restrictions After Non-PaymentStarting on Day 3 of non-payment, users will see an “Access Denied” message along with a clear explanation and a call-to-action to resolve the issue via payment.### Business Entities & Overview SyncThe Overview tab now reflects incomplete payment or setup statuses and includes a quick link to the Business Entities tab for further action.### Automated Access RestorationOnce payment is completed, platform access is restored automatically—eliminating the need for any manual steps.### Flexible Payment FlowAgency users can now choose to pay either as an Agency Purchase or a Location Purchase, providing more flexibility during the resolution process.## Key Highlights### Access Denied UI BlockThis feature triggers on Day 3, locking access and prompting users to make a payment.### Timed NotificationsEmail and in-app messages are sent on Days 1, 3, 7, 10, with a final cancellation warning on Day 14.### Entity Deletion on Day 14If payment remains unpaid, the entity will be deleted, and a final cancellation email will be sent.### Custom Purchase PathUsers resolving payments can select either the Agency or Location checkout flow for better billing alignment.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
wordpress hosting & reselling
new
2 months ago

🔒 WordPress SEO Indexing Control Is Live!

You asked, we delivered—now you can manage SEO visibility for your WordPress sites directly from LvlUp, without needing plugins or a WordPress login.## 🎉 What’s New-
Disable SEO Indexing:
Prevent search engines from indexing your site with a simple toggle switch.-
One-Click Privacy:
Ideal for development, staging, or private projects that shouldn’t appear on Google.## 🚀 Key Features-
Dashboard Toggle:
Control SEO indexing from the LvlUp dashboard—no WordPress login needed.-
Robots & Meta Updates:
Automatically adds noindex and nofollow directives in the robots.txt file and
<meta>
tags.-
Admin Control Only:
Only administrators can modify this setting.-
Real-Time Feedback:
Success or error messages appear instantly after the toggle is used.## ✨ Why It’s Awesome-
No Plugins Needed:
Manage SEO visibility without the need for additional installations.-
Protect Staging Sites:
Keep work-in-progress sites off search engines.-
Super Simple:
Non-technical users can now control SEO settings like professionals.
Image without caption
Image without caption
online listings
new
2 months ago

🆕 White-Labeled Yext Listings Are Here!

Agencies can now offer Listings powered by Yext without any Yext branding. This update gives agencies full control to present Listings as a native part of their own offering, enhancing brand credibility and providing a fully cohesive client experience.# What’s New-
No More Yext Branding:
All references to Yext have been removed from the Listings experience.-
Native-Looking Product:
Listings now feel like a seamless part of your agency’s service suite.-
Branded Client Experience:
Market the product your way with zero vendor exposure.# Benefits- Strengthen your agency’s brand presence with a white-labeled Listings product.- Maintain direct control over client relationships and communications.- Deliver a polished, professional experience—without third-party distractions.Now you can own the spotlight while we power the stage behind the scenes. 🌟
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
template library
new
2 months ago

Template Library is available in Blog

# What We DidWe introduced a Template Library in the Blog section to help you create blogs faster and more effectively.## Benefits- Save time with a pre-built blog structure- Choose from a variety of blog types## How to Use1. Go to
Sites
>
Blogs
2. Click
New
→ Select
Start with Template Library
3. Browse and click on a template to review it4. Click
Continue
to start editing and customizing your blog
Image without caption
new
2 months ago

A2P registration now helps you increase call answer rates too

# Your Outgoing Voice Calls Are More Likely to Get Answered After You Register for A2P
SHAKEN/STIR
registration helps increase call completion and answer rates by verifying your ownership of the phone number.
CNAM
registration similarly affects calling metrics by allowing your business name to be displayed to your contacts when you call them (with some limitations).If you register for A2P to send SMS, all your phone numbers are automatically registered for SHAKEN/STIR, which increases the likelihood that your calls will be answered.Furthermore, you can enter the name you want to appear as when calling your contacts. It only takes three clicks!This process applies to all new A2P submissions. Sub-accounts with older A2P applications will be automatically registered for SHAKEN/STIR within a few weeks.If you haven't registered for A2P and want to improve your call answer rates, you can register for both SHAKEN/STIR and CNAM on your own by following this guide.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
2 months ago

Reconnect Button in Calendar Connections

# We're Making Calendar and Video Conferencing Integrations Easier Than Ever!## 🔄 Seamless Reconnection FlowPreviously, if your calendar or video conferencing integration broke (due to expired tokens, permission changes, etc.), you had to remove the entire integration and reconnect from scratch. This process was confusing and time-consuming.With our new
Reconnect button
, you can now simply initiate the OAuth flow again to restore your connection—no need to remove and re-add the integration. This update provides a faster and more intuitive experience for fixing broken connections.## ✅ Account-Specific ValidationWe’ve also added an important security and consistency check:- Only the
original account
that was previously connected can be used to reconnect.- If you attempt to reconnect with a
different
account, we’ll display an
error
and ask you to reintegrate the original one.This ensures continuity and avoids accidental misconfigurations.## 🛠️ No More Lost SettingsOne of the biggest pain points was that deleting and re-integrating used to reset your configuration settings. Not anymore!When using the
new Reconnect option
:- Your linked calendar,- Conflict calendars,- Third-Party Calendar selected under Event Calendar, and- Video conferencing tool (under Meeting Location settings)…all remain exactly as they were. You no longer need to manually reconfigure everything after fixing a broken connection.Just
click Reconnect
, go through the
OAuth prompt
, and you're
done
—all your previous settings are retained and your integration is back online.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
funnels and websites
new
2 months ago

Revamped Right Sidebar in the Page Builder!

# 🚀 What’s New?The right sidebar in the Funnel and Website Builder has been revamped with a cleaner, more modern user interface to improve your editing experience. Here’s what’s been updated:-
New Tab Structure:
A new uniform tab structure - "General," "Styles," and "Animations" - makes it easier to locate design-related controls.-
Collapsible Panels:
All settings are now neatly nested inside appropriately consistent collapsible sections, providing you with a clutter-free interface while keeping advanced controls within reach.-
Modern UI:
The new visually pleasing interface reduces cognitive load through better organization.# 🎯 Why This MattersThis update enhances usability by aligning the layout with modern design standards, reduces cognitive load with improved organization, and gives you faster access to the controls that matter most when styling sections.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
opportunities and pipelines
contacts
new
2 months ago

Introducing Opportunity Notes!

🔔 We’re introducing
Opportunity Notes
, a powerful new feature that allows you to link notes independently to Opportunities and Contacts. Enjoy greater flexibility and clarity in organizing your information!## ❓ Why This Feature?This feature provides greater precision and clarity in managing notes by separating Opportunity notes from Contact notes. This prevents clutter and makes important details easier to find.## ✨ What’s New?1.
Entity-Specific Notes
: Create dedicated notes for each Opportunity, separate from Contact notes.2.
Flexible Associations
: Associate notes with Opportunities, Contacts, or both—choose what works best for you.3.
Smart Filtering & Powerful Search
: Quickly filter and find notes by their linked entities.## 🔧 How to Use?1.
To activate this feature
: Go to Subaccount > Settings > Labs and toggle “Opportunity Notes” on.2.
Navigate to the specific tab
: Open the Opportunities tab (or the Contacts tab) and select the relevant record.3.
Create a Note
: Click Add Note, enter your text, and then select the entities (Opportunities, Contacts, or both) under Associated Objects.4.
View & Manage
: Head to Notes under Contacts or Opportunities to view, filter, and efficiently manage your linked notes.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
custom objects
new
2 months ago

Introducing SmartLists for Custom Objects!

📝 We’re thrilled to introduce
SmartLists for Custom Objects
, empowering your team to effortlessly create, manage, and share personalized views for your Custom Objects—significantly enhancing collaboration and data visibility.## ❓ Why This Feature?SmartLists simplify the management of Custom Objects by providing flexible, shareable views, ensuring your team always sees the most relevant information clearly and consistently.## ✨ What’s New?1.
Create & Customize Views
: Easily tailor your SmartLists by selecting advanced filters, sorting, and columns.2.
Instant Search & Navigation
: Quickly locate and switch between different SmartLists.3.
Column Customization
: Adjust and save column widths to suit your preferences.4.
Easy Collaboration
:-
Share Lists
: Share SmartLists with your team or specific individuals via direct links.-
Permissions
: Set precise view-only or edit rights for each user.5.
Efficient Management
:-
Duplicate, Rename, Export, or Delete
: Manage your SmartLists’ lifecycle with a click.-
Admin Oversight
: Admins retain full control and visibility over all SmartLists and can share lists with access control.## 🔔 Also Coming Up:SmartLists will soon be replicated across Contacts, Opportunities, and Companies in a similar manner. Stay tuned for more updates.Enjoy streamlined collaboration and organization with SmartLists!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
payments
new
2 months ago

Support for Dynamic pricing on the Orders API

# What's New?- Businesses can now override the defined product price during checkout when using dynamic pricing via the Orders API. This allows for flexibility in pricing based on specific use cases.- Similar to invoices, even if a product price is defined, it can be adjusted. The calculation of taxes, discounts, and additional charges will continue to apply to the new overridden amount, without changing the base product price.- For example, when booking a calendar appointment for a haircut, the standard price for the service might be $100. However, if a customer prefers a haircut from a professional instead of a junior hairdresser, they can add an extra $30 through the Calendars UI. Consequently, the final price at checkout for the haircut would be $130.- This API modification is available for all products, enabling various use cases at checkouts where dynamic pricing is necessary. Currently, it is enabled for Calendars and POS, and we can enable it for other areas as required.- This feature is applicable for one-time products and setup fees for subscriptions, but not for recurring amounts in subscription products. Additionally, this feature works with all payment providers.# What's Next?Dynamic pricing will be available on the front end through Calendars once services are live with the Orders API implementation.
payments
new
2 months ago

Public APIs for Coupon Creation & Editing

# What’s New?Businesses will be able to use APIs to fetch and perform various actions on coupons, such as creating, updating, and deleting them with this feature.## Covers various aspects of coupons as follows:-
List Coupons
: Allows users to fetch all the coupons for a location.-
Create Coupon
: Enables users to create a new coupon by defining all the parameters, similar to the UI coupon creation process.-
Update Coupon
: Allows users to edit the parameters of a retrieved coupon.-
Delete Coupon
: Lets users delete a retrieved coupon.-
Fetch Coupon
: Allows users to fetch all parameters of a specific coupon.## Where is it available?This feature is available at LvlUp's API documentation.
Image without caption
new
2 months ago

Skool importer for communities (Groups & Post importer)

# OverviewWe’re thrilled to introduce the Skool Importer—a powerful new feature that makes it easy to bring your Skool community into the LvlUp Community platform. This enhancement simplifies the migration process by enabling community admins to import both members and posts from their Skool groups with minimal effort.## How It Works1.
Enter Group Details
: Provide your Skool group slug, admin email, and password to initiate the import process.2.
Start Importing Members
: Click the Continue button to begin fetching member data from your Skool group.3.
Download and Prepare the CSV
: A CSV file will be generated containing:- profileSlug- firstName- lastName- email (note: some emails may be missing)- The admin must complete any missing email data before proceeding.4.
Upload CSV and Finalize Import
: Upload the updated CSV file. The system will:- Fetch and import members into your LvlUp Community group- Display the number of members imported- Show a count of any members not imported5.
Import Skool Posts
: After successfully importing members, you can also import community posts created by those members into LvlUp.## Key Highlights of the Skool Importer Flow- Easy onboarding of Skool communities into LvlUp- Two-step import process: fetch members → upload completed CSV- Real-time import stats: see how many members were successfully imported- Post-migration support for a seamless community experience- Admin control to manage missing data and review import outcomes
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
reputation
new
2 months ago

Wizard for first-time review setup

Getting started with Reputation Management just got a whole lot easier!Introducing our brand-new Review Setup Wizard — designed to guide users step-by-step through everything they need to launch their review strategy in minutes.## 🪄 What’s Included:This widget lives right inside your Overview tab and walks first-time users through the essential setup flow:### ✅ Step 1: Connect GBP/Facebook Pages- The journey starts here! Users are prompted to connect their Google Business Profile or Facebook Page to enable review collection.- 🔗 Redirects to Integrations Page### 🔗 Step 2: Set Up Your Review Link- Configure your Review Request URL — the link you’ll share with customers.- 🔗 Redirects to Settings → Review Link Page### ✉️ Step 3: Send Your First Review Request- Kick things off by sending your first review request to a customer.- 🔗 Redirects to Review Request Page### 🤖 Step 4: Configure Reviews AI- Turn on AI-generated review responses and create Review Agents to save time and reply smarter.- 🔗 Redirects to Settings → Review AI Page### 🧱 Step 5: Create Your Review Widget- Embed your reviews on your website with a fully customizable widget.- 🔗 Redirects to the Widgets tab### ➕ Step 6: Connect More Platforms (Optional)- Users can expand their reach by connecting more platforms for review collection.- 🔗 Redirects back to Integrations Page
The Wizard disappears automatically once all core steps are completed — giving users a clean, clutter-free experience.
## 🎯 Why This Matters:- 🧭
Guided Setup
– No more wondering where to begin- 🚀
Faster Activation
– Helps new users start collecting reviews quickly- 🧠
Smarter Defaults
– Encourages setting up Reviews AI and widgets from day oneThis update is now live! 🎉 Try it out and let us know how it’s working for you. If you’ve got suggestions for future enhancements, email us at
reputation@lvlup.com
or share them on our Ideas Board.Happy Review Collecting! ✨
Image without caption
Image without caption
subscription management
new
improved
2 months ago

Common Unsubscribe Flow – Now Live for Agencies!

Managing subscriptions just got easier!
Agency users can now cancel location-level subscriptions directly from their Billing page, with full visibility and flexibility—no support ticket required.## 🔑 What’s New:### ✅ Step 1: Choose How to CancelAgencies can now decide the best way to cancel a location’s subscription:- 🗓️ Cancel at End of Billing Cycle- ⚡ Cancel Immediately (no proration or refunds)### 🔍 Step 2: Confirm the Location- Get a quick summary of the selected location before moving forward.- ✔️ Prevent accidental cancellations.### 💬 Step 3: Share a Reason- Let us know why you’re cancelling—it helps us improve the platform.- ➡️ Then, confirm, and you're done!## 🔜 What’s Coming Next:- 🧑‍💼 Location Self-Cancellation – Locations will soon be able to cancel their own plans.- 📦 Bundle Plan Cancellations – Simplify bulk cancellations with one click.## 💡 Why This Matters:- 🔓 More Control – Agencies can manage client subscriptions independently.- ⏱ Faster Execution – No delays, no back-and-forth with support.- 📋 Clearer Experience – Guided 3-step process reduces confusion and errors.This update is now live for all agencies! 🎉 Head to your Billing tab and give it a try. If you have suggestions, we’d love to hear them—drop us a note at
retention@lvlup.com
or share your ideas on our Ideas Board.
Image without caption
Image without caption
social planner
new
improved
2 months ago

Social Planner : Optimisation of Bulk CSV Post😇

# Social Planner Optimisation of Bulk CSV Post## OverviewThe Social Planner has optimised the CSV Bulk Import feature.- Users now have the option to import using both CSV and XLSX formats.- 😇 Multiple date formats are available:-
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm
-
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
-
YYYY/MM/DD HH:mm:ss
-
YYYY/MM/DD HH:mm
-
M/D/YYYY H:mm:ss
-
M/D/YYYY H:mm
You can also use the 24-hour format.
(Date Format Example: 2025-08-25 10:30)
- The CSV Bulk Post functionality has been optimised to enhance the processing speed of long videos and allows up to 90 files to be processed within seconds or minutes, resulting in improved performance.## How Does It Work?### Prerequisites1. Create your CSV file. A basic CSV sample is attached to this release.2. Connect your social account in LvlUp from Social Planner Settings > New Integrations.### Steps to Get Started1. Navigate to
Marketing > Social Planner
.2. In Social Planner, click on
CSV Bulk Import
.3. Upload your CSV file with a scheduled date.
(Note: If no date is added, it will be considered a draft post.)
Add captions, multiple images, GIFs, and video links.
(Tip: Add your images/videos to Social Planner to get the links.)
4. Select the social platforms and send for approval (optional step).5. The CSV will be processed. Please click on
View Post
to review the posts and fix any errors in the CSV.6. Click on
Import
to schedule up to 90 posts in seconds.## What's Next?1. Advanced CSV options to bulk import stories, reels, shorts, and additional support for each social platform.
(Adding Advanced CSV sample.)
2. Add watermarks, first-time comments, tags, and categories.For more information, refer to the help document:
How to Schedule CSV Import in Social Planner
.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
invoicing
improved
2 months ago

Invoice Prefix Modification

# What's New?- Previously, users were unable to change the prefixes of their invoices, which were fixed to "INV."- Users can now customize the prefix to better suit their business practices.## How to Use1. Go to
Payments
->
Invoice Settings
.2. Navigate to
Payment Settings
->
Change Invoice Prefix
->
Save
.From now on, whenever a new invoice is created, the prefix will be updated to the new one.## Why We Built ItThis feature is a step towards offering more customization for invoices, allowing businesses to adhere to their established conventions.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
invoicing
fixed
new
2 months ago

Estimates & Invoices: Descriptions in Mobile View

# What's New?- Users reported issues with product descriptions not being available in the mobile view of Estimates & Invoices. This has now been fixed.## How to Use1. Add a product with a description to an estimate or invoice.2. Previously, you could view the complete description in the web view; now, you will also be able to view it in the mobile view.## Why We Built It- To ensure parity between mobile and web versions of Estimates and Invoices.- To make sure that customers can view the descriptions of the products mentioned in the invoices and estimates.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
invoicing
improved
new
2 months ago

Invoices & Receipts: Improved speed in Downloading PDFs

# What's New?- You can now click on "Download PDF" under an Invoice/Receipt and download the file in just 4 seconds (95% of the time).## What Used to Happen Earlier?- Previously, this process took anywhere between 15 to 19 seconds.## What's Next?- We will be attaching PDFs along with Emails of Invoices.
Image without caption
security
new
2 months ago

Google login for Whitelabel gencies

# We’re Excited to Introduce Google Login Support for White-Label Agencies!This feature will allow users to log in to their White-Label (WL) domains using their Google accounts, making the login process faster, more secure, and hassle-free.## How to Enable Google Login for WL Agencies1. Log in to your agency account.2. Navigate to
Settings > Company > Whitelabel
.3. If your white-label domain is configured correctly, you'll see a toggle to enable Google Login. This toggle will only be visible if your WL domain is set up correctly.4. Once enabled, the WL login page will display a "
Sign in with Google
" call-to-action (CTA), allowing users to authenticate via Google Login.## Login Flow for Users1. Visit the White-Label domain and click on the “
Sign in with Google
” CTA on the login page.2. The user will be redirected to the following URL:
https://login.leadconnectorhq.com/google?origin=
<your-whitelabel-domain>3. Users will need to
allow pop-ups
for the above URL in their browser.4. Once pop-ups are enabled, the Google Login screen will appear. Select the Google account associated with your WL agency.5. After successful authentication,
the user will be redirected back to the login screen
and signed into their account.
Please Note:
-
The Google Login will work for existing users who have a Google account as their registered email.
They can log in either using Google Login or their email and password.-
Enabling pop-ups is a one-time action per browser and is required for the Google Login window to appear correctly.
-
Existing custom CSS will not be impacted,
but agencies will need to set up CSS for any new CTAs.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
snapshot
new
2 months ago

Edit Snapshot Assets

You asked for more control over what goes into your snapshots — we delivered. With our latest update, you can now link or unlink assets directly from within your snapshots, giving you total precision over which assets are included when you push.## 🚀 What’s New?### 🔗 Enhanced Snapshot Push Control:Edit linked assets within a snapshot to fine-tune exactly what gets included during a push. No more guesswork — tailor each push to your needs.## 🖥️ New Snapshot Assets UI:A sleek new interface makes it easier than ever to see what’s included and what’s not. Toggle assets on/off with clarity and confidence.## 📍 Where to Find ItGo to:
Account Snapshots → My Snapshots → Click the three dots (⋯) next to any snapshot → Edit Snapshot
## 💡 Why We Built ItManaging snapshots shouldn’t be a black box. We built this update to give you more visibility and control, making snapshot pushes easier to manage and more intuitive — so you can move faster and smarter.
Image without caption
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
2 months ago

Enhanced Calendar Integrations: Connect Multiple Accounts per Integration Type

We’re excited to announce a significant improvement to calendar integrations! Previously, users were restricted to connecting only one account per integration type (Outlook or iCloud) within a subaccount. With this new update, we’re expanding the flexibility of our calendar system to match the capabilities currently offered for Google Calendar.## What’s New?Now, users can have multiple Outlook or iCloud accounts that they can use for checking availability conflicts and syncing third-party events.### Multiple Calendar Accounts per Integration TypeYou can now connect multiple accounts of the same integration type (e.g., Outlook, iCloud) within a single subaccount. This enhancement brings parity across all calendar types and increases scheduling flexibility.### Cross-Subaccount SupportUsers can now connect the same calendar account across different subaccounts they are part of—just like with Google Calendar.
Please Note:
- Video conferencing integrations remain unchanged. You can connect one video conferencing account (Zoom, MS Teams, or Google Meet) per user per subaccount.- However, the same video conferencing account can be connected across multiple subaccounts.## Why This MattersThis update brings Outlook and iCloud integrations up to speed with Google Calendar, providing consistent and scalable calendar management across the board—perfect for agencies, virtual assistants, and power users handling multiple clients or business units.
Image without caption
affiliate manager
new
2 months ago

Sub Account Affiliate Manager: Suspend Affiliates

You can now suspend affiliates from specific campaigns to better control and manage your affiliate program.# 👀 What’s New?- Suspending an affiliate will pause all tracking, including clicks, customers, and sales (both new and existing).- While suspended, affiliates won’t have access to their links or see campaign details in their portal.- You can suspend or unsuspend an affiliate for any campaign as needed.# 👷 How It Works:1. Go to the Affiliate List page.2. Click the three dots next to the affiliate's name.3. Select “Campaign Actions” > “Suspend Affiliate.”4. Choose the campaign from which you’d like to suspend them.5. To unsuspend, follow the same steps.# ⭐ Why it Matters:This feature gives you more control over who is actively promoting your brand, helping you maintain quality and performance in your campaigns.# 📌 Important Notes:- While suspended, you cannot manually add leads, assign commissions, or import past activity for the affiliate.- Once unsuspended, the affiliate’s existing links will start working again automatically.
Image without caption
Image without caption
e-commerce stores
new
2 months ago

Quantity Selector & Cart Drawer Enhancement for Ecommerce Stores

# 🆕 What’s New?We’ve rolled out improvements to the
Quantity Selector
on the Product Details Page and added a delete item option in the Cart Drawer. These changes will enhance the customer-facing user interface and are aimed at improving the overall shopping experience.##
Quantity Selector on Product Details Page:
- Customers can now select the product quantity using a new plus/minus selector or by entering a manual input.- Store owners can customize the label text and text color of the selector.- Real-time alerts will show how many items are left in stock in the cart drawer.##
Delete Option in Cart Drawer:
- A delete icon has been added next to each item in the cart drawer for quick removal.# ⚠️ Inventory Validation & Edge Cases1. The inventory logic now respects both
inventory tracking
and
out-of-stock purchase settings
.2. Quantity cannot exceed available stock:- At
1
, the minus button is disabled; no zero or negative inputs are allowed.- At
999
, the plus button is disabled; inputs over 999 are blocked.- When the selected quantity matches the inventory, the plus button is disabled.3. During
Add to Cart
, any quantity above the stock will be capped automatically.# Images
Quantity Selector in Product Details Page:Delete Item Button in Cart Drawer:Edit Quantity Field in Cart Drawer:Text Customization of Quantity Selector Label in Product Details Page:
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
documents & contracts
fixed
improved
2 months ago

Fixed: Checkbox Displacement in Documents & Contracts

# What's New?- Checkboxes are now saved relative to their parent block element. This fixes issues related to checkboxes getting displaced during page breaks, in PDFs, and when viewed. For example, if a checkbox is placed within a table, it will move along with the table. Similarly, if it is positioned over an image, it will move with the image.## How to Use- Place a checkbox on the Block Element (e.g., Table, text block, Image, etc.).- Group or ungroup checkboxes as needed (no changes have been made to this functionality).In cases of page breaks or PDFs sent, the checkbox will no longer get displaced as it did previously.## Why We Built ItThis improvement enhances the overall experience of using Documents and Contracts and addresses the bugs that were reported concerning checkboxes.
Image without caption
Image without caption
documents & contracts
new
2 months ago

Add Expiry to Documents & Contracts

# What’s New?Document Expiry – a new capability that lets you add an expiry date to your documents. After this date, recipients will no longer be able to sign the document.## How It Works-
Enable Document Expiration:
You can enable document expiration globally (at the location level) or on a per-document basis, giving you control over where and when it applies. The expiry setting is off by default.-
Set Expiry in Days:
Simply enter the number of days after which a document should expire. The countdown begins from the moment the document is sent and respects your location’s timezone for accuracy.-
Automatic Expiry Handling:
When a document reaches its expiry date, it is automatically marked as expired. Recipients can no longer sign or fill it out. An informative message will prompt them to contact the sender for next steps.-
Dashboard View:
The “Expires In” column and expired status will be visible in the document list view.-
Expiry Information:
This information will be displayed on the document view, so signers know exactly how long they have remaining.-
Warning Notifications Built-In:
You can enable optional email and in-app reminders for recipients one day before expiry. This feature is configurable globally or at the document level.-
Customizable Reminder Emails:
Admins can fully customize the subject line and content of expiry reminder emails, maintaining your brand’s voice and tone.## Why We Built ThisTeams—especially in legal, HR, and compliance—rely on the timely execution of documents. Until now, there was no way to enforce a deadline, remind signers, or manage expirations. This update solves that problem by allowing you to:- Prevent stale or outdated contracts from being signed.- Create urgency and accountability with recipients.- Maintain compliance and control over sensitive agreements.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
2 months ago

Calendar Integration Disconnection Notifications (Email, SMS, Push)

# 📣 What’s New?We’ve rolled out
disconnection
alerts for
calendar and video conferencing
integrations! You’ll now receive notifications if any of your key integrations—like
Google, Outlook, iCloud, Zoom, or Microsoft Teams
—get disconnected.These alerts are sent via:- ✅ Email- ✅ In-App (Web & Mobile Push Notifications)- ✅ SMS## 🔔 Notification PreferencesYou can manage how you want to be notified:- Head to
My Profile > Notifications
- Under the Calendar section, enable or disable
In-App, Email, and SMS.
- By default, Email and In-App notifications are turned on. You can
customize
your
preferences
anytime.## 💬 Please Note- Notifications will be sent only to users, not to location or agency admins.- SMS notifications are only sent if the user’s phone number is configured at the sub-account level.## 🎯 Why This MattersDisconnected integrations can lead to missed bookings, confusion, and client frustration. These proactive notifications ensure you’re always informed and in control.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
e-commerce stores
new
2 months ago

Customer Login for Ecommerce Stores

# What’s New?We’re excited to announce the
Customer Login
feature for Ecommerce Stores! Store owners can now enable a Customer Login Portal directly within their store pages, making it easier for customers to log in, access past orders, and more—all from a seamless in-store experience.## Key Capabilities1.
Login Button in Store Navigation:
A new toggle option is available to enable or disable the Customer Login button directly in the navigation menu. Customization options include:- Customer Login Icon Color- Ability to add more menu items and set their redirection- Open in New Tab Toggle – decide whether the login page opens in a new tab or within the current one.2.
Customer Dropdown Menu (Post Login):
After a customer logs in, clicking the profile icon reveals a clean dropdown with the following options:
Orders, Logout
## How to Enable It?1. Open the
Store Builder
and navigate to your store pages.2. To access customer login, click on the Navigation Menu, then go to:
General Settings > Customer Login > “Enable Customer Login Toggle”
3. Customize the menu items dropdown section to add more options. Redirection can be set for the options in the menu.4. Ensure your
store domain is added and verified
. Link the default page of your domain to any of your existing store pages for the functionality to work correctly.## Additional Notes- If the toggle is OFF, the login button won’t be shown in the navigation menu.- A valid
domain must be added and linked to a store page
for login functionality to work. Otherwise, the login button will be non-functional.## Images
Builder Preview:User Preview:Logged In State:Mobile View:
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
app marketplace
api
improved
2 months ago

Marketplace | Event-specific webhook endpoints

# What's New?App developers can now configure custom webhook endpoints for specific events based on the event's priority.## Why is This Important?This enhancement enables developers to prioritize real-time webhook events and send them to high-priority queues while allowing other events, such as those meant for reporting, to go to default or lower-priority queues.## What's Next?In Q3, we will add the capability to configure custom webhook endpoints via API at a specific agency or sub-account level. This will allow apps with high adoption to optimize events at a customer level.## Preview Images
Image without caption
wordpress hosting & reselling
improved
fixed
2 months ago

Native HTML Embed for Funnels in WordPress

# 🎉 What’s New?You can now embed funnels into WordPress as Native HTML directly via the LeadConnector Plugin. This feature opens up powerful use cases that were previously restricted by iFrame limitations.## 🚀 Key Features-
💰 Unlock Payments via Order Forms:
Previously, many customers faced issues using Order Forms within iFrame-embedded funnels, as certain payment gateways imposed security restrictions. With the Native HTML embed, these limitations are eliminated, enabling seamless payment collection directly on WordPress sites.-
🧩 SEO Enhancements:
Since the funnel content is now directly part of the page’s HTML, search engines can crawl and index it more effectively. This improves your website’s SEO visibility and discoverability.## 🛠 How to Use1. Open the
LeadConnector Plugin Dashboard
in WordPress.2. Navigate to the
Funnels tab
.3. Click
Add New Page
(top right).4. Select the
relevant Funnel and Step
.5. Under
Page Display Method
, choose
Native HTML Embed
.6. Click
Save Page
to publish it.## 🔧 Bug Fixes & Backend ImprovementsFixed a minor UI bug where the Funnel ID was visible when adding or editing a funnel.To learn more about WordPress Hosting and how you can resell it to your clients, click here. If you have suggestions for WordPress Hosting, please post your ideas in our 💡 Ideas Board, and we will prioritize your suggestions!Thanks for building with us! 💜
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
automations
app marketplace
conversations
api
agency billing
new
2 months ago

Marketplace | Usage-based pricing

# What's New?App developers can now set a per-usage price for their Marketplace apps. An app can have a usage-based price for three different modules:1. A per-execution price for Marketplace Actions and Triggers.2. A per-message price for Conversation Providers, allowing them to set a custom price for both inbound and outbound messages.3. A custom per-usage price for events that are specific to the app and billed using the Marketplace billing APIs. For example, an app that offers AI voice calling agents can charge a per-minute price through the Marketplace billing APIs.As part of this release, we are also rolling out an experiment. For a select group of developers, the premium action/trigger fees will be waived on all their actions/triggers that are billed via our platform. The goal is to give developers full control over their service or feature's pricing, reduce and simplify the overall pricing for customers, and thereby increase the adoption of these marketplace actions and triggers.## Why Is This Feature Important?This pricing model significantly enhances the earning potential for developers on the Marketplace.## Release PlanThis feature will initially be enabled only for select and vetted developers' accounts in the first phase.## What's Next?1. The ability for agencies to mark up and rebill the developers' usage-based prices to their clients.2. The ability for agencies to set daily limits on usage.## Preview Images
Usage-based pricing details on the app details page - Pricing sectionPer-execution charges in the Workflow builder - Discover tab.Developer portal
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
2 months ago

Calendar: Multiple Meeting Locations Support with Custom Forms

# What's New?You can now use
Multiple Meeting Locations
with
Custom Forms
in your calendars!The Multiple Meeting Location feature allows you to offer bookers
flexible options
such as:- A
Custom
location where you can enter the actual meeting address, along with a
Display Label
that shows placeholder text (e.g., “New York Office”) on the booking widget until the appointment is booked.- An “
Ask the Booker
” option, enabling them to enter their own location.-
Standard choices
like Zoom, Google Meet, MS Teams, Phone, or In-Person.Now, this
feature fully supports Custom Forms
, allowing you to collect tailored information from bookers as part of the scheduling process.## How to Use1. Navigate to your
calendar settings
and select the calendar you wish to configure.2. For
Event Calendar:
Scroll down to the meeting location section.3. For
Round Robin / Service Calendar:
Scroll down to the team members section.4. Click on the "
+ Add Location
" button.5. Choose and
configure
your desired locations.6. Once you have added your meeting locations, click on "
Save
."## Note- Multiple meeting locations can only be configured for Event Calendar and Round Robin / Service Calendar with one team member.- This feature is supported only for the Neo widget.## Why This Matters
Enhanced Choice and User Experience:
Bookers can choose the
most convenient location
, whether it be a physical office, one among multiple stores, or an online meeting. This improves the overall booking experience and
accommodates various needs.
Image without caption
Image without caption
ad manager
new
3 months ago

'Book a Call' Button for Ad Manager

# 👀 What’s New?We've added a
"Book a Call"
button across multiple touchpoints in the platform, allowing
agency admins
to connect directly with the LvlUp Ad Manager team for personalized assistance. Clicking this button will redirect users to the Ad Manager team's calendar to schedule a session.# 👷 How It Works:- The
“Book a Call”
button is now visible to
agency admins only
(not sub-account users or admins).- It appears in the following locations:1. Sub-account onboarding screen2. Ad Manager card under
Agency > Reselling
3. Ad Manager
campaign home page
- Clicking the button redirects to the Ad Manager team calendar:
https://api.leadconnectorhq.com/widget/bookings/admanager
- Agency admins can use this calendar to schedule time with the Ad Manager team for configuration help, product feedback, billing queries, reselling, or any other questions/feedback.# ⭐ Why It Matters:- Many agency users were unsure how to proceed after discovering Ad Manager or had questions about the
reselling model, product capabilities, and billing structure
.- This direct call scheduling feature provides quick access to help and enables smoother onboarding and configuration.- It also offers a great opportunity for the Ad Manager team to
gather real-time feedback
and support adoption.- Helps reduce confusion and increases engagement by offering guided support at key decision points.# 📝 Notes:- Button visibility is limited to agency admin-level users only.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
new
3 months ago

Campaign Statistics Improvements

# 🔍 Problem Statement- There is no overall summary — data is shown for up to 90 days.- Inaccurate graphs are present in the Engagement summary.- For SMTP, the “Delivered” metric was incorrectly displayed as “Opened,” causing confusion.# ⚡ What We Did- Added an Overall Summary section for quick insights.- Introduced accurate Engagement Analysis over a customizable 90-day window.- Added a Conversions Over Time graph to track order trends.- For SMTP, the “Delivered” metric now correctly shows as N/A (not applicable).# ✅ Benefits- Get a complete picture of campaign performance at a glance.- Improved and accurate analysis.- Reduced the number of support tickets related to SMTP campaigns.# 🛠️ How to Check- Go to Email Marketing > Campaigns.- Open any campaign and check the updated Statistics section.👉
Note
: The engagement summary shows total clicks and unique opens for each day.
Other UI Changes
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
payments
new
3 months ago

Import Transactions & Orders into GHL using CSV files

# SummaryEase the migration of customers using different platforms to LvlUp by allowing the import of all historical information related to transactions and orders, making them visible as static data that contributes to all reporting associated with that sub-account.## What's New- Businesses can now import historical orders and transactions into their LvlUp sub-accounts from any of their other or previously used platforms.- The respective transactions or orders file needs to be in CSV format.- In the case of transactions, after validations and showcasing a preview, the transactions will be imported into the system.- These transactions will also impact the total revenue generated by the business and the related dashboards.- For orders, alongside a record for every order in the CSV, a linked transaction record will also be created in LvlUp for each order.- These order-based transactions will impact revenue and the respective dashboards.- Since customer details are also included in the CSV files, either new contacts will be created or existing contacts will have these transactions/orders associated with them.- Two separate dates will be maintained in the system: when the transaction is added to LvlUp and when the transaction was executed.- Help documentation linking where all the field formats are explained along with samples is available on each modal, along with a sample CSV download.## Where is it available?- Payments > Orders- Payments > Transactions## Flow for Orders Import:## Flow for Transactions Import:
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
content ai - text and image
new
3 months ago

Introducing Brand Voice in Brand Boards

⚡
What’s New
- Brand Boards now include both your
Design Kit
and a new
Brand Voice
section, which serves as a communication guide detailing your business information, tone, and values.- This feature can now be utilized in
Content AI
to automatically select the appropriate tone and style.🔍
Why This Matters
- Customize your experience across the platform.- Enhance AI tools with your unique brand identity.🛠️
How to Create a Brand Voice
1. Go to
Marketing
→
Brand Boards
.2. Click on
Brand Voice
.3. Click
Create New Brand Voice
.4. Choose the
Scratch Option
.5. Fill in your brand information, values, and tone.6. Click
Save
.7. Open
Content AI
, and in the writing tone section, select your Brand Voice.👉
Coming Soon:
- Integration with
Conversations AI
.- Enhanced utilization of Brand Boards in
Content AI
.- Create Brand Voice using a website URL or text.🔍
What happens to all your existing Brand Boards?
They will remain safe and secure under the Design Kit section.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
new
3 months ago

Build recipient segments in Email Campaigns

Introducing a new method to create your campaign recipient list.🔍
Problem Statement
:Users previously had to navigate to Contacts or Workflows to build Smart Lists or add Tags for segmentation.🔥
What We Did
:We added a "Build Segments" option directly in the recipient section, allowing you to create complex recipient lists without leaving the campaign.✅
Benefits
:- No need to pre-create Smart Lists- Quick and flexible targeting in one place- Cleaner and more efficient workflow- Easy exclusions of contacts and tags🛠️
How to Use
:1. Open any campaign in new or edit mode.2. Go to the Send or Schedule screen.3. In the Recipient section, click "Build Segments."4. Add conditions using Tags, Contacts, Smart Lists, or Segments.5. Use AND/OR logic to combine rules.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
template library
new
3 months ago

Google Ads Support in Template Library

# What We Did- The Template Library now supports Google Ads in addition to Meta Ads.- The Objectives dropdown automatically updates based on the selected platform.- Admins now have separate sections for Google and Meta templates for easier management.- Users enjoy a seamless experience.## Benefits- Streamlined template selection for both Google and Meta Ads.- Smarter, context-aware objective suggestions.- Improved organization for Admins.
Image without caption
Image without caption
app marketplace
security
api
improved
3 months ago

Marketplace | Stronger app review process for new apps

# Enhanced App Review Process for New AppsThe Marketplace team has released an enhancement to the app review process to improve the overall quality of apps and governance of API access.## What's New?For all new public apps launched on the Marketplace from now on, developers must provide the following details:1. A Loom video demonstrating all features of the app from start to finish.2. A Loom video explaining why they need the requested scopes, along with a demonstration of the relevant features of the app that require those scopes.3. If the app integrates with a third-party app, we require test account credentials that will allow us to test the features and integrations ourselves.4. Any other details or comments that would help the Marketplace team review the app quickly and effectively.## Why Is This Important?1. This enhancement aims to improve the baseline quality standards of all apps on the Marketplace, ensuring that the apps function properly and request only the API permissions they genuinely need.2. We've restricted this new process to first-time review submissions only, so we don't add friction for active developers who frequently update their apps.
Image without caption
funnels and websites
new
3 months ago

Autosave Enhancement and Fixes

We’re excited to roll out a set of improvements and bug fixes to the Autosave feature in the Builder, focusing on speed, reliability, and UI consistency.# ⚡ Performance Improvements- Load and save times are now approximately 50% faster across manual and autosave actions.- API calls are executed in parallel to reduce wait times and enhance responsiveness.- In progress: Graceful handling of expired or invalid tokens to prevent interruptions in autosave.# 🎨 UI & UX Updates- The top bar on the Versions page now visually aligns with the main builder in terms of height, width, and padding.- The yellow “unsaved changes” indicator has been removed—autosave is now reliable enough to manage state without it.- The “Last saved” tooltip now accurately reflects the most recent autosave or version update.- Improvements have been made to Global Section behavior for smoother interactions.# 🐞 Bug Fixes- An issue where the wrong version could be deleted upon reaching the 50-version history limit has been fixed.- Unnecessary saves are now skipped if no changes were made since the last save.- Resolved 500 errors caused by incorrect version loads in the builder.These updates are part of our continued commitment to making the Builder faster, smarter, and easier to use. Let us know what you think!
certificates
new
3 months ago

Choose Email Templates for Manual Certificates

# What's New?You can now select a custom email template when sending manual certificates, giving you greater control over the appearance and tone of your communication.- 🎨
Choose your preferred email template
during the manual certificate sending process.- ✏️
Customize the email subject
for added personalization.- 🛠️ If no template is selected, the system will
automatically use your default template
set in the LvlUp Client Portal settings.This update brings more
flexibility and personalization
to how you deliver certificates to your members!👉
Refer to this guide
on
How to Use the Email Builder and Its In-line Editor
to create and customize your templates with ease.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
media storage
new
3 months ago

Better Orientation & Dimensions support in Media Storage

# 🔍 OverviewWe have introduced two key enhancements to Media Storage that make browsing and selecting images faster and more intuitive. Users can now instantly identify image orientation and view exact pixel dimensions without needing to open each file.## 🖼️ Image Orientation Indicator in Grid ViewWhile browsing thumbnails, a badge indicating whether an image is landscape, square, or portrait now appears directly on each image. This visual cue makes it easy to identify the orientation at a glance.## 📐 Image Dimensions in List ViewIn list view, each image now displays its width × height in pixels right next to the filename. This ensures you can quickly determine whether an asset fits your design requirements.## ✅ SummaryThese improvements bring more clarity and control to your workflow, making it easier to select the right images and do so faster. These upgrades are designed to save you time and reduce guesswork.
Note:
Dimensions of some older uploaded pictures may not appear for some time.
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
3 months ago

Custom Webhook Action – Security & Usability Enhancements

We’ve introduced key improvements to the Custom Webhook action, focusing on enhanced security for sensitive information. These updates aim to protect secret keys from being exposed in plain text and provide more streamlined credential management.# What’s New## Masked Secret KeysSensitive credentials (e.g., secret keys) are now stored securely and masked in the interface, preventing accidental exposure. This applies to Basic auth, Bearer token, and API key authentication methods.## User-Friendly ManagementWhen updating or deleting existing keys, the interface guides you through the process without ever displaying the raw values, helping you avoid accidental leaks.# Why It Matters## Enhanced Security- Reduces the risk of revealing sensitive information for data protection. Going forward, these keys will not be visible to users in plain text format; they will only be visible by the key name.- These keys cannot be edited or deleted by users in a location. Only agency admins and users who have created these keys will have these permissions.# How to Get Started## Add a Custom Webhook ActionIn your Automations builder, select Custom Webhook.## Select Authentication Type- Choose Basic auth, Bearer token, or API key.## Configure Credentials- Enter your secret key in the new masked field.## Monitor & Manage- Use the dropdown menu to add or delete keys as needed.
Note
-
Existing Keys:
Any existing key will be deleted once a new key is updated.-
Deletion Permissions:
Only agency admins or the user who originally created a key can delete it.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
memberships
new
3 months ago

Closed Captions & Subtitle Support

✨
New Feature: Closed Captions & Subtitle Support
We’re excited to launch Closed Captions & Subtitle Support—a powerful upgrade that prioritizes accessibility in your video courses. 🎥🌍
What’s New:
-
Multi-Language Subtitle Uploads:
Support for subtitles in multiple languages to cater to global audiences.-
Advanced Subtitle Editor:
Fine-tune timing, formatting, and content with precision.
Why It Matters:
This update enables creators to:1. Make content more inclusive for learners with hearing impairments.2. Support non-native speakers with language-specific subtitles.3. Improve engagement and comprehension across diverse audiences.4. Align with accessibility best practices for online learning.Empower your learners with content that speaks to everyone. Try out Closed Captions & Subtitle Support today!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
affiliate manager
new
3 months ago

Sub Account Affiliate Manager: Affiliate Portal Settings

# We’re Excited to Introduce the Affiliate Portal Settings PageThe Affiliate Portal Settings Page is a central place for managing key affiliate portal preferences. This release empowers admins to guide affiliates through essential onboarding steps and control what they see on their dashboards.## What’s New?-
Ask Affiliates to Upload W9/W8 Forms
: A banner is displayed on the affiliate dashboard prompting them to upload the required tax documents to ensure compliance and facilitate smooth payouts.-
Require Affiliates to Set Up a Payout Method
: A persistent nudge banner appears on the affiliate dashboard, urging affiliates to add a valid payout method before they can receive commissions.-
Mask Referral Emails on Affiliate Dashboard
: Protect customer data by masking parts of referral email addresses visible to affiliates, enhancing privacy.-
Configure Payout Methods
: Choose which payout methods (e.g., PayPal, Banks) you want to offer affiliates in the portal. Only the selected methods will be shown to affiliates.## How It Works:1. Go to Affiliate Manager.2. Click on the Settings tab.3. Switch to
Affiliate Portal Settings
.4. Enable the toggles based on your preferences.5. Click Save — and you're all set!## Why It Matters:- Reduces manual follow-ups for tax forms and payout details.- Ensures faster and more compliant commission payments.- Customizes what affiliates see for better data privacy and brand control.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
email system
improved
3 months ago

Updated Behavior for Dedicated Domain Default Header Fallback

# ✅ What’s NewPreviously, the dedicated header (From Name and From Email) was always used as the primary identity when sending emails through a dedicated domain.With this update, we’ve changed how and when this header is applied:## 🆕 Changes Introduced1.
Fallback Header Activation Only on DMARC Failure
The dedicated header will now only apply when DMARC alignment fails (based on SPF/DKIM logic).2.
Fallback Triggered When No Custom Header is Provided
If users do not specify a custom "From Name" or "From Email," and DMARC fails, the system will automatically apply the fallback header.
Image without caption
online listings
new
improved
fixed
3 months ago

Listing Status Transparency & Resolution Guidance

# 🚀 What’s NewWe’ve made a major upgrade to how listing availability is presented on the platform. Previously, users could only see the status of each publisher (e.g., "Unavailable") without any insight into why or how to fix it.## With this release:🔍
Clickable Status Insights:
Users can now click on a listing’s status to view the specific reason why it’s unavailable.🛠️
Actionable Resolution Steps:
Alongside the reason, users will see clear, step-by-step guidance to help them fix the issue on their own.🎯
Common Issues Covered:
We've addressed the most frequent listing issues in this update, and we’ll continue to expand support for more edge cases going forward.💡
Why It Matters
📖
Improved Transparency:
No more guessing games—users now have clear visibility into what’s going wrong with their listings.🧩
Empowered Self-Resolution:
With easy-to-follow instructions, users can resolve most issues without needing to contact support.📉
Reduced Support Dependency:
By putting the power in users' hands, we anticipate a significant drop in listing-related support requests.This enhancement gives users more control, saves time, and reduces friction in keeping business listings live and accurate across platforms. 🌟
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
automations
new
fixed
3 months ago

Action & Trigger name character limit

# What's New?- Users can now enter names for the actions and triggers added in the Workflows.- Previously, the character limit was 55 characters.- This limit has now been increased to 100 characters.
affiliate manager
new
3 months ago

Sub Account Affiliate Manager: Move Customers Between Affiliates

We’re excited to introduce a highly requested feature — the ability to move a customer from one affiliate to another within the same campaign! Whether you’re cleaning up data or reassigning for performance reasons, this enhancement makes affiliate management smoother and more flexible than ever.# 👀 What’s New?-
Move Customers Manually Between Affiliates:
You can now reassign a customer to a different affiliate within the same campaign using a simple flow.-
Option to Transfer Commission History:
Choose to move associated unpaid commissions along with the customer to ensure continuity for affiliates.# 👷 How It Works:1. Navigate to the current affiliate’s profile.2. Scroll to the Customers tab.3. Click on the three-dot menu next to the customer you want to move.4. Select
"Move Customer."
5. Choose the destination affiliate.6. (Optional) Toggle "Also move all associated commissions of this Customer to destination Affiliate" if you want to transfer commissions as well.7. Click Move — and you’re done!# ⭐ Why It Matters:- Quickly reassign customers when affiliates change or need to be rotated.- Ensure commission history is preserved and attributed properly.- Keep campaigns clean, accurate, and easy to manage.# 📌 Important Note:- Customers can only be moved within the same campaign.- If the commission transfer toggle is on, only unpaid commissions will be moved to the destination affiliate. Paid commissions will remain with the original affiliate.
Image without caption
Image without caption
social planner
new
3 months ago

Link Shortener in Social Planner😇

A link shortener (also called a URL shortener) is a tool that converts a long URL into a shorter, more manageable link, which redirects users to the original destination when clicked. LvlUp supports the link shortener feature.## How Does It Work?1. Navigate to
Marketing > Social Planner
.2. Click on
Create Post
; you will see the option for post composition.3. In the post, click on
Social Selection
.- Users can create a new campaign if they wish to track the shortened URL.- Click on the shortened URL icon to start by adding the name of the link, the target URL, and all the custom parameters.- Once you generate and insert the link, you can use the same link again.4. Add the content for the social post. If you include a long URL and click on the URL shortener, the URL will be shortened in the preview. In the content input box, it will remain as the long URL.5. Publish the post or schedule it for later.## Few Notes- Statistics for the number of people who clicked on the link are coming soon.- In the preview, the short URL will be displayed, while the input box will show the long URL.- The domain will be selected from the branded domain in
Location > Branded Domain
in the agency. If there is no branded domain available for the location or agency, we will use the whitelabel LeadConnector domain.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
3 months ago

Subscription Payment Failures' Invoice Management

# What's New?- Businesses can now choose whether to create invoices for failed subscription payments.- If they opt to create invoices, they will have the option to send them via email and/or SMS to the end customers.- By default, invoices will be generated for all sub-accounts, and both email and SMS notifications will be sent to the end customers. This feature allows businesses to disable certain options that are enabled by default if they prefer not to use them.- This functionality is available for payment providers that support sending invoices for failed payments, including NMI, Authorize, and Square.# Where is it available?Payments > Settings > Subscriptions# What's Next?An option to modify the email template for subscription payment failure invoices will be introduced.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
whatsapp
new
3 months ago

In-App WhatsApp Subscription Cancellation

🚀
New Feature Release: In-App WhatsApp Subscription Cancellation
We’re excited to introduce a much-requested feature—
In-App WhatsApp Subscription Cancellation
—designed to give agency admins more control and a seamless experience when managing WhatsApp services.✨
What’s New?
Agency admins can now cancel WhatsApp subscriptions directly from within the LvlUp platform with just a few clicks. This streamlined experience is designed to make account management easier while helping us learn how to improve our services based on your feedback.🔧
Key Highlights:
-
Direct Cancellation Access
Cancel WhatsApp subscriptions instantly—no support ticket required.-
Built-in Feedback Collection
Select a reason for cancellation, helping us improve your experience.-
Smart Deflection Options
Based on your selected reason, the platform may guide you to:- Schedule a support call (for setup or technical help)- Learn about Coexistence Mode (for phone compatibility issues)- Share feature ideas (redirects to the Ideas Board)-
Admin-Only Access
Only agency admins can initiate a cancellation, ensuring secure control.-
Analytics-Driven
Cancellation data is securely logged to help us make future improvements.🎯
Why This Matters
-
Simplified Experience:
No more back-and-forth with support—manage cancellations at your convenience.-
Smarter Support:
We aim to reduce support tickets and improve resolution time.-
Retention-Driven:
We offer helpful suggestions and resources so you don’t miss out on platform benefits.-
You Help Us Improve:
Every cancellation reason is used to shape our product roadmap.
blogs
improved
fixed
3 months ago

Upgraded the UI of Blog RSS

We’re excited to announce the release of the updated RSS page in the Blog Settings area. There was a constant question: if I add a new RSS feed, does the old one stop working? With the new updated Blog UI for the RSS page, you can now configure new blog RSS feeds as well as edit the existing ones.## How can this help users?
Structured UI Experience
: The RSS page is designed to provide a structured experience, allowing users to manage all their live RSS feeds, including adding or editing settings.## How does Blog RSS work?1. Navigate to
Sites > Blogs
.2. In the list view of Blogs, click on the gear icon for
Settings
.3. In
Settings
, you will find the option for
RSS
.4. Click on the new option to add the feed name and select the blog (choose blogs that are live, not in draft).5. Add specifications for the number of posts in the RSS feed.6. Enable or disable the full content in the RSS feed.7. Click on
Add
to save the details.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
blogs
new
improved
3 months ago

Blog Post Style Customizations - Control the Cover Image, Author details and style

LvlUp Blog Post allows users to customize the style of the blog post page.🤩
Key Features:
1. Users can customize the widget and height of the cover image displayed first on the blog post page.2. Users have the option to enable or disable the cover image.3. The author section can be redesigned to include social media links and styling. Note: If you prefer not to display a social link, simply leave the corresponding content blank in the blog author settings.4. The author section can also be enabled or disabled as needed.5. There are several basic styling options available, such as font weight, size, colors, link colors, and background colors.🥳
How to Edit the Blog Post Style:
1. Navigate to
Sites > Blogs
.2. Click on the name of the blog.3. Once clicked, there will be an option to edit the blog site.4. In the blog site edit, there will be a page named "Blog Post." Please click on it.5. Select the blog content element; there will be styling options that allow you to customize all aspects of the styling.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
invoicing
new
3 months ago

Create Draft estimates using Workflows

# OverviewWe're thrilled to introduce an enhancement for the Send Estimates Action in workflows.## What’s New?Business users can now choose between the following options:- Sending the estimate immediately upon workflow execution.- Saving it as a draft for internal review.## How to Use1. Navigate to
Automations
->
Workflow
.2. Create a new workflow or open an existing one.3. From the
Sending Mode
dropdown, choose between
Send Directly
or
Create in Draft
, and you're done!Whenever this workflow is triggered, a draft estimate will be added to the draft section of Estimates.## Why We Built ItThis feature is especially useful for teams that require an approval or revision process before sharing estimates with clients. Drafted estimates are not sent to customers and can be reviewed, edited, and finalized later — giving your team greater control and flexibility.
Image without caption
Image without caption
invoicing
improved
3 months ago

Invoices: Record Backdated transactions

# What's New?- Users can now add dates when recording manual payments for improved bookkeeping.## How to Use1. Click on the invoice for which you wish to record a payment.2. Add the payment date.3. View the transaction related to the invoice that was marked as paid on that particular day.## Why We Built ItThis feature was developed to enhance bookkeeping for accounting purposes when recording payments.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
phone system
new
improved
3 months ago

A2P Registration - Identity Verification Required

To further secure the messaging ecosystem, we’ve introduced a new identity verification step during A2P registration for users who exhibit certain risk signals.# What’s NewWe’ve integrated user verification that helps verify identities in real-time. This enhancement allows us to stay ahead of evolving carrier requirements and ensures that only legitimate users can register and send messages through A2P.## What to ExpectSome users will now be prompted to complete a brief identity check as part of the A2P registration flow.## User JourneyAfter entering their business and contact details, users may see a verification prompt. Users will be guided to:- Capture a live selfie (which includes simple face movement instructions)- Click an image or upload a valid government-issued ID- Verification happens instantly. Upon success, users will be returned to the registration flow to proceed as usual.## Why It Matters- Protects against fraud, brand impersonation, and abuse.- Supports compliance with industry-wide verification standards.- Designed for minimal disruption to genuine users—most won’t notice a change.- This change helps us continue to offer a trusted, compliant, and secure messaging experience across the board.
Image without caption
Image without caption
automations
funnels and websites
app marketplace
improved
3 months ago

Marketplace - App Search Improvements

We are happy to announce improvements to the app search functionality on the Marketplace.# What's New?1. The search functionality in the
Widgets Marketplace
within the
Funnel Builder
and the
Discover tab
in the
Workflow Builder
, which previously only matched widget names or workflow action/trigger names, has been enhanced to also match app-level parameters such as app name, app tagline, app developer, and app description.2. We've added an
'App Contains'
filter on the App Marketplace to allow users to filter apps by the modules they contain, such as 'Snapshots', 'Workflow Actions/Triggers', 'Web Widgets', etc.3. The search functionality on the App Marketplace now also matches module names, including Workflow Action/Trigger names.# Why Is This Important?These enhancements improve the discoverability of apps across all marketplace channels, thereby increasing the adoption of marketplace apps.
Image without caption
Image without caption
e-commerce stores
new
3 months ago

Abandoned Cart Reminders: Delivery control & Template Customization

# What’s New?We’ve upgraded the
Abandoned Cart Reminders
experience for e-commerce store owners—making it easier and more effective to re-engage shoppers who leave items behind. This release focuses on configurability, customization, and simplicity.## Feature Enhancements1.
Enable/Disable Toggle:
A dedicated toggle now allows users to enable or disable abandoned cart emails with a single click—providing more control and clarity.2.
Email Template Selection & Preview:
- Choose from your existing email templates.- Use the Preview button to instantly view what the reminder email will look like.- Select or edit templates without leaving the reminder settings screen.3.
Subject Line Customization:
- Add a subject line directly within the reminder setup.- Support for custom variables (tags) to personalize subject content.4.
Custom Reminder Timing:
- Choose exactly when the abandoned cart email should be sent: after a set number of
minutes, hours, days, or even months
.- Simple, intuitive controls for both the time value and unit.## How to Use It?1. Go to
Payment > Settings > Notifications > Abandoned Cart
.2. Toggle ON abandoned cart emails.3. Select or customize the
Email Template
and
Subject Line
.4. Set the Send After timing with full flexibility.5. Click Preview to review the email.6. Click
Save
to apply changes.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
e-commerce stores
new
3 months ago

Customizable Email Templates for Ecommerce Store Notifications

# What’s New?Store owners can now customize email templates for their ecommerce store notifications! Previously, only the Abandoned Cart and Order Confirmation Email setups were available, which could not be turned off or customized. With this update, store owners can customize:1.
Order Confirmation Emails
2.
Order Fulfillment Emails
3.
Abandoned Cart Emails
Users can select templates from the system templates or their own and edit them to match their
brand’s language and tone
.# How Does It Work?1. Go to
Payments > Settings > Notifications
:- Enable or disable each email type using the toggle.- Select and preview templates. Templates can be edited within the preview window.- Edit the subject line for the email.- Changes will only be applied once saved.# Additional Notes:- Ensure that
Order Confirmation Email
notifications are turned ON for customers to receive
digital download file links
.-
Custom values
can be used in the subject field.- Always click the
Save
button to apply changes — unsaved edits will not reflect.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
prospecting
new
3 months ago

Marketing Audit Reports for Sub Accounts!

# Marketing Audit is Now Available for Sub-Accounts – For Free!We’re excited to announce that the Marketing Audit Report—previously available only for Prospect records—is now accessible for all Sub-Accounts at no additional cost!## 🔍 Why This MattersAgencies can now reinforce their value by regularly generating audit reports for clients. This empowers them to:- Track their clients' performance over time- Showcase improvements with clear before-and-after comparisons- Build trust and
improve client retention
## ⚙️ How to Get Started1. Navigate to: Sub-Account > Settings > Labs2. Enable: ‘Marketing Audit’3. Go to: Sub-Account > Reporting > Audit Report4. Click: ‘Generate Report Now’ (Give it a moment – your report will be auto-generated!)## 🧩 Feature Eligibility- Currently available under Labs- Once fully rolled out, this feature will be available for all Sub-Accounts by default.
Access Control
- The feature is enabled by default for all users within a Sub-Account.- You can manage access by updating Roles & Permissions under:- Sub-Account > Settings > My Staff > Roles## 📈 What Can You Do with It?-
Track Progress
and uncover new marketing opportunities-
Schedule Reports:
Monthly or quarterly auto-generation with email notifications-
Export to PDF:
Easily share the report with clients or stakeholders## 💡 Pro TipRun the Marketing Audit once a month to measure progress, identify upsell opportunities, and keep your clients engaged and informed.
Image without caption
Image without caption
automations
improved
3 months ago

New Operators in If/Else

# What's NewIn the If/Else action, we have added new operators for the text fields. These operators are:-
Is any of
-
Is none of
You can now add multiple options in the value by simply separating them with commas.
Image without caption
email builder
new
improved
3 months ago

Visibility Section for Layouts in Email Builder 🚀

# 🔍 Problem StatementUsers could only adjust visibility for individual elements—not entire layouts—making it time-consuming to hide full sections on specific device views.## 🧩 What We DidWe introduced a new visibility setting for layouts, allowing users to easily show or hide entire sections on desktop or mobile devices.## 🚀 Benefits1. Time-efficient2. Consistent editing experience between elements and layouts## 💡 How to Use1. Create an email template and add a layout.2. Hover over the layout and click on the desktop/mobile icons to toggle visibility.3. Alternatively, use the left panel’s Visibility tab to set your preferences.4. Switch between desktop and mobile builder views to preview your changes.5. Use the test email or preview feature to verify your settings.
Image without caption
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
3 months ago

View Form Submissions in Appointment Modal

We’ve introduced a powerful new update that brings
Form Submissions
directly into the Appointment Modal—designed to simplify how you
access booking information
and reduce the need to switch between modules.## What’s New?### Dedicated Forms Tab in Appointment Modal- If an appointment includes a
custom form submission
, you'll see a
Forms tab
inside the modal.- The submission appears in a
clear, structured layout
—mirroring the experience in the Forms module.### Access Submissions from Anywhere- Whether you're in
Contacts
,
Conversations
, or the
Calendars
tab, opening an appointment modal will now give you
quick access
to form submissions via the new Forms tab.## Please Note- Form submissions will
only
appear for
newly created
appointments going forward. Existing appointments won’t display submission data.- Form submissions from the
default booking form
—which only captures Name, Email, and Phone—are
not displayed
in the Forms tab at this time, since this information is already visible in the Contact Details section of the appointment.-
Support
for viewing these in the Forms tab is
on the way
—for
complete visibility
in one place.## Why This MattersThis enhancement
strengthens
the
integration
between
Forms and Calendars
, creating a more
seamless
and
intuitive
experience—especially for industries where additional booking data is essential. It
also helps with:
- Faster access to booking details- Less context-switching across modules- Higher efficiency and reduced friction
Image without caption
Image without caption
email system
improved
3 months ago

Email System Enhancements

# Gmail Reply Threading FixWe’ve implemented a fix to improve Gmail reply threading. Gmail does not consistently include the "In-Reply-To" header in replies, which often results in broken threads or missing replies in conversation views. Our latest update introduces logic to gracefully handle this behavior, enabling more accurate email grouping and better continuity in reply chains. This enhancement ensures a smoother communication experience for users engaging with replies from Gmail.## Dedicated IP Visibility for $97 Plan UsersUsers on the $97 plan who were previously assigned dedicated IPs from the backend can now:- View their assigned IPs directly in the UI.- Update or reassign IPs as needed.This update brings more control and transparency for users managing dedicated sending infrastructure.## Domain Configuration for Payment and InvoicesWe’ve introduced a new section under "Payment and Invoices" settings, allowing users to:- Set up a dedicated sending domain specifically for payment-related communications.- Ensure brand consistency and improved deliverability for billing and invoice emails.
Image without caption
automations
voice ai
new
improved
3 months ago

Voice AI Data x Workflows

# What's New:- We’ve added support for accessing and templating Voice AI data within workflows.- Users can now seamlessly incorporate Voice AI call details, such as call duration, summary, and transcript, directly into their workflows.## How to Use:- Within the workflow, Voice AI variables can be accessed from the Voice AI Menu under Custom Tags.## Prerequisites:1.
Enabling Voice AI Agents
- Navigate to Agency View > Settings > AI Employee.- Select the sub-account where you want to enable Voice AI Agents.- Ensure the Voice AI Agent feature is enabled for that sub-account. If it’s not, turn it on.2.
Configuring the Agent
- Go to the enabled sub-account: Settings > Voice AI Agents.- Add a new agent and fill in the required fields: Agent Name, Business Name, Language, and Voice.- Set the Interaction Type to Inbound Calls.- Under Agent Goals, enable “Trigger workflow when a call is completed” to link the agent with a workflow.- Select the workflow you want the agent to trigger.3.
Phone & Availability Setup
- Assign a phone number to the AI agent.- When someone calls this number, the Voice AI agent will either answer immediately or step in if the recipient doesn’t pick up, depending on the configuration.
Image without caption
social planner
new
improved
3 months ago

Social Planner - Collaborator Post are supported for Instagram 😇

# 😇 Collaborator Posts are Supported for InstagramCollab posts on Instagram offer an effective way for brands to partner with content creators, increase reach and engagement, and build a community on the platform. An Instagram collab post is a single post that appears in two different accounts’ Feeds or Reels.Completed Ideas Board's request 🤩 -
https://ideas.lvlup.com/social-planner/p/collaboration-posts-on-instagram
🤗
How does it work?
1. Navigate to Marketing > Social Planner2. Connect your Instagram via Social Planner Settings (gear icon beside New Post) or use the already connected Instagram account.3. Add the content of the post with images, hashtags, and locations.4. In the section below,
Post this as Feed or Reel for Collaborator to work
. Enter the valid Instagram username of the user you wish to collaborate with.5. Once done, schedule your post.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
phone system
improved
3 months ago

Call Recording message can now be disabled

# Call Recording Message Can Now Be DisabledWhen recording a call, a message will now be played declaring, "The call is being recorded," for all participants in the call. Previously, there was no option to disable this message.Now, you can disable it; however, this feature currently works only for incoming calls. Outgoing calls will still play the message, but a similar change will be implemented for outgoing calls in the upcoming week.Please consider your local regulations when deciding whether to play the call recording message or not.
Image without caption
Image without caption
memberships
new
improved
3 months ago

Courses:Thumbnails for Assessments

We’re thrilled to introduce a visual upgrade to Courses that takes your learning experience to the next level! 🎉# What’s New:## Thumbnail Support for Quizzes & Assignments 🖼️Thumbnails are no longer just for lessons! You can now add them to quizzes and assignments, making every part of your course more engaging and visually appealing.## Improved Content Organization 📌Help learners identify and navigate course content faster with visual cues that enhance usability.## Seamless Course Aesthetics 🎨Achieve a cohesive and professional design across both lessons and assessments with unified thumbnail styling.
Give it a spin and elevate your course design today! 🚀
Image without caption
Image without caption
blogs
funnels and websites
e-commerce stores
webinars
new
3 months ago

Auto-Save for Funnels & Websites!

# We’ve Added Auto-Save and Enhanced Version History!To make your editing experience smoother and more reliable, changes are now saved automatically as you work. You can easily view or restore earlier versions of your content when needed.## How It Works-
Real-Time Auto-Save
: Changes are saved in real-time—no need to click “Save” manually.-
Version History
: View and restore previous versions of your pages. This feature is useful for undoing changes or reviewing earlier layouts.-
Visual Indicators
: See “Saving…” and “Auto Saved” messages to confirm that your progress is being saved.-
Manual Save Still Supported
: Manual saving is still available for users who prefer more control.## Version History Details-
Time-Stamped Versions
: Each version is labeled with the time and date it was saved.-
Global Section Alert
: A popup appears after editing a Global Section to indicate that changes will apply across all instances where it's used.-
Auto-Save Timing
: A new version is saved every 10 minutes—but only if changes are made during that time.-
Version Limit
: Up to 50 versions (auto + manual) are stored per item.## Available In-
Funnels
: All steps, elements, and sections-
Websites
: All pages and components-
Blogs
-
Webinars
-
E-Commerce
## Additional Notes- Auto-Save is triggered by edits and runs in the background.- Crash and Tab Close Protection helps prevent work loss due to unexpected browser events.- Performance is optimized to support editing on content-heavy pages.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
funnels and websites
new
3 months ago

Marketing Countdown Timer Integration with Funnels and Websites

# 🆕 New Feature OverviewWe are excited to introduce the Marketing Countdown Timers, a dynamic tool designed to enhance urgency and boost conversions across your funnels and websites. This new feature includes full Design Sync capability and supports three powerful timer types:## Timer Types-
Fixed Timer
: A universal end time for all visitors.-
Recurring Timer
: Looping countdowns with configurable durations and cycles.-
Dynamic Timer
: Personalized countdowns based on each contact’s interaction time.# 🎯 How to Use
1. Create a Timer
- Navigate to: Location → Marketing → Countdown Timers → New
2. Configure Your Settings
- Name your timer- Set the type and duration- Save your configuration
3. Add to Pages
- In the Page Builder:- Add → Countdown Timers → Select & Drop on Page# ⚙️ Highlights- Real-Time Design Sync with the Marketing Dashboard- 1-Minute Update Intervals to keep timers accurate and consistent- Automatic Cache Clearing to ensure your latest timer designs are always served- Contact-Specific Timer Logic for dynamic, personalized experiences
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
phone system
improved
3 months ago

Transcription for IVR calls and more

# April 1, 2025## Transcription Now Supports IVR Calls- Previously, transcriptions worked only for regular calls and not for IVR (Interactive Voice Response) or workflow calls.- Now, transcriptions are fully functional for IVR calls as well.- As always, calls must be recorded to be transcribed.To enable call transcription, navigate to sub-account settings > Phone Numbers > Advanced Settings > Voice Calls > Voice Intelligence.---# March 26, 2025## Friendlier Names for New Phone Numbers- Previously, the friendly name of a new phone number was just the phone number itself (which could be changed).- Now, it will display a more useful name, such as "Ronak's Number," if Ronak is the person purchasing the phone number. This can, of course, be changed as needed.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
ad manager
new
3 months ago

Engagement and Sales campaign statistics

# 👀 What’s New?We’ve expanded the
Ad Manager Statistics
section to now support performance data for
Sales
and
Engagement
campaigns, which were previously only available for Leads and Traffic objectives.## 👷 How It Works:- Under the
Statistics
tab of Ad Manager, you can see the campaign performance details.- In the
"Results"
column of campaign statistics, users will now see outcome data for:1.
Engagement Objective
with
Messaging Apps
as the conversion location:- Displays the number of people who started a
conversation
through the ad.2.
Sales Objective
with
Website
and/or
Messaging Apps
as the conversion location:-
Website
: Displays the number of
link clicks
on the ad.-
Messaging Apps
: Displays the number of people who started a
conversation
through the ad.These values appear in the familiar view under
Ad Manager Statistics > Campaign Details
, in the
Results
column next to the other metrics for the campaign.## ⭐ Why it Matters:- Helps users understand
engagement-driven or sales-driven outcomes
without switching tools.- Allows for better
performance comparisons across objectives
and more informed optimization decisions.## 📝 Notes:1. This update is specific only to campaigns created with
Sales
or
Engagement
objectives. Other Meta objective metrics remain the same and work as expected.2. Stats reflect results reported by Meta and are updated in near real-time.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
affiliate manager
improved
3 months ago

Sub Account Affiliate Manager: Smoother & More Efficient Payouts

We’ve made important improvements to the payout process to make it easier, more transparent, and more efficient—especially with the addition of bank payouts as a new method! Alongside this, we’ve refined the user experience to help you pay affiliates faster and with greater clarity.# What’s Improved?
New Payout Categories
– To make things clearer, we’ve separated affiliates into three tabs:-
PayPal
: Affiliates who have PayPal as their payout method.-
Bank
: Affiliates who have bank transfer as their payout method.-
Missing Payout Details
: Affiliates who haven’t added their payout details yet.
Clearer Bulk Selection for Payouts
-
Before
: Selecting affiliates across multiple pages only paid those on the current page.-
Now
: When you select affiliates across multiple pages, the system includes all of them in the payment pop-up.
Easier Navigation
-
Before
: Clicking back after viewing an affiliate’s profile returned you to the first tab instead of where you left off.-
Now
: Clicking back takes you right back to the tab and page you were on.
More Control Over List View
- You can now adjust how many affiliates appear per page in the Payouts tab, making it easier to manage large lists.
Confirmation Message After Payout
-
Before
: Once you paid affiliates, they disappeared from the list without confirmation.-
Now
: A toast notification will confirm that the payout was successful.# How It Works:1. Go to the Payout tab.2. Approve payouts that are ready for payment.3. Switch to the Approved tab.4. Choose how to pay: Select multiple payouts in bulk or process them one by one.5. Bulk Payouts? No problem! Click "Pay," and the system will categorize payouts based on different methods.6. Follow the on-screen steps to complete payments successfully.
Image without caption
memberships
new
3 months ago

New Theme Customizer Launched!

# We’re excited to introduce the all-new Theme Customizer!The Theme Customizer is a powerful tool that gives you full control over the look and feel of your course site—no coding required! Create a fully branded and stunning learning experience with ease.## ✨ What's New
Real-Time Previews:
Instantly see changes before publishing.
Template Saving & Reuse:
Save and apply templates across multiple courses.
Visibility Toggles:
Show or hide sections with a click.
Color & Text Overrides:
Customize fonts and colors to match your brand.
Custom Content Blocks:
Add content tailored to your audience.
Drag-and-Drop Sorting:
Reorder layout blocks effortlessly.## 🔧 New Custom Blocks
Image Block:
Add eye-catching visuals.
Video Block:
Embed engaging videos.
Cross-Sell Block:
Promote offers across product and lesson pages.
Custom Block:
Share announcements or updates.
Call-to-Action Block:
Guide users with compelling CTAs.
Text Block:
Add context or instructions to your content.## 💡 Why You'll Love It- Fully customizable and on-brand course sites.- No technical expertise required.- Pre-built templates to speed up design.- Real-time editing with a user-friendly interface.## 🔮 Coming Soon- Improved loading speed and interactions.- Auto-linking for cross-sell blocks.- Internationalization (i18n) support.- Enhanced UI for editing controls.- Auto-play for videos.
Start designing a course site that reflects your brand—your way. Try the Theme Customizer today! 🎨🔥
communities
new
3 months ago

Enhanced Admin Controls for Events and Membership

# OverviewWe're excited to introduce new features that give community admins and owners more visibility and control over events and membership! These updates are designed to improve event management and streamline the membership approval process.🎉
New Features
👥
Event Attendee List
1. View the complete list of event attendees.2. Export the attendee list for an event as a CSV file.3. Control member visibility settings for attendee lists.- Email addresses of attendees will never be visible to regular members.📋
View Saved Membership Answers
1. Admins can view responses to membership questionnaires.2. Pending members can review their submitted answers.3. Streamlined membership approval process.4. Enhanced transparency in member screening.⚡️
Performance Improvements
1. Events API optimization resulting in a 95% reduction in latency.- Faster event loading and response times.- Improved overall user experience.✨
Enhancements
1.
Transfer Ownership
- Now, admins and owners of agencies and locations can transfer a group's ownership.2. General bug fixes to improve the stability of the platform.🔨
How to Use?Event Attendee List
1. Navigate to your community events tab.2. Click on the desired event.3. Click on the guest count or eye icon to view the list of attendees.4. Click on the download icon to export a CSV with the list of attendees.5. While creating an event, you can check the option "Hide attendees from group members" to control visibility.
Membership Answer Review
1. Access the members tab.- On mobile, tap the "Manage" button, then select "Members."2. View submitted answers for pending and approved members by clicking on the "More options" (kebab menu) of a member card and selecting "View Membership Answers."These updates bring more control and transparency to communities while significantly improving performance and user experience. Try out these new features to enhance your community experience!
Image without caption
Image without caption
memberships
new
3 months ago

Add Media via Links in Courses

# ✨ What’s New## Add Media via LinksEasily embed audio or video content into your lessons using downloadable URLs.## In-Platform PlaybackLinked media can be played directly within the platform, creating a seamless learning experience.## Media Format ValidationThe system automatically validates linked files to ensure that only supported audio and video formats are accepted.## 💡 Why It Matters### Enhanced EngagementAdding rich multimedia boosts learner interaction and retention.### Time-SavingThere is no need to upload files—just paste a valid link.### Flexible FormatsThe system supports a variety of media types to match diverse teaching styles.
Image without caption
Image without caption
client portal
new
3 months ago

Estimates for Client Portal

# OverviewWe're thrilled to introduce the Estimates feature for the client portal, where users can view and manage their estimates in one place!🎉
What's New?
- Users can view a list of estimates they are part of, complete with all necessary details.- Users can view estimates from the client portal.- The ability to download estimates has been implemented within the client portal.- The accept/reject status will be updated, allowing users to view or download estimates based on their status.- This feature will work on both web and mobile apps.- With app permissions, the admin can enable or disable estimates.🔍
How It WorksFor Web
🌐- On the client portal dashboard, check for the estimates widget.- Click on the eye icon to view an estimate.- To download, click on the download icon.- If you have more than 5 estimates, click on "view all" to see all estimates.
For Mobile App
📱- On the client portal dashboard, navigate to the estimates tab.- Click on the eye icon to view an estimate.- To download, click on the download icon. An estimate can be downloaded only when it is signed.- You can scroll to view all estimates.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
automations
improved
fixed
3 months ago

Execution Logs & Enrolment History - Enhancements

# Objective- This release focuses on improving the user experience with Execution Logs and Enrollment History (EL & EH).- We want users to be able to debug any issues they encounter in a workflow simply by looking at the Execution Logs and Enrollment History pages, as they provide valuable insights.## What's New?-
Enhanced Go To Action
: By clicking the "Go to" button, users can check the action configuration directly in the logs. Additionally, users can click the "Edit" button, which will take them to the builder for making changes.-
Improved Navigation
: Previously, when users performed actions from the table, such as "See Contact Path" or "View Contact History," they had to navigate back to EL/EH, and the filters would reset. Now, for all features present in EL & EH, users will see a back button that allows them to return one step with the applied filters.-
Tooltip on Date Filter
: A tooltip has been added to inform users that we only have data for the past 30 days.-
Added Enrollment Reason
: The Enrollment Reason has been included in Enrollment History and will be visible for new enrollments starting April 1st.-
Replacement of IDs with Names
: In the "Assign To User" and "If-Else Actions" sections in View Details (EL), IDs have been replaced with names to facilitate easier debugging of executions.-
Increased GPT Response
: The GPT response in View Details (EL) has been increased from 100 characters to 2000 characters, with a "view more" button for expanded details.-
Contact Filter Bug Fix
: The contact filter issue, which previously did not apply on any page except page 1 in EL and EH, has been resolved.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
help & support
new
3 months ago

Launch of AI Support Assistant

We’re excited to roll out the
AI Support Assistant
(Beta) – your new support companion inside LvlUp! This assistant is designed to provide instant, AI-powered answers to help you move faster and stay unblocked, any time of day.## What’s New?- The AI Support Assistant is now live for all active agencies (post 90 days of purchase).- Agency admins and agency users have access to the AI Support Assistant.- Available under the Help & Support section (click the “?” icon in the top bar).- You’ll now see a new AI Support Assistant banner – click it to start chatting with the assistant.- Get immediate answers, ask follow-up questions, and receive guided help directly inside the platform.## How It Works:1. Click the “?” icon on the top bar.2. Go to Help & Support.3. Click the AI Support Assistant banner.4. Ask your question – the assistant will respond instantly.5. Use thumbs up/down to share feedback and help us improve.6. The assistant is smart enough to detect user frustration and suggest appropriate next steps.## Why It Matters:-
Faster Help:
Get answers right when you need them, without leaving the platform.-
Smarter Experience:
The assistant supports follow-up questions and learns from feedback.-
Always Available:
24/7 support, so you’re never stuck – even after hours.
Image without caption
app marketplace
api
improved
3 months ago

Marketplace - Agency white-label details in AppInstall webhook

Developers can now access the white-label features of agencies when sub-accounts install an app.# What's New?The
AppInstall
webhook event now includes four new fields:-
Parent Agency's Name
-
Is the Parent Agency White-Labeled?
-
Parent Agency's Domain
-
Parent Agency's Logo
# Why Is This Important?This enhancement allows developers to create a white-labeled experience for sub-accounts within their apps, which can improve app adoption among white-labeled agencies.# What's Next?We will soon add the above details to the
GET /locations/{locationId}
API, enabling developers to retrieve the parent agency's white-labeled details on demand.
app marketplace
improved
3 months ago

Marketplace - Redesigned App Cards

# Marketplace - App Cards RedesignThe Marketplace team is excited to announce the new and improved designs for the Marketplace - App cards.## What's New?
More Social Proof for Agencies
- We have added the install count to the app card to help agencies gauge the popularity of the app.
User-Aware and White-Label Friendly App Cards
- The app cards appear differently for agency users compared to sub-account users, depending on who is viewing the Marketplace.- Certain details will be hidden from the app card when sub-account users are accessing the Marketplace:1.
Install Count
(Rationale: Most popular apps have a 5-6 figure install count, which may raise questions among white-label agencies' sub-accounts. Therefore, sub-account users cannot see the install count.)2.
'White-Label Verified' TagBetter Design
- We have improved the design of the app ratings by now displaying the familiar 5-star design that customers recognize from e-commerce sites.- The design of the white-label verified tag has been enhanced to make it less bulky on the app card.- The pricing category tag design has been simplified. We now display "Free to Install" in the following three scenarios:1. If the app has a free trial enabled.2. If the app has a free plan (freemium model).3. If the app has no subscription fees but follows a usage-based pricing model.## Why is This Important?
Agency Trust
- This is the first of many planned steps to make the App Marketplace more white-label friendly by curating information based on whether an agency or sub-account user is viewing the Marketplace.
Driving Adoption
- The social proof signals and simplified design aim to improve the adoption of Marketplace apps by agencies.
Image without caption
Image without caption
affiliate manager
improved
3 months ago

Sub Account Affiliate Manager: Quick Campaign Actions

Managing affiliates just got easier! With Quick Campaign Actions, you can now add or remove affiliates directly from the Affiliate List Page, streamlining your workflow and saving time.# 👀 What’s New?-
Add Affiliates to Campaigns
– Quickly assign affiliates to a campaign from the list page.-
Remove Affiliates from Campaigns
– Easily remove affiliates from a campaign without navigating to their profile.# 👷 How It Works:## Adding an Affiliate to a Campaign1. Go to Affiliate Manager → Affiliate List Page.2. Click the three-dot menu next to the affiliate's name.3. Select Campaign Actions → Add to Campaign.4. Choose the campaign from the pop-up list.5. Click Confirm.## Removing an Affiliate from a Campaign1. On the Affiliate List Page, click the three-dot menu next to the affiliate’s name.2. Select Campaign Actions → Remove from Campaign.3. Choose the campaign to remove them from.4. Click Confirm.# ⭐ Why it Matters:-
Saves Time
– No need to navigate to individual profiles to manage campaigns.-
Effortless Affiliate Management
– Easily update affiliate assignments in seconds.-
Better Organization
– Keep your campaigns up to date with minimal effort.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
3 months ago

Appointment Modal – Now in a Side Drawer

We’re excited to introduce a new way to view and manage appointments with the Appointment Side Drawer—a
sleek
,
scalable
design that provides a
more efficient
experience across the platform.## What’s New?### Appointment Modal Now Opens in a Side DrawerThe appointment modal now opens as a
right-hand side drawer
instead of a pop-up, giving you a more
streamlined
and uninterrupted flow.### Available Across Key ViewsYou can
access
and
manage
appointments in the new side drawer from:- Calendar View- Appointment List View- Conversations Tab- Contacts Tab### Inline Editing for Appointment DetailsQuickly
update
key appointment
details
—like date, time, and status—directly from the side drawer
without losing context
or navigating away from your screen.### How to Use ItSimply click on any appointment from the supported views mentioned above. The side drawer will slide in from the right, displaying
appointment information
and editable fields in a clean layout.### Why It Matters-
Scalability:
The side drawer layout
sets the foundation
for
future upgrades
—like showing
form submissions
, adding a rich text editor for
notes
, and more.-
Retention:
A
smoother
, more
intuitive
experience encourages continued use and adoption.-
Efficiency:
Manage appointments, add notes, and make edits
faster
—all without leaving your current screen.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
documents & contracts
new
3 months ago

Creating Draft Documents using Workflows

# What’s New?- You can now generate contracts as drafts using the "Send Documents & Contracts" action in Workflows. This ensures that only the designated person reviews and sends them.## How to Use It1.
Create/Edit a Workflow
: Add a trigger (e.g., new deal stage).2.
Add “Send Documents & Contracts”
: Select your contract template and set the Sending Mode to “Create as Draft.”3.
Publish
: Whenever the trigger fires, a draft contract is automatically created.4.
Review & Send
: The responsible person or team finalizes the draft from Documents & Contracts.## Why We Built It- To centralize contract reviews and prevent accidental sends.- This feature ensures high-quality, consistent documents while keeping the final sending step in the right hands.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
security
improved
3 months ago

Text Search on Audit Logs

# OverviewWe're excited to announce an enhancement to the search functionality in Audit Logs! Previously, users could only search using document IDs, which was often confusing and unintuitive. With this update, we now support free text search, making it easier to find relevant log entries.## What’s New-
Free Text Search:
Users can now search for any header under the Name label using keywords.-
Partial Match Support:
The search will return results for partial matches, providing greater flexibility.-
Document ID Search:
Document ID search remains available for those who prefer using it.## Why It Matters-
Improved Usability:
Users can now search with familiar terms instead of deciphering document IDs.-
Reduced Complexity:
No more struggling to find or remember document IDs.-
Enhanced Efficiency:
Quickly locate relevant logs with simple text-based search.
Image without caption
phone system
new
3 months ago

Updated Messaging Policies for Canadian 10DLC Numbers: A2P Registration Requirements

We are updating our messaging policies regarding Canadian 10-digit long code (10DLC) numbers. These changes apply to messages sent from Canadian numbers to recipients in both the United States and Canada.## Key Changes### Messaging from Canada to the United StatesEffective immediately, all messages sent from Canadian 10DLC numbers to U.S. recipients must originate from Application-to-Person (A2P) registered numbers. This requirement applies to both new and existing Canadian numbers.### Messaging within CanadaFor new Canadian 10DLC numbers purchased after March 26, 2025, A2P registration is mandatory to send messages to Canadian recipients.Existing Canadian 10DLC numbers used for messaging within Canada are not required to undergo A2P registration at this time, except as noted in the previous point.## Important NotesThese updates apply exclusively to 10DLC numbers. Toll-Free (TF) numbers are not affected and will continue to operate under existing guidelines.## Understanding A2P 10DLC RegistrationA2P 10DLC is a system that allows businesses to send Application-to-Person type messaging via standard 10-digit long code phone numbers. Registering your numbers under this framework helps ensure compliance with carrier regulations and enhances message deliverability. For a comprehensive overview of A2P 10DLC and answers to common questions, please refer to our support article.## Action Steps
For Existing Canadian 10DLC Numbers Messaging to the U.S.:
If your number is not yet A2P registered, please initiate the registration process promptly to comply with the new requirements.
For New Canadian 10DLC Numbers:
Ensure A2P registration is completed before initiating messaging to recipients in either the U.S. or Canada.
custom objects
new
3 months ago

Snapshots for Custom Objects

This release introduces support for custom objects within the snapshot functionality, allowing users to copy custom object data (including all custom fields) from one sub-account to another. This feature streamlines the process of replicating custom objects across sub-accounts, with custom objects and their associated data automatically loaded during snapshot creation.# Why This Feature?This update simplifies the process of transferring custom object data between sub-accounts. By automatically including all custom fields and associations, it ensures that users can seamlessly replicate complex data structures without manual configuration.# What's New?-
Custom Object Support:
Custom objects, along with all their custom fields, are now supported in snapshots. Users can easily copy custom object data between sub-accounts.-
Custom Object Associations:
Custom objects can be automatically associated with other custom objects or contacts. These associations are always included in the snapshot by default and cannot be modified during the process.-
Data Replication Between Sub-Accounts:
Users can now copy custom object data from one sub-account to another, making it easier to maintain consistent data across multiple sub-accounts.# How to Use?1. Navigate to
Agency > Account Snapshots > Create Snapshot
.2. Select the custom object you want to include in the snapshot.3. The associated custom fields and connections with other objects (such as contacts) will automatically be included.4. Copy the data from one sub-account to another by creating a snapshot and selecting the source and target sub-accounts.# Important LimitationA maximum of three custom objects can be included in a snapshot for a sub-account. If the total number of custom objects after importing the snapshot exceeds three, no custom object will be created using the snapshot in the sub-account.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
3 months ago

Automatic Sample Data for New Subaccounts

# What’s New?When creating a new subaccount, the CRM now automatically populates it with sample data for Opportunities, Pipeline, Contacts (including an additional contact linked to an Opportunity), Tasks, Notes, Companies, and Tags. Each sample record includes the prefix "(Example)" to clearly differentiate it from actual data.## Why It MattersThese pre-populated examples allow users to immediately understand how different CRM modules work together. New subaccounts can easily explore and grasp the functionality of Opportunities, Pipelines, and associated records, which accelerates CRM adoption and reduces initial setup confusion.## Key Details
No Default Pipeline?
If the pipeline for a location is fetched via snapshots and there’s no default pipeline set, sample Opportunities (including the pipeline itself) will not be created. However, sample Contacts, Tasks, Notes, Companies, and Tags will still be added.## CustomizationUsers have complete control and can customize or remove the sample data at any time.## Impact
Reduced Setup Friction:
By providing ready-to-use examples, the onboarding experience for new subaccounts is significantly simplified.
No Effect on Existing Accounts:
Existing subaccounts remain completely unaffected by this change.
Image without caption
Image without caption
mobile app
conversations
new
improved
3 months ago

Group Chat on Mobile App

Until now, users could only engage in one-on-one conversations. With
Group Chat
, you can now collaborate with multiple contacts in a single thread, enabling faster coordination, clearer communication, and better client engagement—all from your phone.This feature is now live in the public beta for
LvlUp
and
LeadConnector
, with a full rollout coming soon.## How Does This Feature Benefit You?-
Collaborative Conversations
: Easily engage multiple clients, team members, or stakeholders in a single thread—no need to juggle multiple one-on-one chats.-
Streamlined Communication
: Share updates, coordinate tasks, and respond faster with everyone in the loop at once.-
Improved Client Engagement
: Create a more personal and responsive experience by grouping related contacts (e.g., families, teams, or departments).-
Mobile-First Convenience
: Start, manage, and participate in group chats directly from your mobile device—anytime, anywhere.## How to Use This Feature1.
Open Conversations
: Launch the
LvlUp
mobile app and navigate to the Conversations tab.2.
Tap the + Icon
: Click the floating “+” button to start a new conversation.3.
Choose Group Chat
: Select “Group Chat” as the conversation type.4.
Add Members
: Select your phone number and pick multiple contacts from your contact list to form the group.5.
Start Messaging
: Begin chatting instantly with all selected participants in one thread.## Availability
LvlUp
v3.95.0 and above
LeadConnector
v3.95.0 and aboveWhite Labelled apps - Update to be requested
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
communities
gokollab
new
3 months ago

Pin Your Favorite Groups

# OverviewAs part of our ongoing efforts to enhance the user interface and improve user experience on LvlUp, we’re excited to introduce a new feature that allows users to pin their favorite groups for quick and easy access directly from the dedicated groups sidebar.## 📌 Group Pinning:- Users can pin their favorite groups from the group switcher.- Pinned groups will appear at the top of the dedicated groups sidebar.- Users can pin up to 4 groups in both LvlUp and Communities.- In Communities, the pinned groups will appear at the top, followed by the remaining groups under the sub-account. However, in LvlUp, only the pinned groups will be displayed in the sidebar.## 📋 How to Pin / Unpin a Group:- To pin a group, open the group switcher (located in the top navigation bar) and scroll to locate your favorite group.- Hover over the group to find the new pin icon that appears on the right side of the group card.- Click the icon to pin the group.- The pinned group will appear at the top in both the switcher and the group sidebar list.- To unpin the group, click on the unpin button that appears on the right side of the pinned group card in the switcher.
Image without caption
Image without caption
funnels and websites
new
3 months ago

Prebuilt Image Sliders sections!

# 🆕 What’s New?Effortlessly add engaging and dynamic image sliders to funnels and websites with the new prebuilt Image Slider sections.# ⚙️ How to Use It?1. Go to
Sites
and open the funnel or website where you want to add an image slider.2. Click on
Add Elements
in the top-right corner.3. Select
Prebuilt Sections
and choose
Image Slider
from the list.4. Customize images, text, and design settings.5. Publish to enhance your page’s visual appeal!# 🔑 Key Highlights- ✅
Prebuilt & Ready to Use
– Choose from a variety of sleek, professional slider designs.- ✅
Fully Customizable
– Modify images, text, transitions, and colors to match your brand.Start using these new Image Slider templates to make your pages more visually compelling with ease!
Image without caption
qr codes
new
3 months ago

QR Codes Folder Management & UI Enhancement

# 🔥 What's New?
📂 Organize Your QR Codes with Folders
You can now create and manage folders to better organize your QR codes within the platform. This new system allows you to categorize and store your codes efficiently for quick access and improved navigation.# 🛠 Improved QR Name VisibilityWe've resolved the UI issue where QR code names were overlapping. Now, QR names display clearly beneath each code, ensuring a smooth user experience.# 🛠 How It Works?1. Navigate to the QR Codes section.2. Click "Create Folder," enter a name, and hit Create.3. Drag or assign QR codes into folders for a clutter-free workspace.4. View QR names clearly below each code for instant identification.# 👀 Key Highlights- ✅
Create Folders
– Use the "Create Folder" button to group related QR codes (e.g., "Email QRs," "Campaign A," etc.).- ✅
Folder Navigation
– Easily move between folders using a breadcrumb trail for seamless navigation.- ✅
Clear QR Labeling
– QR names are now displayed neatly below each code, improving readability without obstructing the image.This update enhances both user experience and content management efficiency, making it easier than ever to organize and identify your QR codes. 🚀
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
payments
new
3 months ago

Limit the number of months a coupon is applied on a subscription

# What's New?- Businesses can now create coupons for subscription products with enhanced flexibility. Previously, coupons could only be applied to the first payment or all payments until the subscription ends or is canceled.- With this new enhancement, businesses can
define the duration
for which they would like the coupon to be applicable.- When creating or editing a coupon, an additional option will allow businesses to choose
"Multiple Months"
instead of
"Forever,"
providing the number of months for which the coupon should apply.- The coupon will apply to all payments collected for the subscription from the date the subscription product is purchased, up to the number of months specified under "Multiple Months."- This setting will apply regardless of the subscription frequency, whether it is weekly, monthly, quarterly, or annual. The coupon will be valid for the defined number of months for any payment due against the subscription.- For existing coupons, the default setting will be "Forever" if that option was selected previously.## Where can you find these settings?- Payments > Coupons > Add Coupons- Payments > Coupons > Edit Coupons## Coming Up Next?Further coupon enhancements are planned for the upcoming quarter, including the introduction of coupon code-based triggers and the ability to generate single-use coupons.## Help Doc Link:
http://help.lvlup.com/en/support/solutions/articles/155000004886-coupon-application-on-subscription-products
## Sample Screenshots:
Image without caption
Image without caption
payments
invoicing
new
improved
3 months ago

Taxes & Discounts on Text2Pay

# What's New?- Options to add taxes and discounts directly on the Text2Pay modal.- Ability to modify the due date from the modal.- Revamped user interface on Text2Pay via the Contacts screen.## How to Use1. Navigate to Contacts or Conversations.2. Click on the hamburger menu and select "Request Payment."3. Type to add a product on the go or select from pre-existing products.4. Add discounts and taxes if needed.5. Modify the due date of the payment if necessary.## Why We Built It- To provide better support for Text2Pay and facilitate easier payment collection with customizable options for taxes and discounts.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
3 months ago

Calendars: Streamlined Notifications & Smarter Payment Integration

We’re continuing to enhance the Calendars experience by making it more seamless, user-friendly, and
better connected
across the LvlUp platform. These updates focus on
reducing friction
, simplifying user flows, and enabling
smoother
collaboration among different modules.## Create Email Template Directly from Calendar Notifications SettingsWe’ve
streamlined
the process of setting up notification emails in Calendars!
Previously
, users had to switch to the Marketing section to create an email template and then return to the Calendars tab to select it.
Now
, you can create a new email template directly from within the Notifications settings while configuring your calendar.-
Launch
the template creation
flow
right from Notifications- Once created, the new template appears in the dropdown for
immediate selection
- No more switching back and forth — it’s a
faster
, smoother experience## Improved Payment Integration Visibility in Calendar SettingsTo
reduce confusion
around payment configurations, we've improved how it is displayed within Calendar settings:- Users will now see a
clear tag
when no payment method is connected- A
button redirects
users to the Payment Integrations section to connect a provider- The default selected payment provider is shown- A full list of
supported providers
is displayed to improve clarity## Quick Benefits-
Faster setup
with fewer clicks and no context switching- A more
collaborative
and
user-friendly
experience
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
conversation ai
new
3 months ago

Thinking / Typing Indicator for Conversation AI in Live Chat

# What's New?We have introduced the Typing/Thinking Indicator for Conversation AI, which enhances the user experience by making interactions with the AI feel more natural and engaging. This feature provides real-time feedback, letting users know when the AI is generating a response.## How It WorksWhen the AI is processing a response, a visual indicator (e.g., “...”) will appear in the chat.
Supported Platforms:
Available in the live chat interface for sub-account bots.## Key Considerations- ✅ Real-time updates: The indicator accurately reflects when the AI is generating responses.- ✅ Platform compatibility: Works in the live chat channel.- ✅ Improved engagement: Creates a smoother, more intuitive chat experience.
Image without caption
automations
new
3 months ago

Add cc/bcc in Email Action

Now you can add CC/BCC fields in the Email Action.# Changes- You can add CC/BCC fields in the Email action by clicking on the CC/BCC buttons.- When you click on the button, the respective fields will populate.# Points to Remember- You can add CC, BCC, or both in the Email action.- CC and BCC emails
will not
be reflected in the Email Stats.- The Test Email feature
will not
work for CC/BCC Emails.- Success and failure will depend only on the Contact Email (to email) and not on CC/BCC Emails.- Users can add multiple CC/BCC emails. Emails need to be comma-separated.- If one of the CC/BCC emails is invalid, the invalid email will be skipped, but other valid emails will go through.- Both fields are non-mandatory.
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
3 months ago

Revoke Course Access Enhancement

# What's New?We've enhanced course access management with a new revocation feature, allowing for more granular control over individual courses within an offer.## Key Updates:1.
Revoke Individual Course Access
– Admins can now remove access to a specific course without affecting the entire offer.2.
Offer Integrity Maintained
– Users will continue to have access to other courses included in the offer.3.
Greater Flexibility & Control
– Adjust access permissions without disrupting the learning experience.4.
Seamless Management
– Easily manage course access directly from the admin panel.This update ensures smoother administration while preserving a seamless user experience. 🚀
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
3 months ago

Calendars Module – UI/UX Improvements & Enhanced Guidance

We’ve made a series of intuitive
UI/UX enhancements
to help you navigate and configure your calendars with greater
ease
and
clarity
—reducing confusion, errors, and support requests.## What’s New### Enhanced Meeting Location UI- A new
Meeting Location
header has been added under the
Meeting Details
tab for better visibility.- If a location option isn’t supported for your calendar type, we now
explicitly inform users that these location types are not supported
—improving clarity and reducing setup errors.### Smarter Interdependent Settings-
Previously
, enabling certain settings like Recurring Appointments was blocked if any incompatible settings (e.g., Date-specific Hours or Multiple Team Members) were already active. Users had to
manually
find and
disable
those settings before proceeding.-
Now
, we
clearly show which settings conflict
and give users the ability to
automatically disable them with a single click
—making it fast and frustration-free to enable what you need.### Improved Horizontal Scrolling in Day View- A
popup notification
now appears whenever
multiple users are added
to the calendar view, informing users that they can use horizontal scrolling to see everyone’s schedule.- This
guidance
ensures users don’t miss additional team member availability, which previously caused confusion.These updates
reduce
setup
confusion
through clearer messaging and smarter interactions, resulting in
fewer support tickets
and a smoother, more guided user experience.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
3 months ago

Internationalization For Client-Portal & Child Apps (Language support for entire Client Portal)

# OverviewWe’ve implemented language internationalization for the Client Portal and Child App, making it a truly global product. Now available on both web and mobile, this enhancement ensures a seamless and user-friendly experience for all users.## What's NewWe've enabled support for multiple languages, including:- German- Spanish- French (Canada)- French (France)- Dutch- Portuguese (Portugal)- Portuguese (Brazil)- Italian- Swedish- Finnish- Norwegian- And many more...This expansion allows users from diverse regions to effortlessly manage the Client Portal and Child Apps in their native language.## How It Works### For Web:1. Click on
Manage Your Account
2. Select
Language Settings
3. Choose your language4. Click
Save
### For Mobile App:1. Click on
Profile
at the bottom bar2. Go to
Settings
3. Select
Language Settings
4. Choose your language5. Click
Save
Image without caption
Image without caption
improved
3 months ago

Call Recording message is now mandatory

# Call Recording Message RequirementThe call recording message cannot be left blank anymore.Earlier:- If the call recording message field was entirely blank (no characters at all), we would play the default call recording message.- If the call recording message field contained only a blank space character, we would not play anything.Now:- Existing cases with blank or blank space call recording messages will continue to work as they did earlier, so you don't need to make any immediate changes.- If you try to edit the Phone Number settings of these existing cases, it will require you to enter a call recording message mandatorily.- The call recording message field needs to contain at least one non-blank space character.- This ensures that what you see on the UI is what will actually be played as the call recording message.
Image without caption
invoicing
new
improved
3 months ago

Invoices: Addition of 3 default reminders

# What's New?- Whenever a new sub-account starts using invoices, three default reminders will be preset.- This feature will help businesses collect payments on time.- It provides ease of settings on invoices.## How to Use1. Go to
Invoices
->
Settings
.2. Review the default reminders. You can disable any that you don't want or change the templates according to your needs.
Note:
No changes have been made to the reminders of sub-accounts that are already using invoices.## Why We Built ItWe developed this feature to assist more businesses in collecting payments on time.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
forms
surveys
quizzes
new
improved
3 months ago

Inline Editing for Forms, Surveys & Quizzes!

# ✨ New Feature: Inline Editing in the BuilderWe’ve made form creation more intuitive with Inline Editing—allowing you to edit text elements directly within the builder preview! There's no need to open a settings panel; just click, type, and edit instantly.## ✅ What’s New?-
Direct Editing in the Builder
: Click on any text element and update it right away.-
Instant Preview Updates
: See your edits in real-time without switching views.-
Faster Form Customization
: Quickly edit labels, placeholders, and options.-
Seamless Experience Across All Elements
: Works on text fields, dropdowns, checkboxes, radio buttons, buttons, and more!## 🔍 How It Works-
Click on Any Text Element
: Select field labels, placeholder text, button text, or dropdown options.-
Type & Update Instantly
: Modify the text directly—no need to open a settings panel.-
See Real-Time Changes
: Your updates appear immediately for instant adjustments.-
Save & Publish with Confidence
: Once you're happy with the changes, save and publish your form!## 🎯 Why This MattersInline Editing eliminates extra steps, making form-building faster and more efficient. No more navigating through settings—just click and edit exactly where you see it. Build, refine, and launch forms in record time!This update is now live for all users. Try it out and experience a smoother, more streamlined workflow! 🚀
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
3 months ago

Cancellation Widget – Consistent & Informative Cancellation Experience

We’ve enhanced the
Cancellation Widget
to align its look and feel with the
Booking
and
Reschedule
experiences. These updates ensure that users can confidently cancel appointments with full context, while businesses gain better visibility into why appointments are canceled.## What's New?-
Unified UI/UX Experience:
To provide a seamless user journey across scheduling touchpoints, the cancellation widget now mirrors the design of the booking and reschedule widgets.-
Capture & Display Cancellation Reasons:
We’ve added structured support for collecting and displaying cancellation insights. Users will now be asked to provide a cancellation reason and will also see key appointment information, including Calendar Name, Duration, Description, and Appointment Date & Time.## Why This Matters?-
Improved Consistency:
A unified experience across booking, rescheduling, and cancellation reduces friction and builds user trust.-
Better Visibility:
Teams can now view cancellation reasons, helping them identify patterns and reduce future cancellations.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
app marketplace
api
new
4 months ago

Agency-distributed marketplace apps now available on Starter ($97) plan

# New Agency-Level APIs and Marketplace Apps for the Starter PlanAgency-level APIs and agency-distributed marketplace apps are now available on the Starter plan ($97).## What's New?- Agencies on the Starter plan ($97) can now install agency-level apps.- Agencies on the Starter plan ($97) can utilize most agency-level APIs, with the exception of the Create Sub-account and SaaS APIs, which are available only on the $497 plan.## Why Is This Important?Currently, approximately 60% of Marketplace Apps are designed to be distributed exclusively through agencies. The previous restriction prevented agencies on the Starter plan from accessing the majority of Marketplace Apps. We have now removed this limitation, allowing wider access for agencies on the Starter plan.
funnels and websites
new
improved
4 months ago

Funnel Preview Performance Upgrade

# OverviewWe've upgraded the funnel-preview service to Nuxt 3.14, introducing performance improvements, security enhancements, and optimizations. This update results in reduced load times, smaller bundle sizes, and an overall better user experience.## Key Improvements
Optimized Bundle Sizes
-
Server Bundle Size Reduced:
From 526MB to 337MB (36% reduction), improving efficiency.-
Client Entry File Size Reduced:
From 117KB to 96KB (17.9% reduction), leading to better First Contentful Paint (FCP) and Largest Contentful Paint (LCP) performance.
Security & Code Enhancements
-
Component Name Obfuscation:
Component names are now hashed and hidden for improved security and code encapsulation.
Lazy Loading for Translations
- Previously, all language files were loaded on the client side, increasing load times.- Now, only the required language file is loaded dynamically, improving FCP and overall performance.- This change also contributed to the reduction in entry file size by eliminating unnecessary bundled language messages.
Performance Benchmark
- The Gym Funnel benchmark now achieves an average mobile page speed score of 90 after these optimizations.## Upcoming Improvements- Server-side translations to remove the need for client-side locale file loading.- Exploring Nuxt’s native delay hydration to enhance performance further.- Optimizing and lazy loading third-party scripts used in forms, surveys, and calendars.- Reducing render-blocking CSS to further improve load times.- Targeting a mobile page speed score of 90+ even with JavaScript-heavy elements like forms, surveys, and order pages.These enhancements ensure faster load times, improved user experience, and overall better system performance. Further optimizations are planned in upcoming releases.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
phone system
new
4 months ago

Call Scripts

You can increase the consistency and productivity of your calling agents by providing them with an easy-to-follow Call Script directly within the web dialer.## How to Create a Call Script- Navigate to
Location Settings
>
Phone Numbers
>
Advanced Settings
>
Call Scripts
Only Agency Owners, Admins, and Subaccount Admins can create Call Scripts. Non-admins cannot create Call Scripts but can use them while on a call.## How to Use Call Scripts- Make a call using the web dialer- Click on
Scripts
- Select the desired script## AvailabilityThis feature is currently available via Labs. Enable it within
Location Settings
>
Labs
>
Call Scripts
.## Device SupportThis feature is currently supported on the web dialer, with mobile app support coming soon.At this time, you cannot link the Call Scripts to a workflow, user, or opportunity. Share your thoughts on what is most needed on the Ideas board, and we will work on it.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
integrations
security
improved
4 months ago

OAuth-Based Authentication for LeadConnector App on Zapier

# OverviewWe are introducing OAuth-based authorization for our LeadConnector app on Zapier. This update enhances security, improves access control, and aligns with industry best practices. Additionally, it provides a seamless experience for whitelabel agencies.## Why This Matters-
Enhanced Security:
OAuth uses token-based authentication, significantly reducing the risk of credential exposure from hardcoded or leaked API keys.-
Compliance & Best Practices:
Ensures adherence to modern security standards, providing better control and transparency.## How to Use It1. Log in to Zapier and select "Create a New Zap."2. Choose “LeadConnector” from the app selection window.3. Click “Sign In” to connect your LeadConnector account.4. A login pop-up will appear; clicking on it will take you to the login screen, where you can use your existing credentials to log in.5. Select the relevant sub-account for integration.6. Start building actions or triggers based on your workflow needs.This streamlined process enhances security while maintaining the familiar Zapier experience.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
4 months ago

Stay Informed About Contact Enrollment Delays

# OverviewWe’ve introduced a Rate Limit Notification Banner to proactively inform users when contact enrollment is delayed due to rate limits.## What's New?### 🆕 Proactive Delay NotificationA new banner appears on both the
Workflow List Page
and
Contact Enrollment Page
whenever rate limits are causing delays.### 👀 Clear Visibility Until ExecutionThe banner remains visible until the last batch of delayed enrollments starts executing, so you always know the status of your contacts.
Image without caption
Image without caption
invoicing
improved
4 months ago

Invoices: Text formatting in Descriptions now live

# What's New?- Invoices now support text formatting in descriptions.- Formatting from estimates and product descriptions will now be preserved.- It's super easy to add bullet points, bold important details, etc.- The Invoice Preview can now display HTML descriptions with the proper formatting.## Why We Built ItUsers were experiencing difficulties when descriptions from products were imported without formatting, such as bullet points and other important details.
Image without caption
invoicing
new
4 months ago

Estimates: Activity Tracking to check the status is live!

# What's New?- You can now send out an estimate and view its entire history, from sent to edited, viewed, and signed, simply by clicking on "View History" in the options menu.## How to Use1. Open
Invoices & Estimates
and navigate to
Estimates
.2. Scroll to the dashboard on the line item of the estimate you want to check the status of.3. To view detailed logs, click on the three dots and select "View History."4. You will see all the actions that occurred on the estimate in the right drawer.## Why We Built ItThis feature will help users stay informed about the current status of their estimates on the go, enabling them to take action and close deals sooner.
Image without caption
Image without caption
e-commerce stores
new
4 months ago

Enhanced Interaction Effects for E-commerce Store Elements

# What’s New?We’re excited to introduce hover interaction effects that enhance the browsing experience for store visitors. With this update, visitors will receive clear visual cues when hovering over interactive elements, making navigation and interaction more intuitive.## Here’s what’s new:1.
Product Title Underline:
A subtle underline appears when hovering over product titles on product listing pages, featured products, and related products.2.
Interactive Buttons & Icons:
-
Buttons:
A lift effect is now applied when hovering, which can be configured through a border color change.-
Cart & Search Icons:
These icons will darken and lift slightly on hover for better visual feedback.3.
Product Image Zoom on Hover:
When hovering over a product image in product lists, featured products, or related products, a zoom effect enhances interactivity.## How to Use It:1. Open your
Store Builder
and navigate to the
Store Pages
.2. Hover over any
product title, navigation option, or button
to see the new effects in action.3. To enable the
lift effect on buttons
, save and publish all store pages containing buttons.## Key Points to Note:-
Saving and publishing pages post-update
is required for button lift effects to appear in preview mode.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
e-commerce stores
new
4 months ago

Default Sorting Option for Product List Page for E-commerce stores

# What’s New?We’re excited to introduce a Default Sorting feature for the Product List page in online stores! Store owners can now control how products are displayed by default, ensuring that customers see products in their preferred order when landing on collection or category pages.## Merchant Controls:1. A new
Default Sorting
dropdown is available under:-
Product List Page > Advanced Settings > Sort & Filter Options
.2. Store owners can choose from the following sorting options:-
Date: New to Old
-
Date: Old to New
-
Price: Low to High
-
Price: High to Low
-
Alphabetically: A-Z
-
Alphabetically: Z-A
## How to Use It?1. Navigate to
Store Builder
and edit the
Product List Page
.2. Go to
Advanced Settings > Sort & Filter Options
.3. Select a
Default Sorting option
from the dropdown.4. Save and publish the changes. The sorting preference will be applied automatically.## Key Points to Note:- If no sorting option is set by the merchant, a platform-wide default (currently
Date: New to Old
) will be used.
Image without caption
new
4 months ago

Enhanced Terms & Conditions for Compliance 🚀

# OverviewIn response to Twilio’s updated A2P requirements, we are enhancing the Terms & Conditions (T&C) element in our forms. This update aims to improve compliance, customization, and user experience when collecting consent for messaging.## What's New?
🆕 Two Separate T&Cs for Clearer Consent
-
Transactional Messages:
Users can explicitly opt in to receive notifications like appointment reminders, order confirmations, and account updates.-
Promotional Messages:
A separate opt-in for marketing messages, special offers, and product updates.-
Independent Opt-in:
Each consent option is presented with its own checkbox for transparency and flexibility.
✏️ Editable T&C Content
- Modify both the Transactional and Promotional T&C text directly in the form editor.- Customize terms to align with compliance needs and business requirements.
📱 Auto-Addition with Phone Element
- When adding the Phone element, both Transactional and Promotional T&Cs will be automatically included.- For standalone T&C additions, users can choose to display either one or both from the right-side panel.
📜 Submission Recording for Compliance
- Consent choices are recorded in the "Terms & Conditions" column in the submission table.-
Formatting:
- If both are selected: "Transactional; Promotional"- If only one is selected: "Transactional" or "Promotional"- If none are selected: The field remains empty.## 🎯 Why This Matters?- ✔ Ensures compliance with Twilio’s latest A2P messaging regulations.- ✔ Provides clearer, more flexible opt-in options for users.- ✔ Simplifies customization for businesses with unique consent needs.This update is automatically available when users create a new form or add the Phone element. 🎉
Image without caption
Image without caption
template library
new
4 months ago

Similar Templates for Faster Search in Template Library 🚀

Finding the right template is now quicker and easier with Similar Template suggestions!# Problem StatementFinding relevant templates required clicking back and forth, which slowed down the process.# What We DidWe now analyze the template you're viewing and display Similar Templates, making it easier to find the best fit quickly.# How to Use It- Go to the Template Library (Agency or Location).- Select a relevant template.- Scroll down to see Similar Templates.- Click
“See More”
to refine your search.- The library updates to show only similar templates.- Remove the filter to view all templates.This update ensures a faster, smoother template discovery!
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
4 months ago

Granular control over Sub-Account Transfer and Eject permissions in Roles & Permissions

# New Permissions## New Manage Sub-Account Transfer SectionAgency owners can now enable or disable permissions for Sub-Account Transfer and Sub-Account Eject for agency admins or users. This ensures better control over which users can transfer or eject sub-accounts.### How It Works- Navigate to
Roles and Permissions
on the teams page in agency settings.- Under
Sub-Account Transfers
, check or uncheck "View & manage sub-account transfers / eject" to grant or restrict access.- Permissions will be instantly updated for the selected users.This update enhances security and ensures that only authorized users can manage sub-account transfers and ejections.
Image without caption
new
4 months ago

All In One Chat Widget

# Streamline Customer CommunicationUnify Live Chat, Email Chat, and WhatsApp Chat into a single widget for a more efficient communication experience.## What’s New?-
Single Chat Widget:
Eliminate the need for multiple widgets by managing all interactions in one place.-
Channel Selector:
Easily toggle between Live, Email, or WhatsApp Chat based on availability and preferences.-
Consistent Look & Feel:
Apply a unified color scheme and customize the initial welcome message for a cohesive brand experience.## How It Works:
1. Create the Widget:
From the “Chat Widget” section, choose All-in-One Chat as your chat type.
2. Select Channels:
Decide which channels (Live, Email, WhatsApp) you want to enable.
3. Configure Settings:
Adjust the details for each channel under dedicated tabs. If you have an active WhatsApp number, it will automatically become available.
4. Engage with Visitors:
Users can switch channels using a Back button, and conversations remain active until manually ended or timed out.## Why It Matters:-
Saves Time:
Manage all chats from one interface without the hassle of juggling multiple widgets.-
Improves User Experience:
Offers visitors their preferred communication method all in one place.-
Enhances Collaboration:
Standardizes settings and simplifies configuration for your entire team.
Image without caption
Image without caption
reputation
new
improved
4 months ago

📢 New Feature: Multi-Channel Review Requests (SMS, Email & WhatsApp)

We’re excited to introduce Multi-Channel Review Requests, allowing businesses to request reviews via SMS, Email, and WhatsApp. This feature helps you reach customers on their preferred communication channels and maximize review collection!## What’s New?- ✅
Send Review Requests via Multiple Channels
– Choose SMS, Email, WhatsApp, or all three at once.- ✅
Easy Multi-Select Options
– A simple checkbox or dropdown lets you pick your preferred channels.- ✅
Customizable Messages
– Edit and personalize review request messages for each channel.- ✅
Pre-Built Templates
– Use ready-made templates or tweak them to match your brand voice.- ✅
Real-Time Tracking & Reporting
– Monitor request delivery, opens, and clicks for each channel.## Why This Matters?- 📈
Higher Review Collection Rate
– Reach customers where they’re most likely to respond.- 🎨
Personalized Engagement
– Tailor messages to each platform for a more effective approach.- 📊
Better Insights
– Track which channels drive the most reviews and optimize your strategy.Start leveraging Multi-Channel Review Requests today and boost your online reputation effortlessly! 🚀✨
prospecting
new
improved
4 months ago

🔎 Prospecting Tool - New Google Business Profile (GBP) Information in Marketing Audit Report 🚀

We’re excited to introduce a new GBP Section in the Marketing Audit Report, making it easier for businesses to verify whether their Google Business Profile (GBP) is claimed and if it contains all the relevant information.# What’s New?## Enhanced Report Data for GBPThe audit report now includes verified GBP details to provide deeper insights, including:- 📍
Business Address:
Ensures accurate location details.- 🌐
Website:
Confirms the presence of a linked business website.- 📸
Google Photos:
Displays images associated with the business on Google.- ⏰
Operational Hours:
Shows whether business hours are up-to-date.- 📞
Phone Number:
Ensures contact details are correctly listed.## Quick Access to GBP and Facebook ProfileA direct external link is now included, allowing businesses to seamlessly manage their GBP and Facebook with a single click.Start leveraging this feature today to improve prospect engagement and conversions! 🚀If you have any suggestions or feedback for the Prospecting Tool, please leave them on our Ideas Board or email us at
prospecting@lvlup.com
.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
prospecting
new
4 months ago

📢 Unresponded Reviews Section in Marketing Audit Report

# Unresponded Reviews Section in the Marketing Audit ReportWe’re excited to introduce the
Unresponded Reviews Section
in the Marketing Audit Report, designed to help agencies showcase valuable insights to potential clients. This feature highlights Google and Facebook reviews that haven't received a response, allowing agencies to demonstrate gaps in a business’s reputation management and position their services—
like Reviews AI
—as a solution.## What’s New?### ✅ Unresponded Reviews Highlight- The audit report now automatically detects unanswered Google and Facebook reviews.- Agencies can use this data to show businesses where they are missing engagement opportunities.## 🚀 Drive More Sales with Data-Backed Insights- Quickly identify unaddressed reviews and emphasize the importance of timely responses.- Help prospects understand how neglected reviews impact their brand perception and customer trust.- Offer solutions like Reviews AI or done-for-you reputation management services to help businesses stay on top of their reviews.## 🎯 Why This Matters for Agencies-
🎤 Stronger Sales Pitch
– Use real-time review insights to show businesses where they need help.-
💸 Demonstrate ROI
– Show how responding to reviews can increase customer engagement and improve online reputation.-
🔝 Upsell Review Management Services
– Position your agency’s offerings, such as automated review responses, AI-driven engagement, and reputation monitoring.With this update, agencies can deliver more compelling audit reports, drive conversations with prospects, and offer data-backed reputation management solutions. Start leveraging this feature to grow your agency today! 🚀
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
4 months ago

Documents & Contracts: Add PDFs on the go, to existing Documents & Templates

# What's New- Are you tired of starting from scratch just because you missed a PDF? Now, you can easily add PDFs to existing templates and documents without having to redo the entire file.## How to Use- Click the “+” symbol in the left pages panel to add a page and upload a PDF.- Use the top-right menu by selecting the three dots and choosing "Add PDFs."## Why We Built ThisWe created this feature to help you save time and avoid unnecessary rework. Enjoy a smoother, more efficient document creation process!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
funnels and websites
improved
fixed
4 months ago

Funnel Experience Optimizations & Smoother Transitions

# ✨ Enhancements## Seamless Funnel Step Transition-
Issue
: Transitions between funnel steps from the product edit screen were not smooth.-
Fix
: We improved the transition logic to ensure a seamless and consistent experience.## Optimized Funnel Step API Calls-
Issue
: Some API calls were running synchronously, which caused delays in loading times.-
Fix
: We optimized these calls to execute in parallel, enhancing speed and performance.# 🐞 Bug Fixes## Location Switch Glitch Resolved-
Issue
: Switching locations and then navigating between funnel steps triggered an unnecessary loading screen.-
Fix
: We fixed the logic to prevent the extra loading screen, ensuring a smoother workflow. ✅
dashboard
new
4 months ago

Sub Account Dashboard and Reporting: Quick Filters for Dashboards

# Quickly Analyze Your Data with Personalized Filters## What’s New?-
Quick Filters:
Dashboard owners can now add filters for all users to access without needing edit permissions.-
User-Specific Configurations:
Each user can save their own quick filter values, ensuring a personalized and efficient experience.## How It Works:
Adding Quick Filters:
1. Dashboard owners can add relevant filters from the new "Quick Filters" menu.2. Users can view and apply these filters without requiring edit access.
Using Quick Filters:
1. Easily apply filters to widgets on a dashboard to focus on what matters most.2. Filters are applied per data source, ensuring precise and relevant insights.## Why It Matters:- Empower everyone to gain valuable insights without the risk of accidental edits.- Save time with user-specific filter configurations for tailored analysis.- Improve collaboration by giving all team members access to impactful filters.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
ad manager
new
4 months ago

Ad Manager: Audience Summary

# 👀 What’s New?We’ve introduced the ability to view a detailed summary of all audiences within the LvlUp Ad Manager! Now, you can easily access key information about each audience, helping you better manage and optimize your ad targeting.# 👷 How It Works:There are two ways to view audience details:
A:
From the
Audience Tab in Ad Manager Settings
1. Navigate to the Audience tab in Ad Manager Settings.2. Click on the
ellipsis (⋮) > View
for any audience.3. A detailed summary will be displayed, providing insights into the audience's composition and relevant details.
B:
From the
Campaign Builder Flow
1. Go to the '
Intended Audience
' section within the campaign builder.2. Select 'Lookalike' or 'Retargeting' to view the respective list of lookalike and custom audiences.3. Click on the
eye icon
next to an audience to open a summary modal.# ⭐ Why it Matters:-
More Transparency:
Previously, users could create audiences but couldn't view their details. This update bridges that gap, offering better visibility and control.-
Simplified Troubleshooting:
If an error occurred during audience deletion, users previously had no way of knowing which audience was causing the issue. Now, with easy access to audience summaries and improved error messages, identifying and resolving such issues is much more seamless.-
Better Decision-Making:
With a clear understanding of each audience, you can refine your ad strategies, optimize targeting, and improve campaign performance.This update enhances the overall usability of the LvlUp Ad Manager, making it more intuitive and efficient.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
payments
new
4 months ago

Configure Stripe Payment Methods directly on GHL

# What's New?- Businesses can now configure Stripe payment methods directly on LvlUp instead of configuring them on Stripe's dashboard.- These payment methods can be enabled or disabled for multiple product areas, as listed below, in both live and test modes separately.- For existing customers, the default payment methods for product areas or checkouts will remain as per their existing configurations on Stripe.- Editing these payment methods on Stripe will be disabled going forward.- Only payment methods available within a checkout will be visible in that product area/checkout's list.- For subscription products, a separate list under a drop-down called 'Subscriptions' is available. If there is a subscription product in the checkout, this setting will overwrite the default settings of that checkout. Additionally, as per Stripe, this setting is only accessible after adding at least one subscription in live mode in that sub-account.## Product Areas/Checkouts Covered:- Invoices- Invoices with AutoPayments- Payment Links- Funnels - One-Step Order Form- Funnels - Two-Step Order Form- Forms- Ecommerce Stores- Calendars- Courses- Communities- Subscriptions## Where can you find these settings?Payments > Integrations > Stripe > Manage Payment Methods## Coming Up Next?Configuration of payment providers based on checkouts.## Visuals of the Flow:
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
4 months ago

Integration of Membership Courses with GoKollab

# What's New?## Make Courses Discoverable & Boost Engagement & Traffic with LvlUp's Thriving Community- Creators can now make their membership courses discoverable on the LvlUp Marketplace.- Creators can set an exclusive pricing model for listing courses on the LvlUp Marketplace.## New User Interface for Easy Access to All Courses Listed Under LvlUp- A dedicated page in LvlUp is now available for users to easily access or switch between courses.## How to List a Course on the LvlUp Marketplace1. Log in to your sub-account and navigate to
Membership
>>
LvlUp Marketplace
.2. Go to the courses tab and click on the
+ Add Course
button.3. From the dropdown list of existing courses, select the one you want to make discoverable.4. Choose the
pricing model
and set the subscription type, price, etc.5. Click on
Add Course
to make it discoverable.## How to Manage Discoverable Courses- In the same tab, owners can
select
or
unselect
multiple
courses
to list or unlist them from the LvlUp Marketplace.## How to View All Courses Users Have Enrolled In on LvlUp1. In the LvlUp Group Switcher, look for the new icon
My Courses
.2. Alternatively, navigate to
https://lvlup.com/courses/my-courses
to access all courses that users have enrolled in.
This release marks an important milestone in enabling creators to boost engagement and grow their community!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
reporting
fixed
improved
4 months ago

Sub Account Custom Reports : Improved Date Property Selection

# We've Made a Significant Improvement to Date Range Selection When Scheduling Report Emails!## What’s New?Previously, when scheduling a report email, you were required to select a global date range that applied to all widgets, even if some widgets had their own custom date settings. Now, you have more control over how date properties are handled in your reports! 🎯-
New Option Added:
Use Widget-Level Date Settings## How It Works:- If
enabled
, widgets with custom date ranges and comparisons will retain those settings in the emailed report.- If
disabled
, all widgets will follow the global report date range selected during scheduling.## Why it Matters:Many users requested this improvement because the previous setup overrode widget-level date settings, leading to inconsistencies in scheduled reports. With this update, you can ensure that your reports reflect the exact date ranges you configured for each widget, providing greater flexibility and accuracy.
Image without caption
site analytics
new
4 months ago

Traffic by Device Type in Sites Analytics!

# We’re Introducing Traffic by Device TypeWe are excited to announce a new feature in the Sites Analytics dashboard: Traffic by Device Type. This feature provides a clear breakdown of your visitors based on device category—mobile, desktop, or tablet.This update adds an interactive pie chart in the Page Views section for both Funnels and Websites, helping you better understand and optimize for your audience’s preferred devices.## 📊 What’s New?
🔹 Interactive Device Breakdown
- Instantly see how much traffic comes from mobile, desktop, and tablet users.- Hover and click for real-time insights on each device type.- Spot trends at a glance to optimize your site across different screen sizes.
🎯 Data-Driven Optimization
- Understand user behavior—Are most visitors on mobile? It’s time to optimize.- Track changes over time to stay ahead of shifting device trends.- Improve marketing and user experience by tailoring content to match device preferences.## 🛠️ How to Use It1. Log into your account → Go to Sites → Click on Analytics.2. Use the dropdown to select Funnels, Websites, or both.3. Choose a date range (7 days, 30 days, or custom).4. Scroll to "Traffic by Device Type" and explore the interactive pie chart.## 💡 Why You’ll Love It- Clear and visual—no complex reports, just an easy-to-read pie chart.- Better targeting—adjust content, ads, and user interface based on actual device data.- Detect anomalies—spot unusual spikes in device usage and investigate.This feature makes it easier than ever to make informed, data-driven decisions. Try it out now and optimize your site for every visitor.
Image without caption
memberships
new
4 months ago

Drip Dates & Library Sorting

# 📅 Drip Dates Support in CoursesWe’ve enhanced the drip scheduling feature to offer more flexibility in structuring learning materials! Previously, content was released based on the number of days after enrollment. Now, you can set specific release dates for your course content.## What’s New?-
Fixed Drip Dates:
Set exact release dates for lessons or modules, ensuring all learners access content at the same time, regardless of enrollment date.-
Ideal for:
Live classes, cohort-based learning, and courses aligned with external events.-
Improved Learning Flow:
Gain more control over content delivery and better alignment with structured learning programs.# 📂 Library SortingFinding your courses just got easier! We’ve added a sorting option to the course library page, allowing you to quickly organize and locate your products more efficiently.- Filter and sort your courses with ease.- Improved navigation for a better user experience.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
new
4 months ago

Custom Value Error Warnings in Email Templates

# What’s New?We now show warnings for custom value errors in email templates. When an error is detected, a warning will appear at the top, and clicking on it will take you straight to the problem area.## Why We Did ThisCustom value errors can cause emails to fail or not be delivered. This feature helps you quickly find and fix errors to avoid delivery issues.## How to Check1. Go to Marketing → Emails → Templates.2. Add a Text Element with a custom value.3. Introduce a small syntax error.4. A warning will appear at the top when you click Save — click it to go directly to the error.This feature helps ensure your emails are error-free and delivered successfully.
Image without caption
Image without caption
prospecting
new
improved
4 months ago

Prospecting Tool - Share Marketing Audit Reports via Email & SMS within Sub-Accounts 🔍

We’re thrilled to introduce the new Communication feature! Users can now send audit reports to prospects via Email and SMS, directly from the Prospecting Tool.## 🔥 What's New?- Seamlessly share reports through Email or SMS directly from the Prospecting Tool.- Option to select an existing contact or create a new one before sending.- Choose from predefined templates or customize messages before sending reports.- Receive a notification once the report is sent.- Easily follow up with prospects through the Conversations tab.- Alternative option to share the report link instead of direct messaging.## 🚀 How to Get Started?1. Navigate to
Marketing -> Prospecting Dashboard
inside Sub-Accounts.2. Click the
Share Report
button.3. Select either
Email
or
SMS
mode.4. Search for the contact by name, phone, email, or business name to whom you want to send the report.5. If the contact is not found in the search, click
Add Contact
to add them directly from within the Prospecting Tool.6. A predefined Email and SMS template is available, with customizable subject and message body.7. Validate all the details before sending.8. You can continue the follow-up in the
Conversations
tab.
Note:
This feature is only specific to sub-accounts.Start leveraging this feature today to improve prospect engagement and conversions! 🚀 If you have any suggestions or feedback for the Prospecting Tool, please leave them in our Ideas Board or email us at
prospecting@lvlup.com
.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
certificates
new
4 months ago

Export Issued Certificates data as CSV

# What's New?- We have introduced the ability to export issued certificates data as a CSV file.- Users can specify a date range before exporting to retrieve only the data they need.- If the number of certificates is fewer than 500, the CSV file will be available for immediate download.- If the export includes more than 500 certificates, users will receive an email with a link to download the CSV once the export is complete.- CSV download links will remain active for 24 hours.## How to Export Issued Certificates Data as a CSV File1.
Navigate to the Issued Certificates Section
- Go to
Certificate Builder
>
Issued Certificates
.2.
Select the Date Range
- Use the date filter to specify the range for the certificate data you want to export.3.
Click on "Export Data"
- Locate the
Export Data
button next to the
search Title field
.4.
Download and Open the CSV File
- The system will generate a structured CSV file containing:
Contact Name, Email, Phone, Certificate ID, Issue Date, Expiry Date, and Certificate URL
.This streamlined export process ensures easy access to certificate data, allowing for efficient record management.
Image without caption
Image without caption
communities
new
improved
4 months ago

Read-only/Announcement Channel and Notification Enhancements for communities

# OverviewWe are excited to introduce the Announcement Channel feature in communities! This feature allows community admins and owners to create a dedicated channel for sharing critical updates, ensuring important information is communicated effectively and not lost in general discussions.## Key Features1.
Dedicated Announcement Channel
- Admins can now create an "Announcement Channel" within their community.-
Only owners/admins can post and comment in this channel.
- The channel is specifically designed for official updates and important information.-
Pinned Posts:
Admins can pin key announcements at the top of the channel for better visibility.- All read-only/announcement channels can be converted back to normal channels, allowing group members to post again.- Announcement Channels can be either public or private, enabling admins to control visibility and access.2.
Role-Based Access Control
- Only community admins and owners can post in the Announcement Channel.- Regular members have read-only access to view important updates but cannot post or edit content.## How to Use-
Creating an Announcement Channel
- Navigate to Channel Management Settings.- Select the option to create a new Announcement Channel or enable it for an existing channel.- The channel will be labeled and configured as an Announcement Channel.-
Posting in the Announcement Channel
- Only admins can post updates.- Regular members will see a read-only interface.## Business Value- Improves communication efficiency by centralizing critical updates.- Increases visibility and engagement with important announcements.- Enhances platform value by providing a structured communication tool for community admins.## Notification Enhancement- Added notification for level upgrades (In-App and Push).- Added notification for level-based unlock courses (In-App, Email, and Push).- Added notification for time-based unlock courses (In-App, Email, and Push).
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
new
4 months ago

Resend Campaigns Just Got Smarter!

Managing resends is now easier, more flexible, and more effective than ever.# What’s New?-
Pre-configure Resends
: Set up unopened email resends directly from the send or schedule screen.-
Better Visibility
: Resend campaigns now appear as “Waiting” in the campaign list.-
More Control
: Adjust the resend duration or cancel before it is sent.# Why It Matters-
Boost Engagement
: Reach more people by automatically resending unopened emails.-
Plan Ahead
: Schedule resends in advance instead of doing it manually later.# How to Use It1. Create a Campaign.2. Click “Send” or “Schedule”.3.
Enable Resend Settings
: Set the resend duration and subject line.4. Send the Campaign: The resend is now scheduled with a “Waiting” status.5.
Modify or Cancel
: Click the three dots to adjust or cancel if needed.This update makes resending emails smarter, simpler, and more efficient.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
phone system
improved
fixed
4 months ago

Dialer Improvements and Bug fixes

# Changelog - 4th March 2025## ✨ Enhancements:- The Dialer now supports searching by the friendly name of a phone number. Previously, searches could only be conducted using the phone number itself.## 🐞 Bug Fixes:- The new Dialer was unable to call secondary phone numbers associated with a contact. This issue has now been resolved, and you can call any phone number linked to a contact.- When a user with an assigned phone number attempted to make a call using the new Dialer, the call should default to their assigned phone number. This was not functioning correctly in some cases, but it has now been fixed. Therefore, calls from a user with an assigned phone number will now use their designated phone number by default.
Image without caption
Image without caption
security
users & permissions
new
improved
4 months ago

Permissions Update : User Management

# What’s NewWe’ve introduced a dedicated permission for User Management, replacing the existing Team Management settings found under Account Settings. This update includes controls over user creation permissions, ensuring greater flexibility.## New Permission Settings:-
View and Manage Users:
Allows users to create, edit, and delete user accounts.-
View Users:
Grants view-only access to the user list.- If both permissions are disabled, the Team and MyStaff sections will be hidden from the side navigation bar.## Why It Matters:-
More Granular Control:
Previously, there was no way to restrict user creation permissions. Now, administrators can define who has the ability to manage users and who can only view them.-
Improved User Experience:
Enhanced error messaging ensures users clearly understand why they cannot perform certain actions, reducing confusion. Additionally, the separate User Management permission makes it easier to understand and relate to.## Preview:
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
email system
improved
4 months ago

Buy Dedicated IP Now Available for Agency & Sub-Accounts with New Eligibility Criteria!

# We've Updated the Buy Dedicated IP Option to Make It More Accessible!
Previous Eligibility Criteria:
- Sub-account contact count: 100K- Emails sent in the last 30 days: 200K
New Eligibility Criteria:
- Contact count: 10K OR- Emails sent in the last 10 days: 50KWith this update, agencies and sub-accounts that meet either of these conditions can now purchase a dedicated IP. This change ensures greater flexibility while maintaining high deliverability and reputation control.
opportunities and pipelines
new
4 months ago

Expanded Opportunity Values

# What's New?## Expanded Opportunity Values:### New Fields Added:-
Days Since Last Stage Change Date:
Quickly assess how long an opportunity has been in its current stage.-
Days Since Last Status Change Date:
Monitor the freshness of opportunity status for timely follow-ups.-
Days Since Last Updated:
Track recent interactions or updates.-
Next Task Due Date:
Visualize upcoming tasks to manage deadlines efficiently.-
Days Till Next Task Due Date:
Calculate the time remaining until the next scheduled task.-
Days Till Next Appointment Date:
Anticipate upcoming appointments to ensure timely engagements.These metrics empower users to identify bottlenecks and maintain a proactive approach to managing opportunities.## Improved Sorting and Exporting Functionality:### Enhanced Data Analysis:The sorting and export features have been extended to include:- Days Since Last Stage Change Date- Days Since Last Status Change Date- Days Since Last UpdatedThis enables robust data manipulation and easier integration with external reporting tools for detailed performance analysis.### User Interface Update:
Folder Renaming:
The "Contact Details" folder has been renamed to "Primary Contact Details" to clarify its contents and help users quickly locate the most relevant contact information.These updates collectively improve the visibility, analysis, and management of opportunities, making it easier for users to track and optimize their sales pipeline.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
new
improved
4 months ago

Custom Value Support for Media & Layouts 📣

# What’s New?We have added custom value support in the URL tab for the following elements:- Video- Image- Logo- Image Slider- Background images in layouts## Benefits-
Easy Customization
: Use dynamic values for seamless media updates.-
Uniformity
: Maintain consistency across elements effortlessly.## How to Use It1. Navigate to the supported elements.2. Click on the "Add Custom Value" icon.3. Choose the value and add it.4. Changes should reflect in the builder.Try it now for a more flexible design experience! 🚀
Image without caption
Image without caption
payments
invoicing
new
4 months ago

Invoices & Estimates: Opportunity custom value support in Terms & Notes

# What’s New?## Opportunity Custom Values in Invoices & EstimatesYou can now directly pull Opportunity Custom Values into the "Terms & Notes" section of your invoice and estimate templates.## Auto-Populated FieldsWhen you send an invoice or estimate—whether from a workflow or from the Opportunity screen—fields will automatically update with the latest opportunity data.## How to Use### 1. Using Opportunity Fields- Navigate to Opportunity Details to find your desired field.- Insert the field in double braces (e.g., {{opportunity.assigned_to}}).- Send the Invoice or Estimate (if the origin is from the Opportunity card).### 2. Create Invoice/Estimate from an Opportunity Card- Go to Opportunities → Select an Opportunity → Payments → Create Invoice/Estimate.- Navigate to "Terms & Notes" to insert your opportunity fields (e.g., {{opportunity.xyz}}).- Click Send.### 3. Create a Template & Trigger from a Workflow- Go to Payments → Invoices & Estimates → Templates → New Template.- Navigate to "Terms & Notes" to insert your opportunity fields (e.g., {{opportunity.xyz}}).- Click Save.- Choose the appropriate opportunity trigger in your workflow (e.g., Pipeline stage change, Opportunity status change, etc.).- Add a Send Estimate/Invoice action.- Select the template you created with the opportunity fields.## ExampleSuppose you have a custom field named "tshirt." Your template includes {{opportunity.tshirt}} in the Terms and Notes. When you change the pipeline stage, the invoice or estimate is automatically sent with the correct T-shirt size or details populated.## Why We Built It-
Automation:
Reduce manual data entry by auto-filling invoices and estimates with live opportunity details in the Terms section.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
affiliate manager
new
4 months ago

Sub Account Affiliate Manager : Delete Commissions

Managing your affiliate program is now more flexible! Admins can delete commissions under any affiliate, ensuring cleaner records and better control over payouts.# 👀 What’s New?-
Delete Commission Option
: A new delete action is available in the Commission tab under the affiliate’s profile.-
Status-Based Deletion
: Only commissions marked as Denied can be deleted, preventing the accidental removal of active payouts.-
Commission Status Visibility
: A new field displays the commission's current status (Denied, Approved, Pending, etc.) for better tracking.# 👷 How It Works:1. Open the Affiliate Profile.2. Navigate to the Commission tab.3. Click the three-dot menu next to a commission.4. If needed, change the status to Denied.5. Click Delete to permanently remove the commission.# ⭐ Why It Matters:-
Better Data Accuracy
: Remove commissions that were incorrectly added or are no longer valid.-
More Admin Control
: Maintain cleaner records by managing outdated or invalid commissions.-
Error Correction
: If commissions were mistakenly assigned, admins can now resolve the issue directly.⚠️
Important
:- Only Denied commissions can be deleted.- This action is irreversible – once deleted, the commission cannot be recovered.
Image without caption
Image without caption
invoicing
new
4 months ago

Invoices: Editing of Payment Schedules & Partially Paid Invoices

# What’s New## Invoice Details- Change the invoice due date, name, terms, and notes.## Product Management- Add or remove products as needed.## Amount & Business Updates- Edit the invoice amount and update business details.## Payment Schedule- Modify payment schedules, including due dates and amounts.---## How to Use:1. Open the partially paid invoice you wish to modify.2. Click on the 'Edit' option for the specific section (invoice details, products, business info, or payment plans).3. Make the necessary changes and save—the updates will reflect immediately.---## Why We Built It:-
Flexibility for Changing Customer Requirements:
When a customer requests adjustments after a partial payment, you can quickly update details without reissuing the invoice.-
Adaptable to Dynamic Business Needs:
Whether it’s adding a new product or modifying payment plans based on changes in a project, you can now do it.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
automations
whatsapp
new
4 months ago

Enhanced WhatsApp Customer Service Window Check

# OverviewWe have enhanced the WhatsApp Customer Service Window Check feature, providing businesses with greater control and flexibility when managing customer interactions. Previously, workflows could only verify the service window status using the default WhatsApp number assigned to a location. With this update, users can now select from multiple connected WhatsApp phone numbers, ensuring more precise workflow execution and improved customer engagement.## Key Enhancements-
Phone Number Selection:
Users can now choose from all connected WhatsApp phone numbers within a location.-
Real-Time Status Validation:
Only numbers with an "ACTIVE" status will appear in the selection dropdown, ensuring error-free execution.-
Improved Workflow Accuracy:
Service window validation is no longer restricted to the default number, allowing businesses to efficiently manage multiple WhatsApp interactions.## Benefits of This UpdateWith this enhancement, businesses can now:- Increase workflow precision by validating service windows for specific phone numbers.- Enhance customer support efficiency by directing interactions to the appropriate WhatsApp number.- Minimize errors and inconsistencies caused by limitations of the default phone number selection.This update is now available, enabling businesses to optimize their WhatsApp automation and ensure seamless communication management.This improvement is now live and ready to use within your workflows!
Image without caption
Image without caption
forms
surveys
new
improved
4 months ago

Address Autocomplete & Mandatory Search Bar Update - Forms and Surveys!

# ✨ What’s New## Auto-Complete Address Behavior- When the Auto-Complete Address feature is enabled, the selected address will automatically populate all relevant fields, including Street, City, Zip Code, State, and Country.## Mandatory Search Bar- When enabled, users must select a valid address from the autocomplete suggestions before proceeding.- When disabled, users can manually enter an address without having to select from the autocomplete list.# 🔧 Improvements- Experience faster and more accurate address entry with auto-filled fields.- Minimize errors by ensuring that a valid address is selected.- Customizable settings allow users to enable or disable these features as needed.This update streamlines the address input process, making it faster, easier, and more accurate! 🚀
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
funnels and websites
new
4 months ago

Prebuilt Mega Menu templates in Funnels & Website!

# 🆕 What’s New?We are excited to introduce Prebuilt Mega Menu Headers! Now you can add structured and professional mega menus to your funnels and websites without the hassle of building them from scratch.## ⚙️ How to Use It?1. Go to Sites and open the funnel or website where you want to add the mega menu.2. Click on "Add Elements" in the top-right corner.3. Select "Prebuilt Sections" and choose a design.4. Customize it as needed and publish!## 🔑 Key Highlights-
Ready-to-Use Designs
: Choose from a variety of prebuilt mega menu templates for quick and effortless setup—no need to start from scratch!-
Seamless Navigation
: Enhance user experience with clear, structured menus.-
Fully Customizable
: Modify text, colors, images, and layout to match your brand.
Image without caption
Image without caption
whatsapp
new
4 months ago

Enhanced WhatsApp Outbound Messaging – Flexible From Number Selection

# OverviewWe’ve enhanced the WhatsApp outbound messaging workflow by adding a "From Number" selection dropdown, giving businesses more control over which WhatsApp number is used for outbound communication. Previously, messages could only be sent from the default WhatsApp phone number assigned to a location. With this update, users can select from any connected WhatsApp number, allowing for more customized, targeted, and organized communication.## Key Enhancements-
Flexible Number Selection
: Users can now choose any connected WhatsApp number when sending outbound messages, ensuring better organization and communication flow.-
Real-Time Status Validation
: Only phone numbers with a “CONNECTED” status will be available for selection, ensuring messages are sent from an active and valid number.-
Greater Messaging Control
: Businesses can select the most relevant WhatsApp number for different conversations, optimizing customer engagement and efficiency.## Why This MattersThis update provides businesses with:1. More precise communication by allowing messages to be sent from the appropriate WhatsApp number.2. Greater flexibility in managing multiple WhatsApp numbers within workflows.3. Stronger brand consistency and engagement by ensuring customer interactions originate from the most relevant business number.This improvement is now live, allowing businesses to take full control of their WhatsApp outbound messaging strategy and enhance customer interactions with greater accuracy and efficiency.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
phone system
fixed
improved
new
4 months ago

📢 Conference Call Billing Updates

Effective February 28, 2025, we have made two key improvements to how conference calls are billed:# 1. Per-Call Billing- Billing will now occur immediately after each call, rather than being processed in bulk for multiple calls.- This change makes it easier to track and understand your charges.# 2. Bug Fix: Accurate Regional Pricing- Previously, due to a bug, all calls were charged using the default US region rate, even if a different region was used.- This issue has been corrected, and billing will now accurately reflect the actual conference region used.## 💰 Updated Regional Pricing (per participant per minute):- US: $0.0018- Dublin: $0.0025- Tokyo: $0.0030- Singapore: $0.0030- Sydney: $0.0030- São Paulo: $0.0040## 🔄 Re-billingThis change does not impact the markup assigned by the agency—it will continue to be applied as before.With this fix, customers will now be charged correctly based on the region where the conference was hosted. 🎯PS - This is in line with Twilio pricing.
Image without caption
Image without caption
snapshot
app marketplace
improved
4 months ago

App Marketplace - Discover apps by Business Niche

We are excited to announce enhancements that improve the app discovery experience on the App Marketplace.# What's New?## 1. Business Niche- App developers can now optionally assign up to three business niches for their apps. This configuration is not mandatory.- Users can filter apps based on business niche in the app marketplace.## 2. Multiple App Categories- An app can now be associated with up to three app categories.# Why Is This Important?- These enhancements enable the discoverability of apps that address specific business needs, such as apps with snapshots.- Many apps often span multiple related categories. By allowing developers to select up to three categories, we have increased users' chances of discovering the app they are looking for.
Image without caption
Image without caption
users & permissions
improved
4 months ago

Custom Menu Links - Exclude Accounts

We are excited to announce a small but important enhancement that simplifies the management of Custom Menu Links for sub-accounts.## What's New?- You can now choose to display Custom Menu Links to all but a few sub-accounts.## How Does This Work?- If you choose to display a Custom Menu Link to "All" accounts, you now have the option to select accounts to "Exclude."## Why Is This Important?- This simplifies the management of Custom Menu Links for agencies and SaaS entrepreneurs with a large clientele.
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
4 months ago

Enhanced User Permissions in Calendars

We are excited to introduce enhanced
user permissions
for the
Calendar
module, allowing for
greater control
over access and management of calendars, appointments, and groups. This update ensures that users only see and modify the data relevant to their roles.## Key Updates-
Granular Permissions:
Users can now be assigned distinct View and Manage permissions for Calendars, Appointments, and Groups.-
Assigned Data Access:
Users can be restricted to viewing only the appointments and calendars they are specifically assigned to.-
Independent Manage Permissions:
Users can be granted specific manage permissions for Appointments, Groups, or Calendars, allowing precise control over what they can create, edit, and delete.## Key Benefits- Improved
security
by restricting user access based on user permissions and assigned data.- Greater
flexibility
in managing user permissions to fit business needs.- Ensures a
streamlined
and efficient scheduling experience.These enhancements provide more control over calendar access and management, helping teams work more efficiently and securely.
Image without caption
Image without caption
funnels and websites
new
4 months ago

Multi CSS Unit support in Funnels and Websites Builder

# ✨ What Has Changed?## Dropdown-Based Unit SelectionUsers can now effortlessly choose CSS units such as px, %, em, rem, vh, and vw for styling properties.## Real-Time UpdatesSelected units are instantly applied to UI elements, enhancing workflow efficiency.## Enhanced User ExperienceSay goodbye to manual input! The intuitive interface streamlines styling with a seamless selection process.# 🔧 How to Use1.
Open Your Funnel or Website
Navigate to the project you are working on.2.
Select the Element to Style
Click on the section in your funnel or website that you want to modify.3.
Find the Styling Property
Locate the settings panel on the right side of the screen.4.
Click on the Input Field
Select the styling property you want to change.5.
Choose a CSS Unit
Use the dropdown next to the input field to select your desired unit.6.
See Real-Time Changes
The selected unit will be instantly applied to the element.7.
Adjust as Needed
Feel free to switch units at any time to experiment with different styles effortlessly.🚀 That’s it! You can now easily apply and modify CSS units for precise styling.
Image without caption
Image without caption
documents & contracts
new
4 months ago

Documents & Contracts: For multi-membered teams - Dynamic field assignment to sender from Templates

# What’s New?- We’ve introduced a new “Assign to Sender” option in Documents & Contracts templates.- When creating a template, you can now choose "Sender" instead of being required to select your name, which is the creator of the template.- When using the template, the crew member sending the document will automatically take over the signature fields.## How to Use?- In your template, select any field (e.g., Signature) that you want a crew member sending the document to sign.- Under Properties, choose "Sender" as the signer.- Click Save.- When any authorized crew member clicks "Use Template," they’ll be the Sender, and the signature fields will be assigned to them.
Note:
In Workflows, even if you assign a field to “Sender,” it will still be tied to the business user who created the document. This is because workflows are usually triggered by contacts and may not map to a specific sender.## Why We Built It?- Previously, each crew member had to manually reassign the signature fields of the business owner whenever they used a shared template.- This new feature saves time and avoids confusion by automatically assigning relevant fields to whichever user (sender) is sending the document.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
documents & contracts
new
fixed
4 months ago

Documents & Contracts: Retaining custom values when converting to Templates

# What’s New?- We’ve fixed the bug where custom values in fillable text blocks disappeared after converting a document to a template. Now, your custom entries remain intact!## How to Use- Insert your custom values into the fillable text fields.- Click "Convert to Template."Your fields and values will stay in place—no extra rework needed.---## Why We Built ItWe heard your feedback that losing data was frustrating. This fix ensures you can smoothly reuse documents without having to re-enter information every time.
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
4 months ago

Top Visits by Country Now Available in Sites Analytics!

# 🌟 What's New?We’re excited to introduce the
Top Visits by Country
feature in the Sites Analytics dashboard! This new addition includes an interactive heatmap, providing a visual representation of visitor distribution across different countries. Available in the Page Views section for both Funnels and Websites, this update offers essential insights into your global audience.## 🚀 Key Features & Benefits### Global Heatmap View- Instantly see which countries drive the most traffic to your site.- Identify trends and optimize your marketing strategies with country-level visit breakdowns.- Expand smarter by discovering high-growth regions.### Data-Driven Insights- View the top 10 countries bringing visitors to your Funnels and Websites.- Detect unusual spikes—whether it's organic growth or unexpected traffic surges, now you’ll know!- Optimize your localization efforts based on regions with high engagement.## 🔧 How to Get Started1. Log into your account → Sites section → Analytics tab.2. Use the dropdown to select either Funnels or Websites.3. Choose a date range (Last 7 days, 30 days, or custom).4. Scroll to "Top Visits by Country" and explore the interactive heatmap.## Additional Benefits-
Clear & Visual
– No overwhelming numbers, just an intuitive heatmap.-
Better Targeting
– Focus on high-traffic regions to boost engagement.-
Detect Anomalies
– Identify unexpected traffic surges and take action.## Upcoming Features- Cross-Device Analytics – Compare visitor behavior on mobile versus desktop.🚀 Head to your dashboard now!
client portal
new
improved
4 months ago

Client Portal - Temporary Magic Links

---# Temporary Magic Links## What’s New?We have enhanced security by reducing the risks of unauthorized access and link misuse, which helps to mitigate potential vulnerabilities associated with permanent magic links.## Key Enhancements-
15-minute time limit
for magic link expiration.-
90-day limit
for database deletion.-
Rate limit
for user-generated magic links set to 5-6 requests.- Users can request a magic link for themselves until
90 days
after their last login.- The secret token is
encrypted
, ensuring that login information remains secure.- It is
backward compatible
, so old magic links will continue to work until the user requests new ones.## Why it Matters:- Reduces security incidents related to the misuse of permanent magic links.- Improves platform security by minimizing the time an unauthorized user can access a link.- Decreases the likelihood of link theft and replay attacks.- Increases user trust by demonstrating our commitment to protecting their data.- Enhances compliance with modern security standards and best practices.---
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
media storage
new
4 months ago

Move Entire Folders Easily in Media Storage!

# 🆕 What’s New?Media Storage now supports moving entire folders of your media! You can relocate folders along with their contents—files and subfolders—without needing to recreate them manually. This feature makes it easier to organize your media in a logical structure.## ⚙️ How to Use It?Moving a folder is simple! Follow these steps:1.
Locate the Folder
– Find the folder you want to move in your Media Storage.2.
Click the Three Dots (⋮)
– Next to the folder name, click the menu icon to open options.3.
Select “Move to Folder”
– From the dropdown menu, click “Move to Folder” (highlighted in the screenshot).4.
Choose a Destination
– Select the existing folder where you want to move your chosen folder, or you can create a new folder too.5.
Confirm the Move
– Once selected, your folder and all its contents will be moved to the new location.That's it! Your folder is now organized exactly where you need it. 🚀
📝 Key Points to Note
✔ Everything Moves Together – Files and subfolders inside the directory will be moved automatically.✔ No Duplicates Needed – You don’t have to recreate folders or copy files manually.This update makes file organization effortless—enjoy a more structured and clutter-free Media Storage! 🚀
Image without caption
new
4 months ago

Clone Certificates

# What's New?- Users can now clone certificate templates from one location to another.- The cloning feature supports a maximum of 3 locations at one time.- All associated media files and images will be migrated while cloning the template.- All configurations and version history related to the templates will also be cloned.## How to Use It:1. Navigate to Memberships > Certificates.2. Click on the three dots (⋮) and select Clone.3. Edit the Template Name and choose the appropriate locations as needed.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
4 months ago

Certificates In Snapshot

# What's New?- Users can now attach certificate templates in the snapshot feature.- All media files within the template will also be migrated when the snapshot is loaded.- This improvement simplifies the process of migrating certificate templates in one go.- Intellectual property protection will also apply to certificates included in snapshots.## Why It Matters?-
Effortless Migration
: Move certificate templates in one go.-
Complete Transfer
: All media files are preserved.-
Time-Saving
: No manual rework is needed.
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
new
improved
4 months ago

Border Customization – Color, Radius & Thickness 🚀

Easily customize border color, thickness, and radius—globally or per edge.## What’s New?-
Color Control
– Choose any border color.-
Thickness Adjustment
– Set precise border width.-
Radius Customization
– Adjust corner roundness.-
Per-Edge Control
– Apply unique settings to each edge or set a global style.## Benefits:1. More design flexibility.2. Unique styling for different sections.## How to Use It:1. Edit a layout.2. Go to Border Settings.3. Adjust Color, Thickness, and Radius as needed.
Note:
By default, new templates will have zero spacing before and after text tags, while text elements will have a default padding of 12px.Create polished, customized borders effortlessly.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
new
4 months ago

Margin Edit Capability in Layouts & Text Tags

👀
Problem
: Users were unable to adjust margins between layouts or customize spacing for text tags (H1, H2, H3, H4, Paragraph).⚡
What’s New?Layout Margins
– You can now modify the margins between layouts.
Text Spacing Control
– Set before/after spacing for text tags.🚀
Benefits
:- Increased design flexibility- Enhanced typography control- Improved page consistency👷‍♂️
Where to Find It?Layout Margins
: Edit a layout and adjust margins in the settings.
Text Spacing
: Go to
Appearance → Typography Settings
, enable a text tag, set the spacing, and save.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
ad manager
new
4 months ago

Ad Manager: Snapshot support to google ads

# 👀 What’s New?- Google ad campaigns are now supported in Snapshots, in addition to the Meta campaigns already included in the asset list! This enhancement allows agencies to save time during onboarding and ensures seamless duplication of ad campaigns across multiple sub-accounts.- In the asset list, both Google and Meta ad campaigns are labeled as
"Ad Campaigns - Google"
and
"Ad Campaigns - Meta,"
respectively.# 👷 How It Works:1. Navigate to
'Account Snapshots'
in Agency View.2. Create a New Snapshot and choose the source sub-account.3. Save the snapshot.4. Go to
"Sub-Accounts"
and select the sub-account. Under the
'Basic Details'
tab of the sub-account, click on the top right
'Actions'
dropdown and select
Load Snapshot
.5. Select all the ad campaigns (both Google and Meta) you wish to load into the selected sub-account.6. Once a snapshot is successfully loaded into the desired sub-account, a notification will appear under the bell icon on the top right of the application, indicating that the selected snapshot asset has been successfully copied.# ⭐ Why it Matters:This feature streamlines the onboarding process for agencies, allowing them to easily replicate desired or high-performing Google ad campaigns across different accounts. With pre-configured ad campaign templates, agencies can ensure a consistent user experience and quickly provide basic ready-to-use ad campaign templates to their clients.
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
4 months ago

Simplified Google Calendar Connection with Google Descope

We’ve made it
easier
to
connect
your
Google Calendar
without requiring full Google account integration. Previously, users had to connect their entire Google account through the Integrations tab. Now, with
Google Descope
, you can connect only your Google Calendar directly from the
Calendar Connections
tab—just like Outlook and iCloud.## What's New?-
Seamless Google Calendar Connection
– No need to integrate your entire Google account; simply connect your calendar.-
Minimal Permissions
– We now request access only for Google Calendar and Google Meet, ensuring better security.-
Consistent Experience
– Aligns Google Calendar integration with other third-party calendars.-
Clear Communication in Integrations Tab
– We have added an update in the Integrations tab to inform users that Google Calendar setup has now moved to the Calendar Connections section.## How to Connect Your Google Calendar?1. Go to: Settings > Calendars >
Connections
> Add New2. Click on Google Calendar and select "
Connect
"3.
Authenticate
by choosing your Google account and granting access## Google Meet Integration- When you connect your Google Calendar, Google Meet is automatically enabled.- To generate Google Meet links for each appointment, make sure a Google Calendar is set as the
linked calendar.
- If no Google Calendar is linked, Google Meet links will not be generated.This update ensures a simpler, faster, and more secure way to connect Google Calendar while keeping your integrations streamlined.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
affiliate manager
new
4 months ago

Sub Account Affiliate Manager: Enable or Disable Customers

Managing your affiliate program just got more flexible! Admins can now enable or disable customers under any affiliate, allowing for better control over customer records and commission tracking.# 👀 What’s New?-
Disable a Customer:
This sets their status to "Disabled," meaning no further sales will be tracked, and they will no longer generate commissions. This feature is helpful for handling fraudulent signups or preventing commission assignments in specific cases.-
Enable a Customer:
If a previously disabled customer needs to be reinstated, they can be enabled again to resume normal tracking and commission assignments.# 👷 How It Works:1. Open the Affiliate Profile where the customer is listed.2. Navigate to the Customers tab.3. Click the three-dot menu next to the customer.4. Select Disable or Enable as required.# ⭐ Why it Matters:-
Better Program Management:
Keep your affiliate data clean and prevent unwanted commission tracking.-
Fraud Prevention & Compliance:
Disable customers linked to fraudulent activity or policy violations.-
Flexible Commission Handling:
Even when a customer is disabled, manual commissions can still be assigned when necessary.⚠️
Important:
Disabling the customer means they won't generate any commission in the future. However, you can still assign manual commissions for this customer.
Image without caption
wordpress hosting & reselling
new
improved
4 months ago

⚡Automatic WordPress Updates Management

Keeping your WordPress sites secure and up to date just got easier! You can now enable automatic updates for WordPress Core, Plugins, and Themes, reducing manual effort while enhancing security and performance.## What's New?### Core Update PreferencesControl automatic updates for WordPress Core under Advanced Settings, with options to:-
Off
– Disable automatic updates.-
Latest Version
– Always update to the newest WordPress release.-
Minor Version Only
– Restrict updates to minor versions only.### Plugin UpdatesManage automatic updates for individual plugins directly from the Auto Update Settings panel.### Theme UpdatesConfigure automatic updates for installed themes under their respective settings.## How to Access?1. Navigate to
Sites
→
WordPress Dashboard
.2. Select your
WordPress site
and go to
Advanced Settings
.3. Under
WordPress Management
, choose how you want to handle
core updates: Off / Latest Version / Minor Version
.4. For
Plugins & Themes
, go to
WordPress → Site → Plugins/Themes
and set
update preferences
individually.To know more about WordPress Hosting and how you can resell it to your clients, click
here
. Have some suggestions for WordPress Hosting? Simply post your ideas in our
Ideas Board
, and we will prioritize your suggestions!
This update brings more control, security, and efficiency to managing your WordPress sites. Try it out today! 🚀
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
voice ai
new
4 months ago

Snapshot for GHL Voice AI

# What’s New?We’ve introduced Snapshot for LvlUp Voice AI, allowing users to seamlessly replicate their Voice AI configurations across subaccounts. This enhancement builds on our existing snapshot functionality, making it easier than ever to scale and manage Voice AI setups efficiently.# How It Works-
Create a Snapshot
– Capture your Voice AI configurations, including agents, settings, workflows, and actions such as updating contact info and prompts.-
Transfer to Another Subaccount
– Apply the snapshot in any subaccount to instantly replicate the Voice AI setup.-
Maintain Key Components
– All essential Voice AI settings are preserved, ensuring consistency across accounts.# What’s Included-
Voice AI Agents & Settings
– All agent configurations except for the assigned phone number and post-call user notification settings.-
Prompts & Actions
– Ensures your AI interactions remain intact.-
Workflows & Triggers
– Automatically transfers workflows linked to the AI.-
Custom & Standard Fields Handling
– Ensures data consistency.-
Conflict Handling
– Provides options to overwrite or skip agents with existing configurations.# Why It Matters
Faster Deployment
– Set up Voice AI across subaccounts in minutes.
Consistency
– Maintain uniform AI behavior and performance.
Simplified Management
– Reduce manual configuration efforts.
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
4 months ago

Track Top Email Campaigns by Click & Open Rate!

# What’s New?You can now view the top 5 email campaigns based on click rate and open rate, in addition to revenue.## Why It Matters- Gain a clearer understanding of campaign engagement.- Optimize future emails for improved performance.- Make data-driven decisions using multiple key metrics.## How to Check- Navigate to
Email Marketing > Statistics
.- Apply filters to view top campaigns by Revenue, Click Rate, or Open Rate.
Note:
For SMTP, we do not track delivered counts. We recommend using click rate and revenue for performance analysis.
Image without caption
Image without caption
media storage
new
4 months ago

Trash functionality in Media Storage

# 🆕 What’s New?We have added a trash functionality to Media Storage, allowing you to enjoy a seamless file recovery experience. Deleted files are safely held in the Trash for 30 days, giving you a second chance to recover them.# ⚙️ How to Use It?1. In Media Storage, when you delete files, they are moved to the Trash instead of being permanently removed.2. Navigate to the Trash section within Media Storage by clicking on the three dots menu in the top right corner.3. Review the list of deleted files.4. Select a file and choose “Restore” to recover it, or “Delete Permanently” to free up space.# 📝 Key Points to Note- Files remain in the Trash for 30 days before being permanently removed.- Once emptied, recovery of these files is not possible.
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
4 months ago

"Other" Option Now Available in Forms & Surveys!

# 🆕 What’s New?Introducing the "Other" option in forms and surveys, which allows respondents to provide a custom answer.# 🔑 Key Highlights-
More Flexibility:
Users can now select “Other” and type in a response tailored to their specific input.-
Better Data Insights:
Custom responses are automatically captured and stored with all submissions.-
Effortless Tracking:
These responses are displayed alongside standard answers in your reports.# ⚙️ How to Use It?1.
Open Your Form/Survey:
Start by editing your form or survey.2.
Add the “Other” Option:
Click the button labeled “Add 'Other' option” next to your multiple-choice field.3.
Save Your Form:
Confirm your changes and save.4.
Collect Responses:
When users fill out the form, they’ll see “Other.” If they select it, they can simply type their own answer.# 📝 Key Points to NoteThis feature works with both checkboxes and radio button fields. Custom responses will appear in the submissions tab just like regular options. The update is live and ready to use—enhance your forms and surveys now!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
4 months ago

Integrate Stripe with Gokollab

# Integration of Stripe with LvlUp
Group owners on LvlUp
can now integrate Stripe with their accounts to seamlessly collect payments. This new feature allows them to
create and manage paid groups
within LvlUp. The payments integration page is
protected by a security code
authentication. Once entered, the code grants access to the page for one hour.## How to navigate it?1. Users can access the
payments icon
by clicking their profile picture and locating it
under their profile card
. Clicking the icon will open the payment integration page, where they can connect their account with Stripe.2. Group owners will also find the
payment integration option
under the Subscriptions tab
in the Group Settings.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
funnels and websites
new
4 months ago

Top Browsers and Top Client IPs in Sites analytics

# What's New?## 1. Top Browsers Breakdown 🌐- See the top 10 browsers your visitors use (Chrome fans, we see you! 🕶️).- Spot trends with usage percentages—optimize your site for what your audience loves!- No more guessing: Fix compatibility issues before they become problems.## 2. Client IP Tracking 📍- Discover the top 10 IP addresses visiting your site.- Spot unusual traffic patterns 🕵️‍♀️—is that a loyal user or a sneaky bot?# 🛠️ How to Get Started- Log into your account → Sites section → Analytics tab.- Use the dropdown to pick Funnels, Websites, or both!- Choose a date range (last week? last month? Your call 📅).- Scroll through the timeline to see browsers, IPs, and page views.# 💡 Why You’ll Love This1. Clear & Intuitive2. Smarter Decisions – Tweak your site for the browsers your audience actually uses.3. Spot Suspicious Activity – Is one IP refreshing your page 100 times a day? 🚩 Now you’ll know!# 🔮 Coming Soon…- 📍 Geolocation Heatmaps – See exactly where your visitors are connecting from.- 📱 Device Analytics – How many are mobile users vs. desktop loyalists? (Spoiler: It matters for your SEO!)
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
improved
4 months ago

Reputation Management - Personalise Your Recurring Emails with Custom Templates! ✨🎉

# What's NewWe're making it easier to personalize and automate your recurring emails in Reputation Management! Now, users can set different email templates for their recurring review request emails, ensuring every interaction feels more engaging and tailored to your audience.## 🔥 Key Highlights- Assign different email templates to your recurring communications for a more personalized experience.- Choose from a library of professionally designed templates for various scenarios, saving time and effort.- Customize templates to reflect your brand’s voice and messaging.- Ensure consistency and professionalism while automating your review requests.## 🌟 Key Benefits for Users-
More Personalized Communication
– Keep emails fresh and engaging by varying your messaging.-
Time-Saving
– Use pre-designed templates instead of crafting emails from scratch.-
Better Brand Consistency
– Ensure every email aligns with your tone and brand identity.-
Higher Engagement & Review Conversions
– A well-crafted email increases the chances of customers leaving reviews.## 🔑 How to Access Multiple Review Platform Integration1. Go to Reputation Management → Email Review Requests.2. Select "Maximum retries" and enable recurring review requests.3. Choose different email templates for each follow-up message.4. Customize the content to match your brand and audience.5. Save and activate your settings—your emails will now automatically send with the selected templates!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
4 months ago

Dialer Refresh (is now enabled for everyone)

# 🌟 A Breath of Fresh Air 🌟The new dialer is now your default option for making calls. If you encounter any issues and wish to revert to the old dialer, you can do so via Labs. Please report any problems to us through support or the Labs portal, and we will address them.## 📞 Transfer Incoming CallsPreviously, you could only transfer outgoing calls. Now, you can also transfer incoming calls.## ⏰ Save TimeDesigned to save you time, you can start dialing a number the moment you click on the dialer. As you dial, we automatically search your contacts for matches. Access your contacts and recent calls with just a tap.## 📝 Notes- Add notes after the call ends from the Recents screen.- The option to add notes during the call is coming soon!## 🏷️ Tags- Add tags to the contact after the call ends from the Recents screen.## 📱 Dialpad to Navigate IVREarlier, if your call was answered by an IVR (e.g., "Press 1 for X ..."), you couldn't navigate it because you didn't have access to the dialpad. Now you can!
This is now the default dialer!
If you experience any issues, you can revert to the old dialer.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
client portal
new
4 months ago

Smart Push Notification for Client Portal app (courses, communities

# OverviewWe’re excited to introduce the "Smart Push Notification" workflow action! This powerful new feature allows you to automate real-time push notifications for client portals, communities, and courses on both mobile and web apps—boosting engagement instantly.## How It Works-
Trigger:
Any Trigger (e.g., user joins a group, completes a course, etc.)-
Action:
Smart Push Notification (customizable message and link)-
Use Cases:
Notify users about updates, reminders, promotions, or important alerts## Example Notification-
Title:
New Message from Your Community-
Body:
"You have a new comment on your post! Tap to check it out."-
Redirection:
Communities## Help DocumentationFor more information, please refer to the help documentation.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
documents & contracts
new
4 months ago

Documents & Contracts: Custom URL Redirection

# What’s New?- Now, when a customer signs a document or completes a payment within your document, they can be redirected to a custom URL of your choice.- You can set this redirection globally for all Documents & Contracts or configure it for individual templates.- Choose how your link opens: in an existing tab or a new tab for a smoother client experience.## How to Use?### Global Settings1. Go to Payments → Documents & Contracts → Settings and open Document Settings.2. Enable the “Redirect to a Custom URL” toggle.3. Enter the desired URL and select how you want it to open.4. Click Save to apply globally (unless overridden at the template level).### Per-Document / Per-Template Settings1. When creating or editing a Document or Document template, click Settings at the top.2. Toggle on “Enable redirection to custom URL.”3. Enter your URL and choose where it opens.4. Save your Document or template. After the client signs (or pays), they’ll be sent to your custom link.## Why We Built ItThis feature immediately guides your clients to the next steps, such as a thank-you page, onboarding form, or scheduling link, after signing or making a payment from a document.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
integrations
improved
4 months ago

Integration - GBP Page selection enhancements

# OverviewThis release enhances the integration experience for the GBP (Google Business Profile) page, ensuring seamless navigation and selection of pages, even when managing a large number of pages across groups. The update introduces progressive pagination to handle high-volume page retrieval efficiently while improving the overall user experience.## Key Enhancements
Group & Page Selection:
- Users can now select a group and view all associated pages before proceeding with the integration.- If no groups are available, users can directly select pages without the group selection option being visible.
Improved Page Search & Navigation:
- A search functionality has been added to help users quickly locate specific pages, improving efficiency when dealing with multiple pages.
Review & Confirmation Screen:
- Before finalizing the connection, users can review all selected pages on a dedicated screen.
Bug Fixes & Performance Improvements:
- Implemented progressive pagination to prevent UI crashes when loading a large number of pages.- Optimized API calls for smoother and faster retrieval of GBP pages.These improvements aim to enhance usability, reduce errors, and streamline the page selection process, ensuring a more efficient GBP integration experience.## Preview ImagesStep 1: The user goes to the page selection window either by managing pages or initiating a new integration.Step 2: If the pages are grouped into multiple categories, the user gets an option to select a group. If the pages are not grouped, the group selection is hidden.Step 3: All selected pages across groups are shown below the selected pages heading, with pages where call tracking is enabled highlighted with a call icon.Step 4: The user is asked for confirmation to link to the selected pages.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
wordpress hosting & reselling
new
improved
4 months ago

🎉WordPress Hosting: More Storage & Unmetered Bandwidth for All Plans!

# 📣 Major Upgrade to Our WordPress Hosting Reselling ProductWe’re excited to announce a significant enhancement to our
WordPress Hosting Reselling Product
—
increased storage limits and unmetered bandwidth across all plans!
## What’s New? 🚀-
Standard Plan
– Now
12GB
storage for
1 site
(6x more than before!)-
Utility Plan
–
60GB
storage for
25 sites
-
Truly Unlimited Plan
–
500GB
storage for
unlimited sites
-
Unmetered Bandwidth
– No more worrying about data limits on any plan!This upgrade means
faster performance
,
greater flexibility
, and
more value
for your hosting business. 🎉## 🚀 Next Steps:No action is needed! These upgrades are automatically applied to all existing and new hosting plans.To learn more about WordPress Hosting and how you can resell it to your clients, please visit our help center. If you have suggestions for WordPress Hosting, simply post your ideas in our Ideas Board, and we will prioritize your suggestions!
Start selling with confidence, knowing your customers now have more room to grow!
🏆
Image without caption
Image without caption
payments
new
4 months ago

New Stripe payment methods enabled for UK, Australia, Malaysia and US

# What's New?Customers can now view and make their payments using additional payment methods from Stripe, increasing the global reach for LvlUp customers across the UK, Australia, and Malaysia.## BACS Direct Debit - UKLvlUp users in the UK can accept BACS Direct Debit from customers with a UK bank account. Businesses must collect a mandate that includes the customer’s sort code, account number, name, email, and address. Note: £0 transactions are not supported.## BECS Direct Debit - AustraliaLvlUp users in Australia can accept BECS Direct Debit payments from customers with an Australian bank account. Businesses must collect a mandate with the customer’s bank details and accept the mandate Service Agreement, which authorizes them to debit the account.## FPX - MalaysiaFinancial Process Exchange (FPX) is a Malaysia-based payment method that allows customers to complete transactions online using their bank credentials.## Cash App - USCash App is a popular consumer app in the US that allows customers to bank, invest, send, and receive money using their digital wallet.## GrabPay - MalaysiaGrabPay, developed by Grab, is a digital wallet that allows customers to make payments using their stored balance. It is widely used in Malaysia.## Zip - AustraliaZip allows customers in Australia to split their purchases into multiple payments. Those choosing Zip are redirected to its site to authorize the payment by accepting the terms of a payment plan.## What's Coming Next?Businesses will be able to enable or disable any available Stripe payment methods across different channels or product areas, such as forms, funnels, invoices, payment links, courses, communities, calendars, ecommerce stores, etc., directly on LvlUp.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
blogs
new
4 months ago

Add Featured Post to your Blog

We’re excited to announce the release of the Featured Post for Blog. Adding your featured hero post to blogs allows you to build more strategic content marketing to highlight trending topics and main themes.## Why Add a Featured Post to Your Blog?Adding a featured post serves several strategic purposes:1.
Highlight Important Content
– Ensure key posts (e.g., announcements, pillar content, popular articles) remain visible to readers.2.
Drive More Engagement
– Keep high-performing or cornerstone posts at the top, increasing visibility and interaction.3.
Improve SEO and Read Time
– If a pinned post is frequently visited, it can contribute to better rankings and user retention.4.
Promote Evergreen Content
– Keep timeless or frequently referenced posts easily accessible.## How Does the Featured Post Work?1. Navigate to
Sites > Blogs
.2. From the list view of Blog(s), select the blog name and click on it.3. Go to the view where you can edit the Blog Site.4. Add the element of
Featured Post
.5. Select the featured blog post.6. Choose the layout and select what you want to display in the blog's featured post.7. Publish the blog site.The Media Library has been upgraded for images and videos within Blogs.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
mobile app
social planner
email builder
funnels and websites
media storage
new
4 months ago

Automatic Hosting of Third-Party Images

# Summary of the ReleaseWe introduced a new way to handle images from third-party providers. When you choose an image from Unsplash or Pixabay, we create a copy on our servers. This means that if the original image is deleted or expires, you will still see the image in your funnel, blog, or email.## What’s New?-
Auto-Hosting
: The system now copies images from third-party sources to our own servers.-
My Media Integration
: We add images to your "My Media" only if you save them from the user interface by selecting "Add Image to My Media."-
Hidden Copies
: If you do not add an image to My Media, it remains hidden. This helps keep your media library organized.## BenefitsNo More Dead Images: Images will not break when the original source removes them. This enhances reliability across all areas where you use images.
e-commerce stores
new
4 months ago

Auto-Complete Address in checkout page for Ecommerce Stores

# What’s New?We’re making checkout smoother and faster than ever! Introducing the
Auto-Complete Address
feature for e-commerce checkout pages. 🎉 This powerful addition uses
Google-powered address suggestions
to help customers fill in their shipping details instantly—minimizing errors and reducing friction at checkout.And there’s more!✨ Agencies can
re-bill this feature at their own price
, unlocking a fresh revenue stream while enhancing the checkout experience.💰## Key Highlights-
Seamless Checkout Experience
– Customers receive real-time address suggestions as they type, ensuring quick and hassle-free order completion. When a user adds the address field, they will see multiple fields: Address, City, Country, State, and Postal Code.-
Compatible with All Checkout Flows
– Works perfectly on store checkout pages.-
Revenue Opportunity
– Agencies can set custom pricing and charge sub-accounts for enabling this feature.-
Error-Free Shipping
– Eliminates mistakes in address entry, ensuring accurate deliveries!
💰 Pricing Details
When Auto-Complete is enabled, charges apply:-
$0.002972 per search request
(as customers type).-
$0.00525 per API call
for address details.
📊 Enabling & Rebilling
Agencies can manage Auto-Complete settings and re-billing under
Agency Settings > Auto-Complete Address
. Sub-account settings are only available if Auto-Complete is enabled at the Agency level.## How to Use It?-
Enable in Checkout Settings:
Go to
Store > Checkout Page > Advanced Settings
and toggle on the
Auto-Complete Address option
.-
Sell It Your Way:
Agencies can
define their own pricing
for API costs and re-bill at a custom rate.## Key Points to Note- Powered by
Google’s trusted address database
for lightning-fast, accurate suggestions.- Agencies have
full control
over pricing—create and capture new value!
Image without caption
Image without caption
memberships
new
4 months ago

Community Groups In Course Preview

We're excited to announce new improvements that make managing your products (courses) even easier and faster:# Community Groups List in Product ViewYou can now view all the groups that a product is part of, all in one convenient tab.## New LvlUp TableThe Groups List comes with a new LvlUp table, featuring enhanced search and pagination for quicker navigation.## Community Group PreviewsPreview groups directly from the product page for a smoother, more intuitive experience.## Filtering OptionsFilter groups by Active or Inactive status for better visibility and easier management.
Image without caption
Image without caption
conversation ai
new
4 months ago

New Response Info for Conversation AI

# What's NewWe’ve enhanced the Response Info feature by introducing three key improvements:-
Agent Preview
: Users can now view the Agent Name in the AI Message Details for better tracking.-
Chat History Tab
: View previous conversations that were used to generate the AI response.-
Action Execution History
: Track all the actions that the AI triggered to generate its response, improving transparency and troubleshooting.## How It Works### Accessing AI Message Details1. Navigate to the Conversation View.2. Click on Response Info to open the AI Message Details panel.3. The panel displays the AI-generated response along with key details like the prompt, intent, and relevant data chunks.## New Details### Chat History Tab1. A new Chat History tab is now available in the AI Message Details panel.2. Clicking this tab reveals previous conversations considered when generating the AI response.3. Users can view only the relevant bot-user interactions used as context, ensuring clarity.### Action Execution History1. Below the Chat History section, an accordion-style dropdown displays Action Execution History.2. Users can expand this section to see all the actions that the AI triggered during response generation. Examples include Appointment Booking, Stop Bot, Update Contact Field, or Trigger a Workflow.3. The section includes:-
Action Description
: What action the AI attempted (e.g., retrieving appointment slots).-
Request Sent to AI
: The request sent to AI (e.g., "Getting slots on 14th October from 7 AM to 7 PM.").-
Response Generated by AI
: The final data returned by AI (e.g., "Slots fetched from the calendar.").These enhancements provide deeper visibility into how AI responses are generated, helping users verify data accuracy and improve AI interactions.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
funnels and websites
new
improved
4 months ago

Optional End Time for Dynamic Timer 🚀

You can now set a dynamic timer to end after a specific duration from when the email is opened or sent.👀
Problem Statement
:Users wanted more flexibility, as end time restrictions were tied to the timer’s duration.🚀
What We Did
:We made the end time optional for dynamic timers. Now, the timer will end exactly after the set duration from when the email is opened or sent.⚡
Example Use Cases
:- 2-hour discount from an abandoned cart email- 24-hour birthday discount after opening the birthday email👷‍♂️
How to Use
:1. Go to Countdown Timer2. Create a new timer3. Choose Dynamic4. Set the Duration and disable Set End Time
Note
: One dynamic timer works for a contact only once. It is advisable to clone the timer before reusing it in other templates.This update offers a more flexible, user-centric approach!
Image without caption
Image without caption
payments
forms
surveys
new
4 months ago

Manual Payments Now Available in Forms & Surveys! 🚀

# 🔥 What's New?
Manual Payment Support
for selling products through forms and surveys.## Two Payment Types Introduced:-
Cash on Delivery (COD)
-
Custom Payment Methods
(e.g., bank transfer, check, card, or other offline payments).## Order Tracking & Payment Management:- Manual payment orders now appear under
Payments > Orders
with a "Pending" payment status.- Businesses can mark orders as paid and select the payment mode (cash, card, bank transfer, etc.).-
Seamless Integration with Form Submissions:
- Payment status updates in Orders will automatically reflect in the Submissions section of the respective form/survey.## 🔧 How It Works:1.
Enable Manual Payments:
- Navigate to
Payments > Integrations > Manual Payment Methods
.- Enable COD or Custom Payment Methods.- Configure the description and post-purchase message for each payment type.- Ensure the option is enabled for forms and surveys.2.
Automatic Display in Forms & Surveys:
- When a product is added to a form/survey, the manual payment option will automatically appear in the payment selection.## Order Processing & Payment Collection:- Users submit a form with manual payment selected.- The order appears in
Payments > Orders
with a "Pending" status.- Businesses can mark orders as paid and specify the payment mode.- Payment status updates in Orders will sync with the Form Submissions section.## ⚠️ Notes:- Manual Payments are supported only for
selling products
.- Not available for recurring or subscription-based products and collecting specific amounts (e.g., donations).This update enhances flexibility for businesses while keeping payments organized!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
affiliate manager
new
4 months ago

Sub Account Affiliate Manager: Deleting a Customer

Managing your affiliate program just got easier! Users can now delete customers under any affiliate, giving you more control over customer records and affiliate data.# What’s New?- A new option to delete customer records under affiliates.# How It Works:1. Open the affiliate profile where the customer is listed.2. Navigate to the Customers tab.3. Click the three-dot menu next to the customer.4. Select "Delete" to remove them permanently.# Why it Matters:- Keep your customer records clean and up-to-date.- Correct errors when customers are incorrectly assigned to an affiliate.- Improve data accuracy for commission tracking and reporting.
Important:
Deleting a customer is permanent and cannot be undone. Proceed with caution!
Image without caption
Image without caption
memberships
new
4 months ago

Courses Data Retention & Auto-Deletion Update

We are introducing an automatic cleanup process to manage product data more efficiently when a location is deleted.# What’s Changing?When a location is deleted, all associated courses' data—including products, categories, posts, attached files, videos, audios, and course materials—will be automatically deleted after 60 days. This change ensures that outdated data does not persist indefinitely, improving system performance and aligning with data retention policies.# ReversibilityData deletion can be reversed only if the location is restored within 60 days through support. After the 60-day period, the courses' data will be permanently deleted and cannot be recovered.# Action RequiredIf a location was deleted by mistake, or if its associated products and data need to be retained, contact support before the 60-day deletion deadline. After 60 days, all related courses' data will be irreversibly removed from the system.# Why This Update?This update improves system efficiency, data management, and compliance with retention policies while still allowing a recovery period for accidental deletions.
communities
new
4 months ago

Advanced Course unlock options in communities

We are introducing a revamped course unlocking system that gives community admins more flexibility in how courses are accessed. Now, you can define access levels based on your community’s needs!## New Course Unlock Options-
All Members:
Open access for everyone.-
Level Unlock:
Members must reach a specific community leaderboard level to access.-
Buy Now:
Offer courses as one-time purchases or subscriptions for instant access.-
Time Unlock:
Courses become available after a set duration from the member’s joining date.## Here’s how you can set up course access:-
All Members:
Open access for everyone in the community.-
Level Unlock:
Members must reach a certain leaderboard level to access the course.-
Buy Now:
Offer courses with one-time payments or subscriptions.-
Time Unlock:
Courses become available after a predefined duration from the member’s joining date.
Image without caption
Image without caption
memberships
new
5 months ago

Create & Manage Offers from the Product Page

# Smarter Offer Management from the Product PageManaging offers is now more efficient, intuitive, and faster with the revamped Offers table.📌
All-in-One Offer View
– See all offers associated with a product in a single, streamlined table.⚡
Quick Offer Creation
– If no offers exist, a direct link allows for instant offer creation.🔍
Advanced Filtering
– Easily filter offers by Draft or Published status for better organization.📑
Offer Type Visibility
– A new column now indicates whether an offer is Free, Single Payment, or Recurring Payment.🔎
Search Functionality
– Quickly find specific offers by searching for offer names.🚀
Performance Boost with Module Federation
– Eliminates slow iframes, significantly enhancing table speed and user experience.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
app marketplace
integrations
security
api
new
5 months ago

App Marketplace | Introducing OAuth to integrate with third-party apps

# We are excited to announce the launch of OAuth as an external authentication mechanism in the App Marketplace.## What's New?-
OAuth for External Connections
: Sub-accounts can now connect with third-party apps using OAuth.-
Access Token Management
: Enjoy a stable connection and a great developer experience with seamless access token refresh, now managed by LvlUp in the background.-
Reconnect Option
: We have added an option to reconnect if the connection is broken for any reason, or if new scopes are added that require reauthorization.-
Improved User Experience
: The external authentication flow has been enhanced across all types of authentication. The authentication process is now automatically triggered immediately after installation.-
Distributed Connections for Bulk Installation
: When an agency user bulk installs an app across multiple sub-accounts, each sub-account can connect with the third-party app independently.## Why is this Release Important?-
Enables Growth of Integration Choices on Workflows
: This feature allows developers to build integrations with third-party apps via Workflow - Custom Actions/Triggers, thereby expanding integration choices for our customers.-
Improved Security
: OAuth is a preferred authentication method, offering both convenience and security compared to API Keys or Basic Auth.## What's Next?- The OAuth feature will be extended to Conversation Providers and Payment Providers, enabling more integration choices and a seamless integration experience for these two modules.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
phone system
improved
5 months ago

Toll Free Number Verification for SMS

# Toll Free Number Verification for SMSToll Free Numbers now require your business information to be verified in order to send SMS.In the
Subaccount Settings
>
Phone Numbers
>
Manage Numbers
, you will see a "Verification Required" icon. Clicking on that will take you to the verification flow.The new flow requires more information:1. The first screen asks for your
Business
and
Authorized Representative
information.2. The second screen requests your
Business Address
.3. The third and final screen asks for your
Messaging Use Case
.The above screenshot acknowledges that you have submitted an application.Back in the
Subaccount Settings
>
Phone Numbers
>
Manage Numbers
, you will see your verification status as "In Progress."Verification is usually completed within approximately
3 business days
, but it may sometimes take longer.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
integrations
new
improved
5 months ago

Facebook multi page support for sub-accounts

We are excited to announce that Facebook multi-page support is now out of Labs and enabled for all sub-accounts.# What's New?-
Leads Sync:
Automatically sync leads from Facebook Lead Ads across multiple pages with clear attribution to the source.-
Conversations:
Chat with customers across multiple Facebook pages using Facebook and Instagram chat integrations.-
Automation:
Create customized workflows to automate customer engagement across multiple Facebook pages.-
Reputation Management:
Manage reviews and responses for multiple Facebook pages.-
Mobile App:
The LvlUp mobile app now supports conversations across multiple Facebook pages.-
Conversation AI:
Conversation AI now supports auto-responses to messages across multiple Facebook pages.-
Troubleshooting & Error Alerts:
Added capabilities to highlight permission alerts and provide basic troubleshooting options.# Pre-requisitesTo access conversations for multiple pages on your mobile app, please update to the latest app version: v3.92.1.# Why is this Feature Important?This feature was one of the most requested integration features on Canny, with over 800 votes. It will enable customers across a variety of use cases, from small and medium-sized businesses managing multiple outlets to influencers managing multiple fan pages.# Bug Fixes-
3-Dot Menu:
Resolved the issue where the 3-dot menu was not clickable for some sub-accounts.# Preview Images- Updated Facebook card with Manage Pages and Settings options to select and update connected pages & enable messaging.- 3-dot menu with Troubleshoot & Disconnect options.- Enable and disable Instagram/Facebook Messenger within the settings modal.- Update selected page in the Manage Pages modal.- Access troubleshooting to find missing permissions and manually sync leads.- Capability to create triggers based on specific pages.- Option to select a specific page in conversations.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
affiliate manager
new
5 months ago

Edit AI Employee Affiliate Code

# What's New?We have introduced an option to edit the Affiliate Code on the LvlUp Employee Affiliate Code screen. This allows users to modify their affiliate code 90 days after applying it. Previously, users were unable to edit the code once it was applied, but now you have the flexibility to make changes after the 90-day period.## How It Works- Users can now edit their affiliate code if 90 days have passed since it was applied.- If the
AICompanyPlan → affiliateCodeAppliedAt
field is available, the 90-day period will be calculated from this date.- If this field is unavailable, the system will default to January 1, 2025, as the reference date.- This update provides greater flexibility in managing and updating affiliate codes.
Image without caption
communities
new
improved
fixed
5 months ago

Communities - Enhancements for email preferences

# OverviewHey there! We've got some exciting updates in this release to make the communities platform more stable:## Enhancements:- 14 new email preferences are now available for communities.- Group Membership Status Email- New Member Request- Declined/Removed by Admin- Added to Private Channel- General Group Emails- New Comment Reply- Content Reported- Role Changes- Group Ownership Changed- Subscription/Payment Status Email- Post and Comment tagging emails now include a preview of the comment/post.- The default email template now shows which custom value is used where in the preview.- PayPal as a payment method is now independently supported.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
automations
forms
surveys
quizzes
new
5 months ago

T&C Filter for Forms, Surveys & Quizzes in Workflows

# T&C Filter for WorkflowsWe’ve introduced a new feature in workflows: the T&C Filter. This allows accounts to filter users based on whether they have agreed to the Terms and Conditions (T&C). This enhancement helps streamline user targeting and ensures that workflow steps comply with requirements.## How It Works### 1. Adding the T&C Filter to Your Workflow- Navigate to the Workflows section.- Select the workflow you want to modify or create a new one.- Choose a workflow trigger such as ‘Form Submitted’ or ‘Quiz Submitted’.- Click on "Add Filters".- Select the T&C Filter option.### 2. Configuring the Filter-
Condition Options:
You can filter users based on whether they have agreed to the T&Cs or have not agreed.- Apply the filter to the relevant step in your workflow.### 3. Save and Test- Save your workflow changes.- Run a test to verify that the filter works as expected.## Feature Benefits-
Improved User Segmentation:
Filter users based on their T&C agreement status.-
Enhanced Compliance:
Ensure that only users who have agreed to specific terms and conditions can proceed in workflows.-
Customizable Workflow Paths:
Create targeted user journeys by setting conditions for users who have agreed or not agreed to the T&C.
Image without caption
Image without caption
wordpress hosting & reselling
improved
5 months ago

📢 HighLevel WordPress Hosting: Extended Backup Retention! 🚀

# 🎉 What's New?We’ve doubled the backup retention period for WordPress sites on LvlUp Hosting! You can now access backups from the last 30 days, an increase from the previous 14-day limit. This enhancement provides greater flexibility, security, and peace of mind for agencies and their clients.## 🔑 Key Enhancements- ✅
30-Day Backup Retention
– Recover site data from a longer history.- ✅
More Flexibility
– Roll back changes easily, whether due to updates or unexpected issues.- ✅
Improved Reliability
– Ensures your sites remain secure with extended backup availability.## 🚀 How to Access1. Navigate to
Sites -> WordPress
and land on the Hosting Dashboard in LvlUp.2. Select your
WordPress Site
and go to the
Backups tab
.3. Choose a backup from the past 30 days to restore your site if needed.This upgrade makes LvlUp WordPress Hosting even more resilient and user-friendly! Try it out and let us know your feedback. 💪 🔄If you want to learn more about WordPress Hosting and how you can resell it to your clients, feel free to reach out. Have suggestions for WordPress Hosting? Please share your ideas, and we will prioritize them!
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
5 months ago

Additional Language Support for the Booking Widget

We’re excited to introduce new language options in the Booking Widget, ensuring a more localized and seamless experience for our global users! 🎉🌐
What’s New?
The Booking Widget now supports the following additional languages:- French (Canada) 🇨🇦- French (France) 🇫🇷- Swedish 🇸🇪- Finnish 🇫🇮- Norwegian 🇳🇴Users can now select these languages in their Booking Widget preferences, ensuring consistency with their platform-wide language settings.🎯
Why This Matters?
-
Better User Experience
– Bookers can interact with the Booking Widget in their native language.-
Improved Localization
– Ensures a consistent, native-language experience across the platform.-
Wider Global Reach
– Helps businesses cater to a broader audience effortlessly.
Image without caption
Image without caption
wordpress hosting & reselling
new
improved
5 months ago

🚀 LC Plugin 2.0 – A More Seamless HighLevel WordPress Hosting Experience!🔥

# LvlUp Plugin 2.0 is Here!This update makes it easier than ever for users to integrate LvlUp products like Phone Numbers, Email SMTP, and Forms into their WordPress sites—without the hassle of manual setup.## 🔐 Enhanced SecurityWe've removed API key authentication and now use OAuth for a more secure and seamless connection. (Note: Existing API key connections will continue to function as-is.)## 🌟 Key Features & Benefits- ✅
Effortless Phone Number & Forms Embeds
No more struggling with script tags or HTML! Simply copy the provided shortcode and insert it into any WordPress post or page.- ✅
One-Click Email SMTP Setup
If a dedicated domain is connected in LvlUp Emails, SMTP is automatically enabled. This ensures better email deliverability—improving inbox placement and reducing spam issues.## 🛠️ How to Use1. Log into your
WordPress admin dashboard
.2. Navigate to
Plugins → Add New
.3. Search for
LeadConnector
, then click Install & Activate.4. Open LeadConnector from the left sidebar.5. Click
Sign in with LeadConnector
, select your sub-account—and you’re all set! 🎉## 🔮 What’s Next?- 🚀
Multi-Chat Widget Support
– Add multiple chat widgets to your WordPress site effortlessly.- 🚀
LC Migrator Plugin
– One-click migration to LvlUp WordPress hosting.To know more about WordPress Hosting and how you can resell it to your clients, please visit our help center. If you have suggestions for WordPress Hosting, feel free to post your ideas on our Ideas Board, and we will prioritize your suggestions!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
automations
new
improved
5 months ago

Branching in Find Contact Action

# Previous Behavior- When a Find Contact action was added to a workflow, there was no branching option in the builder to help users understand how many contacts were found.# New Behavior- We have introduced branching support in the ‘Find Contact’ action, allowing for more flexible workflow execution.- This enhancement improves workflow customization by enabling users to define distinct paths based on whether a contact is found or not.# Is it applicable to the existing Find Contact action?- The existing ‘Find Contact’ action will now include an option to switch to a branch flow.- Once switched, all subsequent actions will follow the ‘Contact Found’ branch.- After transitioning to the new branch flow, you cannot revert to the previous version’s flow.- All newly added ‘Find Contact’ actions will automatically use the branch flow.This update enhances the flexibility of the ‘Find Contact’ action, making it easier to manage actions based on contact search results.# When a new action is added# How to Switch from the existing action
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
funnels and websites
new
5 months ago

Navigation menu text wrap for mobile view

# What’s New?We have improved the text overflow issue of the navigation menu on mobile devices. Now, text can wrap to a new line for better readability.
Image without caption
Image without caption
payments
new
5 months ago

Subscription Settings - Failed Payment Retries

# What's New?- Business users will now be able to configure payment retries in the event of subscription payment failures.- Users can define up to 3 retries based on their specific requirements, with gaps of 1, 3, 5, or 7 days between each retry.- The default setting allows for 3 retries, each with a gap of 1 day; however, this can be adjusted to meet business needs.- Changes made to the retry settings will affect all existing and new subscriptions. For example, if a subscription is currently set to retry 3 times with a 3-day gap between retries, and the settings are changed while the subscription is retrying, the new settings will apply. So, if the setting is modified to allow for 2 retries with gaps of 3 and 5 days respectively, the second retry will occur after 5 days, with no third retry being executed.- If all payment retries fail, business users have the option to keep the subscription in an "Unpaid" state as it currently functions, or they can choose to move the subscription to a "Cancelled" state directly from the settings page.## Where can we find these invoices?Payments > Settings > Subscription## Payment providers supported with this feature:NMI,
Authorize.net
, Square## What's Next?Subscription payment reminder settings
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
qr codes
new
5 months ago

🚀 QR Enhancements – Improved Download Quality and New Format Options

# New 🌟-
SVG Format Added:
Enjoy infinite scaling without quality loss! You can easily resize your QR codes using this flexible format. Users can resize their SVG QR codes using this tool.-
PDF Format Introduced:
Convert PNG QR codes into PDFs for easy A4-sized printing.# Improved 🔧-
Enhanced PNG Quality:
Higher PPI ensures sharper and clearer QR codes. (Note: Safari retains previous quality due to browser limitations.)# How It Works- While generating a QR code, users can now select SVG or PDF format in addition to PNG.- Download options for PNG, SVG, and PDF are now conveniently available in the QR code listing.- PNG quality enhancements apply automatically when downloading QR codes.
Image without caption
Image without caption
automations
calendar
new
improved
5 months ago

Create Appointment Note - Workflow Action

We’re excited to introduce a new workflow action under the Appointments category:
Create Appointment Note!
This powerful addition enables users to automate note-taking for appointments, improving record-keeping and reducing manual effort.## What's New?-
Create Appointment Note Action:
Seamlessly add notes to an appointment using workflows.-
Supports Multiple Triggers:
Works with appointment-based triggers (e.g., Appointment Status, Customer Booked Appointment) or Inbound Webhook Trigger.-
Flexible Note Input:
Add custom notes manually or pass dynamic content from webhook data.-
Automated Record-Keeping:
Enhances organization by creating appointment notes without manual entry.## How to Set It Up?1.
Create a Workflow:
Go to Automations > Create New Workflow.2.
Add a Trigger:
Use an appointment-based trigger or Inbound Webhook Trigger.3.
Add the Action:
Select Create Appointment Note and name the action.4.
Configure Inputs:
If using Inbound Webhook, provide appointmentId and body. If using an appointment-based trigger, only the note body is required—the system automatically associates it with the relevant appointment, eliminating the need for an appointment ID.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
documents & contracts
new
5 months ago

Documents & Contracts: Upload multiple PDFs & Page rearrangement

# What’s New?## Upload Multiple PDFs at OnceNo more single uploads! You can now select and add multiple PDFs in one go.## Rearrange Before UploadingEasily drag and drop to reorder your pages before submission.## All Pages Auto-AddedOnce uploaded, all pages are seamlessly combined into the document.---## How to Use It?1. Click “+ New” and select “Upload Existing PDFs.”2. Drag and drop or browse to select multiple PDFs.3. Rearrange your files in the upload window if needed.4. Click “Upload” – all pages will be merged into a single document.---## Why We Built ItA large number of users rely on PDFs to create documents. Before this update, users had to upload individual files separately and send multiple contracts for signature. Now, you can:- Combine multiple PDFs in one step.- Avoid separate signature requests on different documents.- Streamline contract creation.Try it out today and make document handling smoother than ever!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
crm
new
5 months ago

Updated Company Settings Page

We’ve streamlined the company settings experience by integrating the settings directly into the Company Details section on the
Settings > Objects > Companies
page. In addition, the
Settings > Companies
menu option now redirects to the same page. This consolidation improves the user interface and navigation without impacting existing functionality.# What Changed:## Integrated Company SettingsThe settings are now part of the Company Details section on the
Settings > Objects > Companies
page instead of existing on a separate page.## Seamless Navigation RedirectClicking on
Settings > Companies
now redirects to the
Settings > Objects > Companies
page, ensuring that current users experience a smooth transition without disruption.## Enhanced UI & ConsistencyThe updated design delivers a modern, cohesive look that aligns with our overall platform standards while maintaining all core functionalities.# How to Use:This feature is available in
Subaccount > Labs > "Updated Company Settings Page."
## Accessing Company SettingsNavigate to
Settings > Objects > Companies
and select a company to view its details, including the integrated settings in the Company Details section.# Why This Enhancement?The change was made to simplify the user experience by consolidating related information in a single location. This integration reduces clutter, streamlines navigation, and aligns with our design standards—all while ensuring that existing users’ workflows remain uninterrupted.
Image without caption
phone system
new
5 months ago

Enhanced Sub-Account Phone Settings Configuration

We are excited to introduce a new
"Account Creation"
tab under Phone Integration settings, providing agencies with greater flexibility and control over sub-account configurations upon creation. This update empowers agency owners and admins to customize telephony settings at the point of sub-account creation, ensuring seamless setup and an improved user experience.## Key Highlights:### Automatically Link Telephony System for New Sub-AccountsEnsures seamless telephony integration upon sub-account creation.### Enhanced Sub-Account Settings Management1.
A2P Registration for Sub-Accounts with Rebilling Disabled
- Allows sub-account users to submit an A2P registration even if rebilling is turned off.- If enabled, sub-accounts cannot take further action unless rebilling is activated.2.
Automatic Enablement of Number Intelligence & Validation (LC Phone Agencies Only)
-
Number Intelligence:
Provides smart number handling and validation.-
Validation:
Ensures compliance and reduces messaging errors.### Messaging Limit CustomizationAgencies can set a messaging limit for new sub-accounts, choosing from:1.
Messaging Ramp (default)
- 250- 500- 1,000Once a limit is set, sub-accounts exit the "Ramp" mode permanently.Agencies can choose between:- SMS-based limit or Segment-based limit- Daily limit or Monthly limit## Why This Matters### Enhanced User Experience- Streamlined sub-account setup with clear, customizable options.- Reduces confusion and manual configuration post-creation.### Reduced Support Tickets & Faster Resolution- Empowering admins and owners to manage configurations minimizes the need for external support.## AvailabilityThis update is now live and applies to all agencies. 🚀
Image without caption
Image without caption
phone system
new
5 months ago

Carrier Suspensions

We are excited to introduce the enhanced Sub-account Suspension Appeal Process, designed to provide users with better clarity and actionable steps to address carrier suspensions of LvlUp Phone sub-accounts. This update empowers agencies to take ownership of the suspension resolution process, reducing reliance on external support teams and expediting resolution times.# Key Highlights## Clear Suspension CommunicationA new banner will appear with customized messages for agency owners/admins and sub-account users, communicating the suspension of the sub-account with actionable steps and a suspension appeal form.## Suspension Appeal FormA dedicated "Suspension Appeal Form" call-to-action opens a modal within the page, capturing key details such as contact information, opt-in details, and compliance links (e.g., Privacy Policy, Terms and Conditions).## Improved Ticket WorkflowUpon form submission, a support ticket is automatically generated with all captured details, including the LvlUp sub-account ID and agency relationship number. The support ticket number is shared in the banner after form submission for better visibility and collaboration.# Why This Matters## Enhanced User ExperienceUsers now have clear, actionable steps to resolve suspensions, reducing confusion and frustration.## Reduced Turnaround Time (TAT)Faster suspension resolution by streamlining the process and empowering admins/owners.## Improved TransparencyClear communication and tracking via linked support tickets ensure users stay informed.# AvailabilityThis update is now live and applies to all LvlUp Phone sub-accounts on the platform. 🚀
Image without caption
Image without caption
online listings
new
5 months ago

Upload Business Logo & Gallery Media in Online Listings 🚀

🌟
What's New?
You can now upload, manage, and edit business logos and photos directly within LvlUp, ensuring a consistent and professional brand presence across all listings!🔥
Key Features
✅
Manage Business Logos
: Upload and maintain logos in a standardized 1:1 aspect ratio for platform consistency. Easily update or delete logos as needed.✅
Upload & Edit Photos
: Add business photos and sync them effortlessly across listings. Use built-in tools for cropping, mirroring, rotating, and adjusting aspect ratios.✅
Advanced Editing Tools
: Refine both logos and photos with an intuitive, streamlined interface. Ensure your images look polished and professional with precision editing features.📌
How to Use
1️⃣ Navigate to
Reputation
→
Listings
.2️⃣ Select your
business entity
.3️⃣ Go to
Edit Listing Information
→
Media
to upload or edit images.❓
Why This Matters
This update gives businesses more control over their branding and ensures a strong, cohesive online presence. With easy-to-use editing tools, keeping listings visually appealing has never been simpler!🚀
Start refining your listings today!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
mobile app
contacts
new
improved
5 months ago

Contacts Enhancements - Mobile App

We heard your feedback and have improved the Contacts Module, designed to enhance organization, boost productivity, and deliver a smoother user experience with smarter navigation, quick actions, and enriched note-taking capabilities!## What's Improved?1.
Tags
: First-Glance One-Click AccessWe resolved the issue of hidden tags. Tags are now prominently visible at the contact level, giving users easy, one-click access to view and perform all tag-related actions.2.
Custom Fields
: Improved Organization and File Access- The previous unorganized structure of multiple folders under custom fields has been fixed, ensuring a clear and logical flow of information.- The file attachment process has been enhanced by supporting access to media, camera, files, and other resources instead of being limited to mobile phone files.3.
Quick Actions
: Floating Button for Key FunctionsA new floating quick actions button allows users to instantly access opportunities, workflows, Do Not Disturb (DND), and tags from any screen within the contacts module.4.
Maps Integration
: Seamless Address RedirectionThe issue where clicking on an address did not redirect to any maps has been resolved. Users can now choose between Google Maps and Apple Maps for seamless navigation.5.
Document Viewer
: Instant Access to Contact-Level DocumentsThe problem where documents attached to contacts could not be opened immediately has been fixed. Users can now view documents directly from the contact screen.6.
Hide Empty Fields
: New Toggle for Enhanced OrganizationWe have introduced new toggle options to hide empty fields, giving users the flexibility to view only the fields that are populated at the folder level.7.
Notes
: Enhanced Note-Taking with Rich Content SupportThe notes section has been upgraded to support HTML content and hyperlinking, allowing users to include website links and create richer, more functional notes.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
memberships
new
5 months ago

Builder-Side Image Support, Audio File Enhancements & Offer Design Updates

# Builder-Side Image & GIF SupportCreators can now enhance collaboration by adding images and GIFs directly into comments on the builder side.- Drag, upload, or paste images and GIFs seamlessly.- Instant previews without navigating away.- GIF support for more dynamic interactions.- Optimized caching for faster loading speeds.## Seamless Audio File Support in Snapshots & Cloning- Effortless file copying – Audio files can now be copied across multiple locations and agencies.- Integrated with Assets DRM – Eliminates redundant copies of the same file, streamlining storage and accessibility.## Enhanced Offer DesignsWe’ve improved product-wise offer displays for better usability:- Cleaner, more structured layout for a streamlined experience.- Improved search and filter options to quickly find and manage offers.
certificates
new
improved
5 months ago

Default certificates in courses & Category completion certificate

# Default Certificates in Courses- New courses now automatically include a default course completion certificate, streamlining the setup process and ensuring that every course has the option to award a credential.- A banner will now appear in existing courses, notifying you to easily add a completion certificate.- Users will have the ability to delete or draft the default course completion certificate if they don't need it.- Templates attached to a course completion certificate will be available for viewing directly from the course builder.- You can choose and attach certificate templates (both default and custom-made) directly within the course builder.## Category Completion Certificate- Users will now be able to attach a certificate directly to an entire category, providing recognition for completing a part of the course.- The category completion certificate is visible as the final lesson in the category preview.- Category completion certificates are automatically triggered when a user finishes all the required lessons within the category.- Category certificates are always placed at the end of the category and cannot be dragged or dropped.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
5 months ago

Calendars: Activity Log Enhancements

We’re excited to announce several enhancements to the Calendar Activity Logs aimed at providing clearer and more accurate records of third-party event updates. These improvements ensure that users can quickly understand an event’s history, reducing confusion and support escalations.# What's New?## Improved Third-Party Update Tracking- Updates made in Google Calendar, Outlook, or iCloud will now appear as “Updated by Third Party” in the activity log, replacing previous ambiguous entries.- System-made updates will still show “Updated by [User Name]” for better clarity.## New Illustration for Empty Activity Logs- If no logs are available for a selected date range or filter, the system will now display an empty state illustration instead of a blank screen.## Expanded Logging for Blocked Slots- The system will now log updates for blocked slots as well, ensuring that any changes made to them are properly recorded.## iCloud Upload Logs- Events uploaded to iCloud will now generate an activity log entry: “Uploaded to iCloud,” ensuring parity with other calendar integrations.These enhancements reflect our commitment to improving transparency and usability in the Calendar module.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
5 months ago

Transfer Incoming calls (via Labs)

# 📞 Transfer Incoming CallsPreviously, you could only transfer outgoing calls. Now, with the refreshed dialer, you can also transfer incoming calls.
Available in Beta via Labs now!
If you encounter any issues, you can revert to the old dialer.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
phone system
new
improved
fixed
5 months ago

Dialer Refresh (via Labs)

# 🌟 Breath of Fresh Air 🌟- It's new, it's fresh, and it's clean!# 📞 Transfer Incoming Calls- Previously, you could only transfer outgoing calls. Now, you can also transfer incoming calls!# ⏰ Save Time- Designed to save you time, you can start dialing a number the moment you click on the dialer.- As you dial, we automatically search your contacts for matches.- Access your Contacts and Recent Calls with just a tap.# 📝 Notes- Add Notes after the call ends from the Recents screen.- Adding Notes during the call is coming soon!# 🏷️ Tags- Add Tags to the contact after the call ends from the Recents screen.# 📱 Dialpad to Navigate IVR- Earlier, if your call was answered by an IVR (e.g., "Press 1 for X..."), you couldn't navigate it because you couldn't access the dialpad. Now you can!
Available in Beta via Labs now!
If you encounter issues, you can revert to the old dialer.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
wordpress hosting & reselling
new
5 months ago

WordPress PHP Version Update Now Live!

# ✨ Introducing PHP Version Management in WordPress Hosting!We're excited to announce the PHP Version Update feature, which gives you full control over your site's server environment. You can now easily switch to a supported PHP version for improved security, performance, and compatibility—all from the WordPress Advanced Settings panel!## 🔥 What’s New?- ✅
Effortless PHP Version Updates
: Switch between supported PHP versions with just a few clicks.- 🔒
Stronger Security
: Stay protected with the latest security patches and updates.- ⚡
Performance Boost
: Run your site on an optimized PHP version for faster load times and improved resource efficiency.- 🛠️
Better Plugin & Theme Compatibility
: Ensure smooth functionality with plugins and themes that require newer PHP versions.## 🔧 How It Works:1. Go to WordPress → Advanced Settings → Server Settings.2. Choose your preferred PHP version from the available options.3. Click Confirm, and your site will be updated seamlessly!## 🚀 What’s Next?We’re not stopping here! Bulk PHP Version Updates for multiple sites are coming soon, making it even easier for agencies to manage PHP versions at scale. Stay tuned!➡️
Update your PHP version today and unlock better security, speed, and compatibility!
🚀
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
snapshot
new
5 months ago

Granular Permissions for Snapshots

Introduced granular permissions for managing Snapshot actions, allowing for more control over user access.# Permissions AddedThe following Snapshot actions are now controlled by permissions:-
View Snapshots
– Control who can access and browse snapshots.-
Create Snapshots
– Restrict the ability to generate new snapshots.-
Edit Snapshots
– Define who can modify existing snapshots.-
Share/Import Snapshots
– Manage permissions for sharing and importing snapshots.-
Push Snapshots
– Control access to pushing snapshots to accounts.-
Refresh Snapshots
– Restrict users from updating snapshot content.-
Delete Snapshots
– Prevent unauthorized deletion of snapshots.# Improvements- Enhanced security by ensuring users only have access to the actions necessary for their role.- Improved compliance and workflow management with fine-grained control over snapshot interactions.- Streamlined team collaboration with customizable permission settings.# Where to Find ItAdmins can manage user permissions by navigating to:
Settings > Team > Edit User Option > Snapshot Scopes
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
online listings
new
improved
5 months ago

🚀Profile Progress Tracker & Profile Health Score

We’re excited to introduce the
Profile Progress Tracker & Profile Health Score
, designed to help you optimize your business profile effortlessly.# What’s New?-
Profile Health Score (%):
Instantly see how complete your profile is with a real-time percentage score.-
Progress Tracker:
Get a step-by-step breakdown of missing details and suggested improvements.-
Actionable Insights:
Recommendations to enhance visibility, credibility, and engagement.-
Subaccount Optimization:
Ensure all your subaccounts are set up for success with a structured progress path.## Benefits:- ✔ Helps improve profile completeness for better discoverability.- ✔ Provides clear next steps to optimize key business details.- ✔ Enables subaccounts to maximize their potential effortlessly.
Try it out today and level up your profile health!
🚀To learn more about Online Listings and how you can resell them to your clients, click here. Have some suggestions for Online Listings? Simply post your ideas in our Ideas Board, and we will prioritize your suggestions!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
5 months ago

Enhanced Accessibility Features Across Media Library, URL Redirects and Domains.

# What’s New?## 1. Enhanced Accessibility for Media Library
Improved Standards:
The Media Library interface now complies with accessibility guidelines, making asset management more user-friendly.
Screen Reader Compatibility:
Key elements are fully compatible with screen readers, providing clear instructions and feedback.
Keyboard Navigation Support:
Users can efficiently navigate using keyboard shortcuts for a smoother experience.## 2. Improved Accessibility Support for URL Redirects
Upgraded Interface:
The URL Redirects feature now meets accessibility standards for easier navigation and management.
Screen Reader Compatibility:
Enhanced support ensures clear instructions and interactions.
Keyboard Navigation:
Users can efficiently handle redirects using keyboard controls.## 3. Accessibility Enhancements for Domain Selling
Enhanced User Experience:
The Domain Selling app is now more accessible, allowing all users to manage domain sales effectively.
Screen Reader Optimization:
Full compatibility with screen readers offers a better guided experience.
Keyboard Navigation:
Users relying on keyboard shortcuts can now operate the app seamlessly.## 4. Improved Accessibility for Domain Connect
User-Friendly Interface:
The Domain Connect feature now supports accessibility standards for improved navigation and usability.
Screen Reader Compatibility:
Elements are optimized for assistive technologies, providing better interaction.
Keyboard Navigation:
Users can navigate and manage domain connections efficiently using keyboard shortcuts.
documents & contracts
new
5 months ago

Deposits and Payment Plans on Documents & Contracts!

# What's New?- Users can now add payment schedules to their product lists within Documents and Contracts.- This schedule can be added dynamically based on the signing date of the document or on a fixed date if you are certain when the contract will be signed.- Users can also enable auto payment for any subsequent payments with a toggle.- Signers will be able to view the payment plan details in the product list as well.- If you are using this feature together with direct payments, the user will automatically be redirected to the invoice after the document is signed.## How to Use1. Go to Documents and Contracts -> Add a product list.2. Select "Add Payment Schedule" from the left drawer (which opens automatically) or click on "Add Payment Schedule" in the product list.The modal will open:1. Select the first payment due - Either on the signing date of the primary user or a custom date if you prefer.2. Configure subsequent payments - Either at fixed time intervals after the signing date or on custom dates. The invoice due date will be the date when the last payment is scheduled.3. Set percentages or fixed amounts.4. View the remaining percentage or amount under the total amount.
Note on Mapping Payment Configuration:
If subsequent payments are fixed dates, the payment dates will shift depending on the first user’s signing date. If a payment is missed, subsequent dates will adjust to align with the primary user's signing date.Once you save, the user will be able to view the schedule information in the last product list on the document.Enable auto payments to start deducting money automatically for subsequent payments.## Why We Built ItThis feature allows for taking deposits at the time of signature of the document by the primary user.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
template library
new
improved
5 months ago

Template Library – Smart Search Update🚀

# What's Changed:We’ve improved the search functionality in the Template Library! You can now search not only by template name but also by tags and categories.## Why It Matters:-
Faster Search:
Find what you’re looking for more quickly.-
Save Time:
Use more search options, making it easier to locate templates.## How to Try It:1. Go to the Template Library (Admin/User screen).2. In the search bar, type in a tag, name, or category.3. The search will now display templates that match, even if the word isn’t in the name.This update makes finding templates quicker and easier!
funnels and websites
new
5 months ago

Custom code panel enhancement

# ChangelogWe have fixed an issue where custom values were not rendering properly when they contained lengthy keys or line breaks in the middle. This update also enhances the usage of custom values in Custom CSS and Custom Code, preventing unintended auto-formatting and unwanted line breaks.## Why It Matters:✅
Accurate Rendering
– Custom values now display correctly, even with long keys or line breaks.✅
Better Custom Code Handling
– No more unexpected formatting or extra line breaks in Custom CSS and Custom Code sections.
Image without caption
documents & contracts
fixed
5 months ago

Documents & Contracts - Corrected Rendering of Special Characters

We have resolved an issue where custom values containing certain special characters (e.g., “/br” or bullet points) were not rendering correctly in documents.With this fix, all custom values—including those with special characters—will display as intended, ensuring a consistent and accurate experience when editing or viewing content.
dashboard
improved
5 months ago

Sub Account Dashboard and Reporting: Multi Metric Support

# Introducing Multi-Metric Support for Dashboards and Custom Reports Charts## 👀 What’s New?-
Secondary Metric Selection:
You can now add a second metric in line, bar, and horizontal bar chart widgets.-
Comparison Values:
When two metrics are added, widgets can display a comparison value for both metrics if enabled.## 👷 How It Works:1.
Add Widget:
Click on "Add Widget."2.
Choose Chart Type:
Select any of the following chart types: Line, Bar, or Horizontal Bar.3.
Configure Metrics:
In the widget configuration, select the secondary metric from the dropdown under "Metrics."4.
Enable Comparison (Optional):
Toggle "Compare Data" under Advanced Settings if required.5.
Save Changes:
Click "Save" to see your updated multi-metric visualization.## ⭐ Why it Matters:-
Enhanced Data Visualization:
Gain deeper insights by comparing multiple metrics on a single chart.-
Identify Trends:
Visualize relationships between key metrics to uncover patterns and trends.
Image without caption
Image without caption
payments
new
5 months ago

Payment Links -> Auto apply coupon codes on links

# What's New?- You now have the option to automatically apply a coupon code when sending a payment link.- This feature is available in both the "Copy Link" and "Send to Contact" tabs.- When opening the payment link, the selected coupon code will be applied automatically.## How to Use1. Open a Payment Link.2. Click on "Send."3. Check the box for "Auto Apply Coupon Code" and select the desired coupon.4. Choose your contacts and send, or simply get a copy link.5. Send the link, and users will receive a payment link with the coupon code automatically applied.## Why We Built ItIf you are running different campaigns for various target groups and want to offer different discounts, you can now easily send them tailored payment links where coupons are automatically applied.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
payments
new
5 months ago

Payment Links - Ability to automatically deactivate after a certain fixed date

# What's New?- You can now enable automatic deactivation on any payment link that you configure.- The link will become inactive once the configured deactivation date has passed.## How to Use1. Go to
Payments
->
Payment Links
.2. Create a link.3. Check the box for
automatic deactivation
.4. Select a date for deactivation.5. Save and send it.Once a user tries to access the link after the deactivation date, they will see an error page.## Why We Built ItThis feature addresses several use cases for businesses that rely on payment links for collecting payments:- A business launching a limited-time promotional offer can include a payment link in emails or social media campaigns, ensuring it automatically deactivates after the promotion ends.- Event organizers using payment links for ticket sales that are only valid until a certain date can now utilize this feature effectively.- Customers receiving a payment link as part of a subscription renewal process can avoid accidental payments by ensuring the link does not remain active beyond the renewal period.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
improved
5 months ago

New Change in Affiliate Portal: Payment Details Section Access

We’ve made an update to the Affiliate Portal to ensure that only Agency Owners have access to the
Payment Details
section.This section will allow only Agency Owners to update their Tipalti bank details and track affiliate payments.For other users, this section will now display a message informing them to contact the Agency Owner for any updates related to payment details.This change enhances security and ensures that sensitive payment information is accessible only to those with the appropriate permissions.
new
5 months ago

Introducing New Templates

We are excited to introduce our new web templates, designed to enhance your marketing efforts. Whether you're building a website, creating a sales funnel, or sending out email campaigns, our versatile and user-friendly templates have you covered. Fully customizable and professional, they streamline your workflow, saving you time and allowing you to focus on engaging your audience and driving results.## List of New Templates---### 🚀 2 New Website Templates Published 🚀- Legal - 1- Marketing Agency - 1---### 🚀 3 New Funnel Templates Published 🚀- Health & Wellness - 1- Financial - 1- Creative - 1---### 🚀 1 New Email Template Published 🚀- Other - Testimonial Request---### 🚀 1 New Form Template Published 🚀- Automotive - 1---### 🚀 1 New Survey Template Published 🚀- Insurance - 1---### 🚀 4 New Social Templates Published 🚀- Holidays - 2- Home Services - 2---### 📣 1 New Snapshot 📣- Home Services - Electrician
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
5 months ago

Global Magic Links & Enhancements

# Global Magic LinksIntroducing Global Magic Links, a new feature that offers greater flexibility for creators to add contact-level login links for membership portals. This enhancement eliminates the dependency on course-specific triggers, enabling seamless integration across all template structures. Learners now have easier access to their membership or client portals, thereby improving the overall learning experience. Additionally, Client Portals and Memberships will be more discoverable and accessible, regardless of product or niche.## Integration Areas-
Workflow Email Actions
-
Custom Email Templates
-
Contact Smartlist Conversations
## How to Use
Workflows
: Navigate to SubAccount → Automation → Workflows → Create New → Email Action → Select from Client Portal Contact Custom Values.
Email Templates
: Navigate to SubAccount → Marketing → Emails → Templates → Select from Membership Contacts Custom Values.
Contact Emails
: Navigate to SubAccount → Contacts → Contact Details → Email → Select from Client Portal Contact Custom Values.## Enhancements
New Search Bar in Navigation
- Positioned in the middle of the navigation bar for easier access.- Lazy loading implementation ensures it loads only when required, improving performance.- The recent searches feature allows users to quickly revisit past searches, enhancing efficiency.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
5 months ago

Images in Comments

We're excited to introduce new features and improvements aimed at enhancing your course interaction experience.# What's New?## Visual Commenting-
Seamless Image & GIF Integration
: Drag, upload, or paste images and GIFs directly into lecture comments.-
Instant Previews
: View image and GIF previews without leaving the page.-
Animated GIF Support
: Add dynamic and engaging interactions within discussions.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
e-commerce stores
new
5 months ago

Product Selection per Store for E-Commerce Stores

# What’s New?We’re excited to introduce a new feature that gives store owners full control over product visibility across multiple stores within a sub-account. With this enhancement, users can now include or exclude products from specific stores, making inventory management more flexible and efficient.## Key Points:1.
"Include in Online Store" Toggle Condition:
-
Enabled:
The product will be available for inclusion or exclusion in the Products section of all stores.-
Disabled:
The product will not appear in the Stores → Products section for any store.2.
Product Listing Behavior:
- When a new store is created, products with the "Include in Online Store" toggle enabled will be automatically listed.- Newly created products with the toggle enabled will be listed by default in all stores.3.
Bulk Actions for Product Visibility:
- Select multiple products to
bulk include or exclude
them across stores.4.
Search & Filter Options:
- Search by
Product Name
to quickly find products.-
Filter by Collections
to manage visibility efficiently.## How to Use It:1. Go to:
Stores > Select Store > Products section
.2. Use
bulk actions
to include or exclude multiple products at once.3.
Search & filter
products based on product names or filter based on Collections.4. Changes are
automatically saved
— no extra steps needed.## Key Points to Note:- If
"Include in Online Store"
is disabled, the product will not appear for inclusion/exclusion in any store.- When a new store is created, only products with
"Include in Online Store"
enabled will be available.- New stores inherit product visibility based on the
"Include in Online Store"
setting.- Store owners can visit the product pages for editing by clicking on specific products in this section.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
opportunities and pipelines
contacts
new
5 months ago

Contacts & Opportunities: New & Improved Notes Experience!

# Take Control of Your Notes with an Upgraded Experience!With enhanced search, filters, and a more organized view, finding and managing your notes is now easier than ever!## What's New?✅
Filters & Sorting:
Quickly find the notes you need with improved filtering options and the ability to sort by Date Created.✅
Search Notes:
Instantly locate specific notes using the new search functionality.✅
Additional Contact Notes:
View notes linked to related contacts within an opportunity, ensuring complete visibility.✅
Cleaner & More Organized View:
Easily read and manage notes under both Contacts and Opportunities, providing a seamless experience.## How to Use?1️⃣
Access Notes:
Navigate to the Notes tab under Contacts or Opportunities.2️⃣
Search Notes:
Use the search bar to quickly locate relevant notes.3️⃣
Sort & Filter:
Use sorting and filtering options to refine your notes view.4️⃣
View Additional Contact Notes:
In Opportunities, apply filters to see notes linked to related contacts.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
template library
users & permissions
new
5 months ago

Customise System Emails - Welcome Email, Verification Code, Reset Password

We are excited to share that customizing system email templates for User Management-related emails is now available.# What's New?- Customization is enabled for the Welcome Email, Password Reset Email, and Verification Link.- A simple method to update the logo and CTA colors for all three emails.# How to Use It1. Go to
Agency Settings
>
System Emails
.2. To change any email template, click
Change Template
, select the Subaccount, and choose the template path (folder).3. Select the template and click
Change
.4. To create a new template, go to
Email Marketing
>
Templates
.5. To update the logo and CTA color, click on
Settings
and make your updates.# What's Next?Customizing system email templates across other LvlUp products and features will be available in the upcoming months.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
new
5 months ago

Email Builder: Expanded Checklist for Custom Value Errors

The custom value error checklist now covers more content types for thorough error tracking.# Problem StatementThe checklist in the Email Campaign was previously limited to text and button elements, leaving other content types like images, videos, and forms unchecked.# What We DidWe ensured comprehensive error detection across all content types:1. Image2. Video3. Social elements4. Logo5. FAQ6. Image slider7. Form
Image without caption
integrations
new
5 months ago

Facebook Multiple Pages - Troubleshoot and Sync Leads Feature

We are introducing a new
Troubleshoot
option in the Facebook integration, along with several enhancements to make the use of Facebook features more comprehensive.# UI Enhancements on the Facebook Integration Card:- Moved the
Settings
and
Disconnect
buttons to the three-dot menu to declutter the integration view.- A warning icon will be displayed on the integration if the Forms are not mapped, with a link for redirection to the Facebook Form Field Mapping.- A warning icon will also appear if there are missing permissions, informing users to
Troubleshoot
their connection.- Added a
Troubleshoot
option to help debug missing permissions and other issues related to the Facebook integration, including support for syncing leads from multiple Facebook Pages.## Troubleshoot:
Flow:
Sub-account >> Integration >> Facebook integration card >> Troubleshoot### Missing Permissions:- Users can see which permissions are disabled and how these disabled permissions will impact the integration features.### Missing Pages:- A link to a Facebook document will be provided on how to resolve the issue if some pages are not visible for selection.### Sync Leads:- The
Sync Leads
option will sync unprocessed Facebook Leads for all mapped forms across all pages of the sub-account.- Users can select the duration from a dropdown to sync the Facebook Form Leads.- Before the final initiation of the sync leads process, users will see a modal with all relevant information regarding the sync leads action.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
app marketplace
security
api
improved
5 months ago

App Marketplace - Security Update | Webhook Authentication

We are excited to announce an upgrade to our webhook authentication system! This update introduces new security mechanisms designed to protect your integrations from replay attacks and ensure the authenticity of webhook payloads. Here's everything you need to know about these enhancements.Please note that these changes apply to all webhooks.# What's New?## 1. Timestamp and Webhook IDEvery webhook payload now includes:1.
Timestamp
: A UTC timestamp indicating when the webhook was sent.2.
Webhook ID
: A unique identifier for each webhook delivery.These additions ensure that each webhook request can be uniquely identified and time-validated to prevent replay attacks.## 2. x-wh-signature HeaderThe
x-wh-signature
header is a new addition to webhook requests. It contains a digitally signed hash that verifies the payload's integrity and authenticity. This signature can be verified using:1. A public key (refer to the documentation below).2. The webhook payload.# Why Does This Matter?This security update aims to improve the developer experience while maintaining the authenticity of the data sent out to developers as part of events. This will ensure higher reliability as well as enhanced capabilities for developers to explore. Additionally, this update enables developers to validate and ensure user trust.
whatsapp
conversation ai
new
5 months ago

WhatsApp Channel in Conversation AI Subaccount

# What's New?We are excited to announce the introduction of WhatsApp Channel Support in the Conversational AI Subaccount. With this enhancement, all features of Conversational AI are now enabled for WhatsApp, providing a seamless and powerful way to engage with your audience on this platform.## How It Works:- Navigate to
Settings > Conversational AI
.- Enable WhatsApp as a supported channel for your Conversational AI bots.- Once configured, WhatsApp can be utilized for all conversations!## Prerequisites:WhatsApp integration must be set up and active in your account to use this feature.
Note:
All existing features of Conversational AI in a subaccount are now fully enabled and functional for the WhatsApp channel as well.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
payments
invoicing
new
5 months ago

Create and send an open invoice for a failed subscription payment

# What's New?- With this functionality, businesses will be able to collect payments using invoices in cases where the automatic collection of a subscription payment fails for native integration payment providers.- An invoice will be automatically created every time there is a payment failure for a subscription and will also be sent to the customer.- This process will occur in parallel with the ongoing subscription payment retries.- The customer's payment can either complete with existing retries or they can pay using the invoice.- As soon as payment is collected via the invoice, the subscription will become active again, provided there are no other unpaid open invoices for the subscription.- These invoices will function similarly to any other invoice, with the exception of limited editing options available; i.e., the invoice amount, customer, email content, etc. cannot be edited and will reflect what is already present in the subscription.## Where can we find these invoices?Payments > Subscriptions > Subscription Details > Invoices## Supported Payment Providers for this Feature:NMI,
Authorize.net
, Square# What's Next?- Businesses will be able to define and edit the email template that will be sent to end customers in case of invoices sent for subscription payment failures.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
reputation
whatsapp
new
5 months ago

Send Review Requests via WhatsApp 🚀

We’ve introduced the ability to send review requests via WhatsApp directly from the Reputation Management platform. This feature provides a new, personalized channel for efficiently gathering customer feedback.## What’s New?1.
WhatsApp Review Requests:
Send review requests through WhatsApp to your customers.2.
Custom Templates:
Create and manage pre-approved WhatsApp Review Request templates for your business.3.
Versatile Sending Options:
Send review requests manually, in bulk, or through automated workflows.## How to Use This Feature:
Step 1: Set Up WhatsApp Integration:
- Go to Settings → WhatsApp, authenticate your WhatsApp Business number, and subscribe if you haven't already.- Test the connection to ensure successful messaging.
Step 2: Create Your Template:
- Navigate to Reputation → Settings → Review Request WhatsApp.- Customize your message template with dynamic placeholders and call-to-action links.- Submit for Meta approval (this takes about 1-2 minutes).
Send Review Requests:
-
Single Requests:
Send to individual customers from the Reviews section.-
Bulk Requests:
Upload a customer list in CSV format, map the fields, and send in bulk.-
Workflow Automation:
Use workflows to automatically trigger WhatsApp review requests based on specific events (e.g., post-purchase).## Why This Feature?-
Expanded Reach:
Engage customers on a familiar and widely-used platform.-
Streamlined Feedback Collection:
Simplify and personalize the process of gathering reviews.-
Enhanced Reputation:
Boost your online presence with consistent and timely review requests.Take advantage of this feature to strengthen customer relationships and elevate your reputation today!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
documents & contracts
new
5 months ago

Documents and Contracts: Template Library now available

# What’s New?- We have introduced a Template Library in the Documents and Contracts sections of the platform.- Users can now access a collection of pre-made templates for common documents.- This feature accelerates document creation, allowing users to send documents more quickly.# How to Use1. Go to the Documents or Contracts section.2. Click on ‘New’ and select ‘Import from Template Library’.3. Choose a template from the available options.4. The document builder will open with the template already loaded.5. Add a primary recipient and make any necessary changes to the document.6. Send the document once everything is ready.7. You can also create custom templates and click on ‘Upload to Template Library’ to reuse the templates from there.# Why We Built ItWe developed the Template Library to simplify the process for users to quickly create and send documents. Many users were spending unnecessary time starting from scratch for standard documents, which hindered their efficiency.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
automations
improved
5 months ago

Enhanced execution logs for a clean view

# Previous Behavior- Previously, for most workflow actions, we displayed the executions in two steps: waiting and executed.- This resulted in a cluttered view of the execution logs, making it difficult for our customers to understand the information.# What's New?- With this update, we now show only the final statuses, i.e., executed. If an action is still in progress, we will show a waiting status until it completes.- This change will provide customers with a cleaner view of the execution logs.# List of Supported Actions- Appointment Booking Bot- Chat GPT Action- Conversation AI- Custom Code- Google Sheets- IG Interactive Messenger- Interactive Messenger- Custom Webhook- Slack- Clear Custom Object Record Fields- Update Custom Object Record- All IVR Actions- All Marketplace Actions- All Internal Actions# Note- This change applies only to selective actions. Actions such as wait steps and manual actions will still be logged as two separate entries.
documents & contracts
mobile payments and pos
new
5 months ago

Mobile Payments: In-person signatures

We are thrilled to announce our latest update to mobile payments: in-person signing for documents and contracts. Now you can create a document on the mobile app using a template with signature fields. Once you publish the document, you can open it to accept signatures from your signers directly within the mobile app. This update is live on LvlUp, LeadConnector, and Whitelabelled apps (the update needs to be requested).🚀
What’s New
-
View As
: You can now open a published document on behalf of an intended signer to accept their signature.-
Sign Document
: Accept signatures using text or freehand drawing directly on the mobile app.👷‍♂️
How to Use This Feature
1. Log in to the mobile app with your preferred sub-account open.2. Navigate to the Documents and Contracts section from the left-hand navigation drawer.3. Create a new document using one of your templates with signature fields.4. Once the document is ready to be published, tap on the share button and copy the link.5. Exit the document editor and go back to the “All Documents” tab.6. If your document hasn’t moved to the “Sent” state, refresh the page. The document should then appear with a “Sent” tag.7. Tap on the three dots icon on the right side of the document tile and select “View As.” Choose one of the recipients whose signature you would like to record.8. Hand your device over to the recipient with the signature field open.9. The recipient can then enter their signature and fill out any other necessary details.10. Repeat the steps for all signers.11. Congratulations! Your document has been signed.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
mobile payments and pos
new
5 months ago

Mobile Payments: Download Estimates

We are thrilled to announce our latest update to mobile payments: the ability to download estimates directly from the mobile app. You can now easily download a PDF copy of your signed estimate by following these simple steps:## How to Use This Feature1. Log in to the mobile app with your preferred sub-account.2. Navigate to the Estimates section from the left-hand navigation drawer.3. Find the tile of the estimate you wish to download.4. Long-press on the estimate tile and select "Download estimate."5. Your estimate will be saved to your device's file app.This update is live on LvlUp, LeadConnector, and Whitelabeled apps (please request the update if needed).
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
mobile payments and pos
new
5 months ago

Mobile Payments: Estimate Direct Payments

We are thrilled to announce our latest update to Mobile Payments - direct payments within estimates! Subaccount admins and users can now enable a direct payment option inside an estimate before sending it to their customer. Once the customer accepts the estimate, they will automatically be redirected to the invoice page, where they can complete the payment online. This update is available on LvlUp, LeadConnector, and Whitelabelled apps (this update needs to be requested).## How to Use This Feature1. Open the mobile app with your preferred subaccount.2. Navigate to the Estimates section using the left-hand navigation drawer.3. Create a new estimate or edit an existing draft estimate.4. Fill out all the details as you normally would - including the estimate name, number, issue date, expiry date, contact, and the list of items.5. Upon reaching the review page, scroll to the very bottom of the screen.6. Under the title "Payment Settings," toggle "Enable Direct Payments" on.7. Send the estimate to your customer via email, SMS, or both.Once your customer opens the estimate in their browser and accepts it, they will be redirected to the invoice where they can complete the payment online. If the payment fails to go through, you can navigate to the Invoices section and head over to that invoice tile. From there, you can either resend that invoice or record payment offline using tap to pay, cash, card, or manual entry by left-swiping/long-pressing on the invoice card and selecting "Record Payment."
Image without caption
Image without caption
prospecting
new
improved
5 months ago

🆕 Prospecting Tool: In-App Cancellation Update 🔍

# In-App Cancellation UpdateWe’ve made it easier to manage your Prospecting Tool subscription directly in the app!## What's New:-
In-App Cancellation:
Agencies can now cancel their Prospecting Tool subscription directly within the app without needing to contact support.-
Improved Transparency:
Get clear information about what happens when you cancel, including data retention policies and timelines.-
Streamlined Process:
Cancelling is now simpler, with step-by-step guidance to ensure a smooth process.## How it Works:1. Go to the Prospecting Tab in Your Agency Account.2. Click on Settings.3. Click Unsubscribe and complete the quick three-step cancellation flow to confirm your cancellation.## What Happens After You Cancel:- Your access to the Premium Prospecting Tool will be removed immediately.- However, all saved data and reports will remain accessible.- You can continue to generate free reports.## Why It Matters:-
Control:
Manage your subscription effortlessly.-
Convenience:
Eliminate the need to raise support tickets for cancellations.-
Transparency:
Understand cancellation terms upfront to avoid surprises.Start managing your subscription seamlessly today! Happy Prospecting! 🔍
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
improved
fixed
5 months ago

Client Portal - Preview Default Email Templates in Notification Preferences

# Preview Default Email Templates in Notification PreferencesWe’re excited to announce a significant enhancement to the Notification Preferences feature in the Client Portal! Initially, this feature allowed users to manage and customize notifications, but it did not support the previewing of default email templates. With this update, client portal owners can now preview the default email templates, enabling them to review and assess the content structure before making any changes or customizations.## What's New?With this enhancement, client portal owners can now view the default email templates for all notification types directly within the Client Portal. This update ensures that client portal owners can make informed decisions when customizing templates by understanding the default messaging and design.## Key Highlights:-
Preview Default Templates:
Users can now click on the Eye Icon next to default email templates to preview them directly in the Notification Preferences settings.-
Streamlined Customization:
Viewing the default templates helps users understand the original structure, tone, and format, making it easier to tailor custom templates to their specific needs.-
Enhanced User Experience:
This feature ensures that users have full visibility into the default messaging, reducing guesswork and improving confidence in customization efforts.## How to Use It?### Step-by-Step Guide:1. Navigate to: Sites -> Client Portal -> Settings -> Email Settings.2. Under each child app (e.g., Communities, Certificates, Courses based on your access), locate the notification options.3. Find the default email template and click on the Eye Icon to preview it.4. Review the default email content and structure.5. If needed, use the Edit button to create a customized version of the default template that aligns with your requirements.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
certificates
improved
fixed
5 months ago

Responsive Certificates & Improved Certificate Download Flow

# Responsive Certificates- Certificates are now optimized for all device types, ensuring a seamless experience.- Users can view their certificates on mobile, tablet, and desktop.- The certificates will adapt accordingly to the device used.## Improved Certificate Download Flow- Downloading certificates is now simpler and more seamless.- Users can download certificate PDFs in just one step, ensuring a faster and more efficient experience.- The download process is now consistent across all devices and browsers.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
app marketplace
security
new
5 months ago

2FA for Email Login in the Marketplace - Developer Portal

# ChangelogWe have implemented Two-Factor Authentication (2FA) for email in the Marketplace - Developer Portal to enhance security for all users.## Key Features-
Secure email access
with one-time verification codes-
Protection against unauthorized access
even if credentials are compromised## Authentication Flow1.
Enter Credentials
: Input your email address and password.2.
Click "Sign In"
.3.
Verify Identity
: Enter the OTP sent to your registered email.4.
Click "Verify"
to complete authentication.5.
Access Portal
: Upon successful verification, gain access to the Marketplace - Developer Portal.## Why is this important?Unauthorized access to developer accounts indirectly exposes customers to risks, as apps' tokens can access users' accounts and data. This security enhancement is part of the Marketplace and Integrations team's many initiatives planned this quarter to strengthen our platform's security.
invoicing
improved
5 months ago

Estimates & Invoices: Now Improved to seamless design

If you were tired of clicking through accordions to navigate to different sections and figure out late fees, tipping, etc., we've now made it simpler.# What's New?- Improved user interface to eliminate extra clicks needed to create an invoice. All invoice settings can now be navigated simply by scrolling down instead of accessing them within accordions.- Enhanced access to late fees and tipping.- Easier addition of discounts: Inline opening of discount settings rather than using a modal.- Simplified addition of products within existing line items for better organization by using a new addition icon "+".
Note:
Changes have been made to Invoices & Templates, as well as Estimates & Templates.# Why We Built It- To improve user experience and ensure seamless access to features like late fees and tipping.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
5 months ago

Unlabeled Cards in Opportunity View

# We’ve introduced a new "Unlabeled" card layout type for Opportunities, enhancing the way you view data.## Key Benefits:
Streamlined Design:
The "Unlabeled" layout provides a single line per data field, allowing you to view more information in a compact card.
Enhanced Data Density:
Fit more details on the same card without the need for scrolling or clutter.## How to Use:- Go to the Opportunities module.- Select "Manage Fields" in the top-right corner.- Choose the "Unlabeled" layout under Card Layout.- Add or remove fields as needed to optimize your card view.
Use Case:
This feature is ideal for users managing large pipelines who require quick, dense, and customizable data views.We look forward to hearing your feedback as we continue to refine the Opportunities module!
Image without caption
Image without caption
payments
invoicing
opportunities and pipelines
new
5 months ago

Invoices & Estimates: Now available in Opportunities

# What's New?- You now have a dedicated
Payments
tab within Opportunities.- You can send estimates and invoices directly from an opportunity.- Access invoices, estimates, and transactions linked to that opportunity within this section.- When sending an estimate or invoice, you'll be redirected to the corresponding page with contact details pre-populated. Once sent, you will be redirected back to the specific opportunity.## How to Use?1. Go to
Opportunity
and open a particular opportunity.2. Navigate to the
Payments
tab.3. Click on
Actions
and select
Create Estimate/Invoice
.4. You will be redirected to the Invoice or Estimate page with contact details pre-populated.5. After clicking
Send
, you will be redirected back to the same opportunity.Once you return to the opportunity, you can view all transaction types. Additionally, you can filter to see only invoices, and access the button to view all related invoices.## Why We Built This?- To streamline the process from sale to payment collection directly within an opportunity.- To make it easier for users to navigate payments while tracking an opportunity.## What's Planned Next?- Auto-updating opportunity value with invoice amounts.- Options to attach opportunities within invoices.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
invoicing
contacts
new
improved
5 months ago

Contacts: Estimates now available in Payments tab

# What's New?- Users can now send an estimate directly from the contact page.- Click on "Create Estimate" to have the contact details pre-populated.- Once sent, you can track the estimate from the estimates dashboard.# How to Use1. Go to
Contacts
-> Open a contact -> Select the
Payments
tab -> Click on
Create Estimate
.2. You will be redirected to the Estimate Builder with the contact details already filled in.3. Add products, send the estimate, and track it within the estimates dashboard.# Why We Built ItWe developed this feature to simplify and enhance the convenience of sending quotes and estimates directly from the contact page.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
invoicing
new
5 months ago

Sync your GHL Invoices to Wave Accounting

# What's New?For all users utilizing Wave for their accounting needs, you can now start syncing your invoices from LvlUp to Wave.Within the integrations section, connect Wave and select an account to sync your invoices. Once saved, any new invoices created or updated within LvlUp will begin syncing to Wave, saving you the effort of duplicating invoices in Wave.
Note:
Currently, any changes to the status of invoices (e.g., paid, partially paid, etc.) will not be synced because Wave does not provide a method to synchronize those statuses. For now, you will need to update the status manually.## How to Use1. Go to
Settings
->
Integrations
->
Wave
.2. Click on
Manage
and enter your Wave credentials.3. Grant access to allow one-way syncing of invoices created in LvlUp to Wave.4. Select the account where you want to sync the invoices and click
Save
.5. Once completed, any invoice created in LvlUp will start syncing to Wave.## Why We Built ThisWe developed this feature for users who use Wave for their accounting to streamline their lead-to-payment flow within LvlUp and to reduce the effort required to duplicate invoices in Wave.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
client portal
new
improved
fixed
5 months ago

Client Portal > Subscription Management - Enhancements

# Overview## What's New?-
Viewing All Cards:
Users can now access a comprehensive list of all the cards they have used for various subscriptions. This feature simplifies the management of payment methods in one convenient location.-
Deleting Cards:
Users have the ability to delete cards they no longer wish to use for future payments. If a card is linked to an active subscription, an alert will notify the user before proceeding with the deletion.-
Updating Card Details:
Users can easily update their card details through a secure “Payment Link.” This ensures that their payment information remains accurate and up-to-date without the need for manual edits.## Why We Built ItThis feature was designed to provide users with better control and flexibility over their payment methods. It allows them to easily manage, update, or remove cards, making their subscription experience more seamless and secure.
Image without caption
Image without caption
dashboard
new
improved
5 months ago

Sub Account Dashboard and Reporting: Widget Suggestions

# Save Time and Build Dashboards Faster with Smart Suggestions!With our new widget suggestion flow, setting up a dashboard is now easier, faster, and more goal-oriented.## 👀 What’s New?When creating a new dashboard, you can now:-
Goal-Based Suggestions:
Choose from a list of predefined goals to instantly add relevant widgets tailored to your tracking needs.-
Top Used Widgets:
Unsure what to track? Quickly select from the most popular widgets used by other users.-
Combine Options:
Select widgets from multiple goals or top-used suggestions to create a comprehensive dashboard in just a few clicks.-
Manual Widget Addition:
Still want full control? You can manually add widgets if needed.## 👷 How It Works:1. Click the blue dashboard icon.2. Select
Add Dashboard
and enter a name.3. Configure any required permissions.4. Select a
goal
to auto-populate relevant widgets.5. Pick from the
top-used widgets
for inspiration.6. Mix and match options or manually add widgets for ultimate flexibility.7. Preview the selected widgets.8. Click
Confirm & Add
to finalize your dashboard setup.9.
Save Your Changes
.## ⭐ Why it Matters:-
Saves Time:
Build dashboards in minutes without starting from scratch.-
Customizable and Goal-Oriented:
Tailor your dashboard to your exact needs using smart suggestions.-
Simplifies Onboarding:
New users can get started quickly with ready-to-use widgets.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
5 months ago

Auto-Complete Address in Order Forms

# 👀 What’s New?The Auto-Complete Address feature is here to revolutionize checkout flows for both one-step and two-step order forms! This sleek addition allows users to breeze through shipping details with lightning-fast, Google-powered address suggestions.But wait, there’s more! ⭐This feature also includes re-billing capabilities, enabling agencies to sell it at their own price and unlock a brand-new revenue stream.## 👷 How It Works:1. Go to Funnel Page > Order Form > Advanced Settings and toggle on the Auto-Complete Address option.2. Set a custom price for API costs and re-bill at the price of your choice.## ⭐ Why It Matters:-
Easy to fill:
When a user adds the address field, they will see multiple fields: Address, City, Country, State, and Postal Code. 🚀-
Perfect for All Order Forms:
Works flawlessly on both one-step and two-step forms.-
Boost Your Earnings:
Agencies can now monetize this feature by setting their own prices.-
Error-Free Shipping:
Accurate address entry ensures consistency in shipping addresses! 📦
Image without caption
documents & contracts
new
5 months ago

Docs & Contracts: Reorganize document pages

# What's New?- Users can now drag and drop to reorganize pages within a Contract.- View snippets of pages in the mini page view in the left panel.## How to Use1. Go to
Payments
->
Documents & Contracts
->
New Document
.2. Navigate to the
Pages
section in the left navigation bar.3. Drag and drop pages as you wish.## Why We Built ItTo reduce the time taken to build and send documents.
Image without caption
new
5 months ago

GoKollab - Spam removal updates

We are excited to announce new updates that will make it easier to remove spam content from users in LvlUp community groups.## Option to Delete All Content of a User While BanningWhen banning a user from a LvlUp community, group owners and admins will now have the option to delete all content posted by that user. This feature allows group owners and admins to eliminate spam content in one action, rather than having to delete each post or comment individually.## How to Delete All Spam Content of a User1. Open the Members tab in the group.2. Search for the user you wish to ban.3. Click on the three dots on the user's profile and select "Ban from Group" from the menu.4. In the confirmation modal, check the box to delete all content posted by the user you are banning.
Image without caption
Image without caption
social planner
new
5 months ago

Social analytics for Youtube, Google Business Profile, Pinterest, Tiktok

We are excited to announce our latest analytics addition to Google Business Profile, Pinterest, and TikTok, which we initially rolled out for Instagram, Facebook, and LinkedIn. With this feature, you can now gain deeper insights into your social performance to enhance your content management strategy and derive actionable insights.# 🚀 Key Features:## 1. Comprehensive Social Media Insights:- Track the number of posts, likes, comments, followers, impressions, and reach.- Visualize your social post performance with an interactive graph, showcasing post trends and weekly performance.## 2. Engagement Breakdown:- Get a detailed view of engagement metrics such as total likes, comments, and shares, broken down by platform.- Identify which platform drives more engagement, helping you tailor your content strategy accordingly.## 3. Impressions and Post Reach:- Measure your content’s visibility with accurate impressions tracking.- Analyze your post reach to understand how far your posts are spreading and which platforms are driving higher reach.# 🤯 Pointers to Note:- TikTok may take 1 to 2 days to reflect data due to the TikTok API availability.- Pinterest also takes 1 to 2 days to reflect the correct data, owing to API constraints.#
Help Documentation
For more information, visit the help documentation.Enjoy the mind-blowing social planner analytics! 🥳
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
blogs
new
improved
5 months ago

Share your Blogs on Social platforms

We’re excited to announce a new feature that makes sharing your favorite blog posts easier than ever! Starting today, you’ll find a new social sharing element embedded in each of our blog posts, empowering you to share insightful content with your network seamlessly.# What’s New?-
Social Sharing Buttons:
At the end of every blog post, you will now see buttons for popular social platforms such as Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, and more.-
Customizable Sharing Options:
Personalize your shared post with comments or highlights before posting.-
Quick Access:
No need to copy-paste links anymore; sharing is just a click away.# Why This Update?We understand the value of community and connection. This new feature helps you:- Spread valuable information quickly.- Spark meaningful conversations across platforms.- Engage more deeply with your audience and peers.# How to Embed the New 'Social Share' Feature (for blog creators)1. Navigate to the 'Blog Post' edit page.2. Drag and drop the new Social Share element under the blog content.3. Check the box for the social platform(s) of your choice.4. Add a personal touch (optional).5. Once everything is set, publish the page.# How to Use the 'Social Share' Feature (for blog readers)1. Navigate to the blog post.2. Click on the social icons to share the post.3. Select text within a blog post; a popup will appear with social platform icons.4. Click on a platform icon to share the selected text along with the blog link.This enhancement is part of our ongoing efforts to improve your experience and help you connect better with your community. Try it out today and let us know your thoughts!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
tasks
new
6 months ago

Tasks List View and Enhancements

We are thrilled to introduce the new Tasks List View with significant enhancements to streamline your task management experience.# What's New?## Default Smart ListsFind your tasks due today or upcoming soon with just a single click.## Advanced FiltersQuickly sort and find tasks using a wide range of filtering options.## Field CustomizationDecide which fields to display for a personalized task view.## Sorting OptionsOrganize your tasks based on priority, due dates, or custom criteria.## Enhanced User Experience (UX)Navigate through tasks with a cleaner, more intuitive interface.## Upgraded Create & Update UXSeamlessly add or modify tasks with a redesigned modal and new features.# How to Get Started1. Navigate to Contacts > Tasks to experience the new Tasks List View.2. Explore the enhanced filters, sorting, and smart lists for efficient task handling.3. Use the new task creation modal to quickly add and assign tasks.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
6 months ago

ResendToUnopened for RSS & Batch Schedule ⭐️

# ChangelogWe’ve enhanced your ability to re-engage unopened contacts.## Problem StatementPreviously, the ResendToUnopened feature was only available for "Send Now" campaigns. This limitation restricted your ability to resend to unopened contacts in RSS and Batch Schedule campaigns.## What We DidWe’ve added ResendToUnopened support for RSS and Batch Schedule campaigns, providing you with more flexibility to boost your reach.## How to Use1. After sending an RSS or Batch Schedule campaign, click on the three dots (in the list view).2. Select "Resend to Unopened."3. Choose a new subject line and schedule a resend time.4. Click "Schedule" to complete the process.## Coming SoonBatch resend functionality will be available soon.
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
6 months ago

Background Color for Text Elements 🚀

# Introducing Enhanced Customization for Your Text Elements in Email Builder🚀
What’s New:
You can now add background colors to text-based elements (such as text blocks and footers), providing greater design flexibility and the ability to highlight key content in your emails.👷‍♂️
How to Use:
1. Drag and drop a text element (e.g., text block or footer) into your email design.2. Select the element and open the color picker.3. Choose and apply your desired background color.This new feature enhances your email design, making it easier to create eye-catching, customized content.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
6 months ago

Square Location Selection

# Selecting Square Location for a Sub-Account While Connecting Square as a Payment Provider## What's New?- New Square customers will see all the physical locations available in their Square account on the LvlUp Integrations page. They can choose which Square location will be associated with each sub-account.- Existing Square customers can reconnect their Square account to allow access for fetching Square locations. This will display all locations on LvlUp's integrations page, enabling customers to select the appropriate location for their sub-account.- By default, a physical location will be selected as soon as the connection or reconnection is successful. Customers can change this selection according to their requirements.- This feature will help businesses track their sales more effectively based on their respective locations.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
6 months ago

View and delete cards on file with the Manage cards feature

# What's New?- This feature allows businesses to manage their existing cards that were either added using the "Card on File" feature or any card that has been used for transactions in the past and is stored for that customer.- Businesses can also delete cards from their file for any customer.- If a card is not associated with any subscription, a standard confirmation pop-up will appear.- For cards associated with an active subscription, deletion is permitted, but a warning will be provided before confirmation is given to delete the card.## Where can we find this feature?Contacts > Contact Details > $ icon > Actions > Manage Cards## Coming Up Next- Support for adding, viewing, and managing cards for PayPal- Support for adding, viewing, and managing cards for Custom Payment Providers- Management of additional payment methods in the UI (beyond just cards)
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
security
users & permissions
new
6 months ago

Permissions Update : Team Management

# What’s NewWe are excited to introduce Granular Permissions for Team Management. This feature provides flexibility in setting view and edit permissions for admins.Under the Account Settings, we have added the following options:-
View Team Members
(Allows only view access)-
Manage Team Members
(Allows the option to edit and delete)# Why is the Feature Important?Previously, all agency-level users and account admins had access to the Team Management or My Staff page, allowing them to edit or delete users based on hierarchy without specific permissions to restrict these actions.Now, permissions have been enhanced to provide more granular control. Even among users who have access to the page, you can:- Enable or disable user management permissions: Admins can either view the team without making changes or be granted full management capabilities.- Control visibility of the page: You can choose to completely restrict access to the page for certain users.This allows for greater flexibility in defining admin roles, ensuring that permissions align with organizational needs.# Preview Images:
Permission Settings:
-
Case 1:
If both View and Manage Team Members are disabled, accessing the Team will not be available in the side navigation.-
Case 2:
Only View Team Members is enabled.-
Case 3:
Edit Team Members is enabled.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
dashboard
new
improved
6 months ago

Sub Account Dashboard and Reporting: Widget Duplication

You can now duplicate widgets directly within a dashboard, saving time and effort when creating similar widgets.# 👀 What’s New?-
Quick Duplicate Action:
Easily copy an existing widget on the same dashboard.-
Streamlined Workflow:
For complex widgets that only require a few adjustments, simply duplicate the widget, make your changes, and save.# 👷 How It Works:1. Enter Edit Mode for the dashboard.2. Click the three-dot menu on any widget card.3. Select
Duplicate
.4. Make your changes and click
Save
.# ⭐ Why It Matters:-
Save Time:
Skip starting from scratch for similar widgets.-
Simplify Customization:
Quickly create variations of a widget with minimal effort.-
Efficiency Boost:
Perfect for dashboards with complex or repetitive widgets.
Image without caption
communities
new
improved
6 months ago

Communities - Move post to a different channel

# New Feature OverviewWe’re excited to announce a new feature that allows you to update the channels of a post.## How to Move a Post to Another Channel:1.
Click the Three Dots:
- Locate the post you want to move.- Click the three-dot menu (⋯) in the top-right corner of the post.
(Note: You can only move posts you've created, or if you're an admin/owner, posts from other members.)
2.
Select "Move to Channel":
- From the dropdown menu, choose the "Move to Channel" option.3.
Choose the Destination Channel:
- A pop-up modal will appear.- Select the channel where you'd like to move the post.✅ That's it! The post will be successfully moved to the selected channel.
This feature is available on both web and mobile.
## Bug Fixes- Resolved issues with recurring payments in the Stripe integration.- Fixed problems with the "Add to Calendar" feature for events (Google Calendar & Apple iCal).- Corrected issues with monthly recurring events.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
6 months ago

Calendars: Payment Element with the Classic Widget

We are excited to announce the integration of the
Payment Element with the Classic Widget!
This enhancement ensures seamless payment functionality across
both
the
Classic and NEO Widgets
, delivering a consistent user experience and reducing confusion.
Payment Gateway Support:
The following payment gateways are now supported in the Classic Widget:- Stripe (Card, Apple Pay, Google Pay, iDEAL, Bancontact)- NMI-
Authorize.net
- Square- Razorpay
Functional Capabilities:
All existing payment functionalities from the NEO Widget are now available in the Classic Widget, including:- Saving cards for future use- Zero-value payments (for the purpose of saving cards)- Full payments- Partial payments- Charging payments for recurring appointments
Key Benefits:
-
Consistency:
Users can now enjoy the same robust payment functionalities, regardless of their widget preference.-
Flexibility:
Businesses can choose between the Classic and NEO Widgets without any limitations in payment features.-
Simplified User Experience:
This update reduces confusion for users by standardizing payment processing across both widgets.This update reaffirms our commitment to providing a seamless and flexible experience for businesses managing their appointments and payments.
documents & contracts
new
6 months ago

Link Email templates to Document Templates & Individual documents

# OverviewYou wanted to create three workflows with three different contracts but were unable to proceed because you could not configure the three unique email templates you desired. Well, now you can!## What's New?- Configure the "From" name and "From" email for both Documents & Contracts templates as well as individual documents.- Set the email subject and template specific to each contract template.## How to Use1. Go to
Payments
→
Documents & Contracts
→
Templates
.2. Open the document and navigate to
Settings
to configure the desired settings at the template level.3. When you use a workflow with this particular template, or if you send a document using this template, the document will be triggered with the custom email you configured.## NoteIf you edit the subject/template from an individual template and save it, any subsequent changes to the global settings will not apply to this specific template. You will need to manually make those changes in the template where you saved the edit.## Why We Built ItTo ensure that different types of contracts could be sent with corresponding emails that provide context.
Image without caption
Image without caption
conversation ai
new
6 months ago

Quick Actions Buttons for Conversation AI bots

# What's New?We’ve introduced Quick Action Buttons on the Bot Menu to enhance bot management and improve the user experience. These updates include options for editing, deleting, duplicating, and setting bots as primary, ensuring streamlined workflows and consistency across the platform.# How it Works?## 1. Quick Actions in Bot Menu:Directly access management options from the bot menu, including:-
Edit Bot:
Retains the existing functionality.-
Delete Bot:
Maintains current deletion logic.-
Duplicate Bot:
Adds a seamless way to replicate bots.-
Set as Primary:
Easily mark a bot as the primary option.## 2. Duplicate Bot Functionality:Use the Duplicate Bot button to create a new bot with the same configuration as an existing one. The duplicated bot will include the following settings:-
Bot Mode:
Off-
Agent Name:
Prefixed with "Copy - [Original Bot Name]"-
Business Name, Goals, Prompt, Channels, Settings, and Custom Actions:
Fully replicated from the original bot.## 3. Set as Primary Option:A new Set as Primary button allows users to designate a bot as the primary from the bot list view page. This functionality follows the existing Set as Primary flow for consistency.These updates aim to empower users with greater control and efficiency in managing their bots, offering flexibility while maintaining a consistent and user-friendly interface.
Image without caption
dashboard
improved
6 months ago

Sub Account Dashboard and Reporting: New Fields and Filters

We have listened to your feedback and added new fields and filters to provide you with greater control and insights within your dashboard and reports.# What’s New?-
Opportunity's Phone Number:
Now available as a table column.-
Opportunity's Primary Contact Name:
Added as both a widget filter and a table column.-
Opportunity's Followers:
Available as a widget filter, table column, and in Group By and View By options.-
Opportunity's Business Name:
Added as a widget filter and table column.-
Opportunity's Tags:
Included as a widget filter and table column.-
Contact's Address:
Now available as a widget filter and table column.-
Contact's Followers:
Added as a widget filter, table column, and included in Group By and View By options.# How It Works:1. Edit any widget (under Contacts or Opportunities).2. Add these new fields as filters or properties to enhance your insights.3. Use Group By and View By for deeper segmentation and visualization.# Why It Matters:These updates make your dashboard and reporting even more powerful:- Enhanced filtering options help you uncover deeper insights.- Improved reporting capabilities ensure that you're seeing the data that matters most.- Provides a more tailored experience by aligning your data with your business needs.
Image without caption
Image without caption
invoicing
new
6 months ago

Invoicing: Import previous invoices from Quickbooks

# What's New?-
Import Invoices from QuickBooks:
Seamlessly import all your invoices from QuickBooks during the initial connection.## How to Use1. Go to
Settings
→
Integrations
→
QuickBooks Connect
.2. Choose
Import Elements:
- Import all previous invoices with a single toggle. Connect the QuickBooks account you want to use.- Click
Next
to proceed.3. Set
Sync Preferences:
Configure settings like sending review requests to automatically gather feedback for completed invoices.Your invoices and contacts will now be imported automatically into your LvlUp account, allowing users to start using the system more seamlessly.## Why We Built It- To centralize invoice management.- To save you time by automating data imports.## What’s Next?-
CSV Import for Invoices & Estimates:
Soon, you’ll be able to upload invoices and estimates via CSV, giving you greater control over your data.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
certificates
new
improved
6 months ago

Set frequency for certificate expiry reminders (emails)

Users can now set their preferred intervals for reminder emails regarding certificate expirations, replacing the default options of 2 and 7 days before expiry.All previously scheduled reminder emails will continue to follow the default intervals of 2 and 7 days unless users choose to modify them.
Edit Reminder Preferences for Certificate Templates:
- Adding an expiry date to a template means that everyone who receives the certificate will have it expire on the same date.- Locate the certificate template where you want to add the expiry option.- Click the three dots > Set Expiry and choose a relevant date to modify your preferences.- For a selected date, you can choose whether you want 2 reminder emails to be sent out or just 1, and you can toggle them on or off.- Add all relevant days for each reminder email. All emails will be sent out after the number of days specified.- The same can be done for all certificates under the Issued Certificates tab for individual-level customization.
Image without caption
Image without caption
app marketplace
improved
6 months ago

App Marketplace | Improvements to App Search and Filtering

# The Marketplace team is excited to release improvements to the Search and Filtering experiences on the App Marketplace.## What's New?
Improved App Search Experience
- The app search now matches the following app properties in order of priority:1. App name2. App tagline3. App description4. App developer name- We have implemented Fuzzy Search, which ignores typos and matches plurals, enhancing the search experience.
App Filtering Experience
- Applied filters are now displayed at the top, with options to clear them individually or all at once.- Users can now multi-select options when filtering apps by category or pricing, allowing for a broader app search.## Why Is This Important?- Discovery is the most critical step in a marketplace's user journey.- Previously, the search only matched the app name, which limited the discovery of relevant apps. This update allows users to find more relevant apps by expanding the search across various app details.- Enhancements to filtering further improve the app discovery experience by providing more flexible filtering options and the ability to clear filters easily.## What's Next?The improved search will be extended to the search experience for consuming products:- Search experience for Marketplace Actions/Triggers in Workflow Builder- Search experience for Web Widgets in Funnel Builder
Image without caption
Image without caption
e-commerce stores
new
6 months ago

Making Shipping detail fields Hidden, Optional or Mandatory in checkout page for E-Commerce Stores

# About:We’re excited to announce that store owners can now fully customize the
Shipping Details
section on the checkout page by setting fields as
Hidden
,
Optional
, or
Mandatory
—streamlining the checkout process for their customers.## What’s New?- Store owners now have the capability to make the following fields in the Shipping Details section
Hidden
,
Optional
, or
Mandatory
:1. Phone Number2. Address3. Country / State4. City5. Zip / Postal CodeThis helps
store owners enable faster checkouts
for their customers by allowing them to collect only relevant and necessary information in the Shipping Details section.## How to Use It?1. Open your Store Builder and edit the
Checkout Page
in your eCommerce store pages.2. Select the
Checkout element
. To make Shipping Details fields
Hidden
,
Optional
, or
Mandatory
, head to the
Advanced Section
in Settings on the right side.3. In the
Form Options
section, select the fields that need to be changed, and the state can be chosen from the dropdown menu.4. Once the fields are finalized,
save and publish
to implement the changes.## Key Points to Note:-
Default State of Fields:
By default, fields in the Shipping Details section will be set to
Mandatory
.-
Shipping Rates Impact:
Shipping rates may be affected if certain fields are missing in the Shipping Details section.-
Live Rates Compatibility:
For live rates from multi-carrier platforms like Shippo, all fields need to be submitted by the user.-
Faster Checkouts:
By tailoring the Shipping Details section, store owners can simplify the process for customers, reducing friction and ensuring a smooth experience.- Shipping details field states can be customized only if Shipping has been toggled on.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
funnels and websites
new
6 months ago

Dynamic Countdown Timer Integration

We have integrated the Dynamic Timer from the Email Builder into the Funnels and Website Builder.## Key Features / Benefits✨
Personalized Contact Timer:
Each contact’s timer can expire based on when they receive or open the email.🎯
Target Specific Customers:
By sending contact-specific timers in emails along with respective live site links that are synced with the timer.📋
Additional Uses:
This contact-specific timer can also be used to target customers for E-commerce sales, event signups, product launches, and limited availability products.## How to Use?1. Open Marketing -> Countdown Timers -> Create a New Timer -> Select Design -> Select Dynamic Timer -> Set Duration and Time -> Save2. Open the Funnels and Website Builder -> Click on Add -> Countdown Timers -> Choose Dynamic Timer3. There you go! 🎉 Now, this timer will be in sync with the timer from the Email Builder.Happy Building! 🛠️
social planner
new
improved
6 months ago

Support Multiple selection & re-ordering media files in Social planner

# Feature EnhancementWe're excited to introduce a new feature that will simplify your experience. With this launch, you can now select multiple media files, such as images and videos, to be published together via the Media Library in the Social Planner.## What’s New?You can now select either individual media files or a group of files that meet your content needs. Previously, you had to select each file separately, which was cumbersome.## How It Works:1. Navigate to the
New Post
button and click on the
Create New Post
option.2. Click on the
Media
icon and select the
Upload from Media Library
option.3. Hover over any image and click on the three dots icon, then select the
Select
CTA.4. Choose any number of media files you'd like to upload.5. You can also rearrange the order of the media files by dragging and dropping them.6. The media files can be edited or deleted using the Image Editor.Voila! You're all set to schedule your post for publishing!
Image without caption
Image without caption
social planner
new
improved
6 months ago

Social Planner- Enhancements and Bug Fixes

# Enhancements and Bug FixesWe're excited to announce the latest enhancements to the Social Planner, designed to make your experience smoother and more efficient.## ✨ Enhancements:1.
Removal of LinkedIn PDF Restriction
- PDFs are no longer limited to A4 size.- The dimensions of PDFs now adjust to the minimum and maximum widths of the images, reducing white space while maintaining consistent page sizes for LinkedIn.2.
New Warning Message UI
- Warnings are now collapsed by default and can be expanded when clicked, reducing UI clutter and drawing attention to errors.3.
Expanded TikTok Options
- For TikTok business accounts, users can now select any privacy level (previously restricted to public only).- For personal TikTok accounts, users can utilize up to 2,200 characters for captions.4.
Improved Category Queue Modal Text
- Clearer instructions have been added to help users make the most of the Category Queue feature.5.
Added Template as Source
- A new source type called “Template” has been introduced.- From now on, any items imported using a templated library will be marked with the source “Template” instead of “CSV.”- These items can now be filtered in both List and Calendar views.6.
Icons for Content Tab
- The Content tab now features icons, enhancing visual clarity and ease of navigation.## 🐞 Bugs:1. Previously, no error message was displayed when a GMB post with a video failed to create. A proper error message is now shown, preventing silent failures.2. Fixed an issue where two notification pop-ups appeared simultaneously in List View.3. Resolved a bug that caused the Schedule button to render incorrectly on the recurring modal.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
blogs
improved
6 months ago

Improved Blogs experience

We hear you! With this new release, we're optimizing your experience on Blogs and making it easier for you to navigate, create, and manage your blogs all in one place.✨
Enhancements
The following usability and experience improvements have been made to Blogs to simplify your blog management:1. New intuitive call-to-action (CTA) for the blog creation landing screen: “+ Create Blog” instead of “+ New.”2. Improved landing experience for first-time users with “Create a new Blog post” displayed on the empty blog post page.3. Dotted icons for multiple options have been brought closer together on the Blog post page.4. Click on the “-” icon at the top of the Import Blog post page to enable multi-selection.5. The blog post count to be imported will now be correctly reflected at the bottom of the page (e.g., “2 Selected Post(s) will be Imported”).6. If imported blog posts are canceled, the user will be directed to the 'Imported content' tab.7. The 'Publish now' CTA will automatically select the current system time and display it in the date picker, similar to the schedule and publish options.8. All CTAs—size, color, and font—have been made consistent.9. A 'link' icon has been added next to all blog posts to navigate to the respective blog post page.10. There will be two separate CTAs: 'Update' for updating the blog post and 'Update settings' for making adjustments to the settings.11. The experience of the Imported Blog post page has been improved by reducing unnecessary space usage.
blogs
new
improved
6 months ago

Blogs - Custom Value Support for Canonical Links

We’re excited to introduce custom value support for canonical links in Blogs. This enhancement provides users with the flexibility to define canonical URLs dynamically for various blog elements, making it easier to maintain precise SEO configurations.🗝️
Key Benefits
1.
Custom Canonical Links for Blog Elements:
- Add and manage canonical links for categories, authors, individual blog posts, and the blog homepage using custom values.2.
Dynamic URL Management:
- Define canonical links dynamically, ensuring accuracy and consistency across your blog content.3.
Improved SEO Flexibility:
- Optimize your blog’s SEO strategy by managing canonical URLs that adapt to content changes with minimal manual effort.🌟
How Does This Work?
1. Create custom values under
Settings
->
Custom Values
tab.2. Copy the custom value and paste it with braces
{{custom value}}
in canonical links for attributes like categories, authors, blog post title, etc., where you want the value to be picked up dynamically.3. That’s it! You're all set to schedule the blog and have your SEO taken care of automatically.🌟
Why This Matters
This feature empowers users to streamline their SEO workflows by reducing redundancy and enhancing control over canonical URLs. It ensures better content indexing, eliminates duplicate content issues, and supports improved search engine visibility.
Image without caption
blogs
new
6 months ago

Blogs - Accessibility Enhancements

We’re excited to introduce enhanced accessibility support for Blogs, designed to ensure that all users, including those who rely on assistive technologies, can seamlessly interact with blog functionalities. This update significantly improves the overall user experience.## Key Features & Benefits1.
Enhanced Accessibility Standards
:The Blogs interface has been updated to comply with accessibility guidelines, making navigation and management more user-friendly for individuals with disabilities.2.
Screen Reader Compatibility
:Core elements within Blogs now work seamlessly with screen readers, providing clear feedback and guidance.3.
Keyboard Navigation Support
:Navigate the Blogs interface effortlessly with new keyboard shortcuts, enhancing usability for users who rely on keyboard navigation.## Why This MattersThis enhancement ensures our platform remains inclusive, enabling users of all abilities to enjoy a seamless and accessible experience. By meeting accessibility standards, we’re fostering a user-friendly environment for everyone.
invoicing
new
6 months ago

Estimates: Auto-Invoicing post acceptance

# What's New?- Users can now enable sending invoices after acceptance in estimates.- Additionally, users can enable direct payments, allowing recipients to be redirected to the invoice immediately after accepting the estimate.# How to Use1. Go to
Payments
->
Estimates
or
Estimate Templates
->
New Estimate
/
New Template
.2. Add the products.3. In
Additional Options
, select
Send Invoice
.4. If you want to redirect the user directly to an invoice instead of sending it via email, select
Direct Payment
.# Why We Built ThisTo simplify the automation of invoices after estimate acceptance.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
conversations
improved
6 months ago

Conversations: Access Trigger Link Keys from the Trigger Links Table 💫

# What's New? 👀We’ve enhanced the Trigger Links table by adding a new column that displays the Trigger Link Key. Now, you can directly access the link key without needing to navigate elsewhere.## Why It Matters?Previously, the Trigger Links table only showed the trigger link name and link URL, making it difficult to retrieve the link key. As a workaround, users had to go to workflows to find and fetch the key. With this new column, the link key is now displayed alongside the existing details, making it easily accessible.
Image without caption
new
6 months ago

Introducing Dynamic Countdown Timer! 🚀

# What’s NewIntroducing a Contact-Specific Countdown Timer that personalizes the timer for each contact based on events such as when an email is sent or opened.## Key Benefits-
Personalized Timers:
Each contact’s timer can expire based on when they receive or open the email (e.g., Contact A’s timer expires at midnight on the same day, while Contact B’s expires the next day).-
Custom Triggers:
Choose to trigger the timer based on either the email sent time or the email opened time (e.g., birthday emails can have timers that end on the same day).-
Set Duration & End Time:
Specify a minimum duration and set a fixed end time (e.g., a 2-hour minimum, ending at 12 PM).## How to Use1. Create a new timer.2. Select Dynamic Timer.3. Set the duration and end time.4. Customize the design.5. Define active and expired links.6. Save and use in emails or funnels, or copy the code.Now, provide a personalized and time-sensitive experience for each contact!
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
new
6 months ago

Automate Tagging Based on Campaign Interactions 🚀

Adding tags based on interactions with email campaigns was challenging, which limited personalization and effective targeting.# What We DidWe have automated the process of adding tags based on user interactions (e.g., link clicks, email opens) by configuring the rules in the send or schedule screen.## Key Benefits1.
Enhanced Personalization:
Target users based on their engagement with the campaign.2.
Improved Automation:
Save time by automatically tagging users without the need for complex workflows.3.
Simplified Segmentation:
Easily create tags based on straightforward user actions.## Limitations- Tags can only be added once per interaction.- Links are uniquely identified by their URL.- Trigger links (e.g., unsubscribe links) are excluded.- Adding tags based on clicks on a specific link is only possible when Tracking Links is enabled.## How to Use1.
Create Your Campaign:
Design and set up your email as usual.2.
Enable Tagging:
In the "Send or Schedule" screen, turn on "Add Tags" and click “Add Conditions.”3.
Set Your Conditions:
Choose your interaction type, trigger, and the desired tag to be added.4.
Save and Send:
Save and send your campaign.5.
View Tags in Stats:
After sending, go to the "Campaign Stats" page and click "Tags" to see your tag summary.6.
See Tagged Contacts:
Click "View Contacts" to see who was tagged based on your conditions.## What’s Coming NextYou will soon be able to add tags directly from the campaign stats page.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
invoicing
new
6 months ago

Redirection to custom URL from Payment Links

# What's New?- Users can now set a custom URL while creating payment links. After a successful payment, the webpage will redirect them to that same URL.- Users can choose whether to redirect in the same tab or a new tab.- If the browser blocks the redirection, users can manually visit the same URL.- A 5-second timer will inform users that they are being redirected.## How to Use1. Go to Payments → Payment Links.2. Create a new Payment Link.3. Select "Enable redirection," enter the desired URL, and choose whether to open in a new tab or the same tab.4. Send the link.When a user completes a payment using that link, they will see an interim screen before being taken to the desired URL.## Why We Built ItWe developed this feature to make payment links more functional, allowing users to embed them in a way that redirects customers to a specific page after a successful payment.
Image without caption
Image without caption
prospecting
new
6 months ago

Prospecting Tool - Now available in Sub-Accounts 🚀

# What's New:The Prospecting Tool has been enhanced to support Sub-Accounts, allowing agencies to streamline and expand their prospecting capabilities more effectively.## How to Enable the Prospecting Tool for Sub-Accounts:1. Navigate to
Agency View
→
Reselling
.2. Locate the
Prospecting Tool
section and enable the toggle to grant Sub-Account access.## Key Features:### 1. Sub-Account Level AccessAgencies can now provide team members with direct access to the Prospecting Tool at the sub-account level, eliminating the need for access to the main agency dashboard.### 2. Reselling to ClientsAgencies can resell the Prospecting Tool to clients by activating it for individual sub-accounts. Clients can independently generate marketing audit reports, track analytics, and manage their prospects.### 3. Independent Prospect ManagementEach sub-account now has its own dedicated view for managing prospects, audit reports, and analytics. Agencies can customize prospecting workflows for individual clients or teams.### 4. Seamless User Experience-
Easy Onboarding:
Sub-account users can quickly get started with minimal setup.-
Integrated Reporting:
Sub-account-specific analytics provide tailored insights.-
Enhanced Permissions:
Agencies maintain control, enabling or restricting features for individual sub-accounts as needed.## Why it Matters for Agencies:This update empowers agencies to:- Delegate prospecting tasks to sub-account users without granting full agency-level access.- Resell the Prospecting Tool to clients as a value-added service, driving additional revenue streams.Kickstart 2025 with more clients. Happy Prospecting, everyone! 🤩
Image without caption
whatsapp
conversation ai
new
6 months ago

WhatsApp Channel in Conversation AI Workflow Action

# What's New?We’re excited to announce the addition of WhatsApp as a supported channel in LvlUp Conversation AI workflow actions! With this enhancement, users can seamlessly set up both
Appointment Booking Conversation AI Bot
and
Conversation AI Q&A Bot
to respond to messages directly on WhatsApp. This expansion improves communication possibilities and enhances customer engagement.## How It Works1.
Access the Workflow:
- Navigate to
Automations > Workflow List
.- Choose to
Edit
or
Create a Workflow
.- Select a
Conversation AI Bot Action
:- Choose either the
Appointment Booking Conversation AI Bot action
or the
Conversation AI Q&A Bot action
.2.
Enable WhatsApp as a Channel:
- In the action settings, locate the
Channel
field.- From the dropdown options, select
WhatsApp
.-
Save the Workflow:
- Save your changes to enable the bot to respond to WhatsApp messages as configured.
Image without caption
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
6 months ago

Calendar Email Notification and Appointment Smartlist Enhancements

We’re excited to announce updates to Calendar Email Notifications and Appointment Smartlists that enhance functionality and improve user experience.## What's New?### Calendar Email Notifications-
Customizable "From" Name, Email, and Subject:
You can now specify the "From" Name and "From" Email in calendar notifications, allowing you to control how emails appear to recipients. When selecting an email template, you can also set the email subject directly.-
Support for Custom Values:
Add custom values for the "From" Name, "From" Email, and Subject fields. Use the custom value selector to easily choose and insert preferred values for personalized notifications.### Appointment Smartlists-
Improved Filter Design:
The Sort By filter layout has been updated for better clarity and a smoother user experience.-
New Filters - Contacts and Source:
You can now filter appointments by Contacts to view only those related to selected individuals. Additionally, use the Source filter to categorize appointments based on their origin.-
Enhanced Error Handling for Filters:
If a contact, user, or calendar linked to a filter is deleted or reassigned:a) A prominent error notification is displayed on the smartlist page.b) An error highlights the issue, while problematic filters are clearly marked with explanations in the filter drawer.-
Assigned Data Only:
Smartlists now align with assigned data settings, ensuring that data visibility is consistent with user roles and permissions.-
User Timezone Support:
Filters such as Upcoming Appointments and time-based filters (e.g., "Today," "Yesterday") now respect the user's timezone for accurate tracking.These enhancements are designed to improve the user experience, make notifications more flexible, and ensure smartlists work seamlessly according to user needs.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
6 months ago

Opportunities - Dynamic Routing for Opportunity Modal

# What's NewWe have introduced dynamic routing for the Opportunities modal. Users can now share direct links to specific opportunities using a new URL structure:
https://app.lvlup.com/v2/location/{locationId}/opportunities/list/{opportunityId}?tab=OpportunityDetails
.## Key Features-
Direct Access:
This feature allows users to access specific opportunities and their corresponding details with a single link.-
Enhanced Collaboration:
It simplifies team workflows by enabling direct navigation to relevant opportunities without the need to search through the list.-
Improved Efficiency:
This saves time by eliminating extra steps to access opportunity details.## How to Use1. Open the desired opportunity in the app.2. Copy the URL from your browser.3. Share the link with your team or stakeholders.
Image without caption
mobile app
conversations
conversation ai
new
improved
1 year ago

Conversation updates - Mobile App - v3.77.3

We're excited to announce our latest update to conversations on the mobile app. We have made several improvements to conversations on mobile, including a better view for replies suggested by conversation AI, the ability to send a review request directly from the conversations screen, and the ability to view external call logs. This update is available on LvlUp, LeadConnector, and White-labelled (update needs to be requested) mobile apps.
What's New
- Conversation AI selection enhanced: Now you can check the complete result generated by the conversation AI before choosing a reply.- Send review request: Easily send a review request to a contact directly from the conversation window.- View external call logs: Access all external calls made to a contact from within the conversation window.
How It Works
1. Open the conversation window of one of your ongoing conversations in the mobile app.2. When the conversation AI generates replies, you can view the complete text of each reply by opening the bottom sheet.3. Choose the most suitable reply by tapping on it.4. You can also send a review request by tapping on the "+" button at the bottom of the chat screen and selecting "Send review request."
Why it Matters
This update enhances conversations on mobile, improving the overall user experience.
Image without caption
Image without caption
calendar
mobile app
new
improved
1 year ago

Calendar updates - Mobile App - v3.77.3

We're excited to announce the latest update to calendars on the mobile app! In this version, we have made several improvements to enhance your scheduling experience.
What's New
- Change contact while scheduling an appointment: Now, you have the flexibility to update the contact information while you are scheduling a new appointment.- Custom value support for custom meeting location: We have added support for custom values within the Custom meeting location field, allowing you to input specific details.- Calendar notes improvements: We have made enhancements to the calendar notes feature. Notes will no longer be truncated, and you can easily view the entire text by tapping on "View more".
Why It Matters
This update brings significant improvements to the calendars module, providing a smoother and more refined experience for all users.Please note that the "LvlUp" mobile app supports this update. If you are using HighLevel, LeadConnector, or a White-labelled version, please request the update.
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
improved
1 year ago

Introducing YouTube Shorts Support in Video Elements!🚀

Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
social planner
new
1 year ago

Schedule your Youtube Video and Shorts in Social Planner😇

Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
whatsapp
new
1 year ago

WhatsApp: Trigger Links and Automated DND

Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
funnels and websites
new
fixed
1 year ago

Funnel/Website builder Enhancements & Bug Fixes

e-commerce stores
new
1 year ago

Manual Payment Method in E-commerce stores

Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
payments
new
1 year ago

BNPL payment methods are now supported in Order form and Payment links

Image without caption
Image without caption
new
1 year ago

CSV product import labels updation for E-commerce stores

new
1 year ago

Bulk Tags New Architecture and Bulk Tags Restore

Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
new
1 year ago

List View Updates in Opportunities

Image without caption
Image without caption
documents & contracts
new
1 year ago

Documents and Contracts: Recurring Products are now supported!

Overview
Another feature to streamline your payments via Documents and Contracts.
What's New?
- You can now add recurring products to your product list in Document Builder.- If your product has a setup fee associated, it will show up as a separate row item.- If you add a one-time product and a recurring product together in the list, the one-time product will only be charged to the user in the first invoice.- You can also add a recurring schedule to your Document templates with the capability to assign the start date as the completed date of the document.
How to Use?
- Add a product list to your document.- Add both recurring and one-time products to the product list.- If a recurring product is added, add a schedule from the product list properties and set the invoice sending date as the document completed date or a custom date (enabled in templates as well).- Once the document is completed, an invoice will be sent. Recurring products will be included if at least one recurring product was added, otherwise, only one-time products will be charged.- Setup fees associated with a product are shown separately in the product list.
Why Did We Build It?
- In our effort to streamline acceptance of invoices after Document Signature, recurring products and setup fees were causing challenges for many of you when using contracts. We have addressed this issue.
What's Next on Payments via Documents and Contracts
- 2 In 1 Documents: Showing the invoice directly after the primary signer signs the document.- One-time Deposit: Collecting a percentage of the total product value in the invoice.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
conversations
improved
1 year ago

💬 Conversations: Enhanced Email Sync for Gmail 📨

We've enhanced how emails sync with your CRM when you connect your personal Gmail email ID to 2-way sync: 🔄
Why this change?
👀Previously, when users connected their personal Gmail email with 2-way sync, all emails with contacts would automatically sync to the CRM.We noticed that in many accounts, users were often added as contacts, causing all emails sent or received by these users to sync to the CRM. This allowed admins and users with contact access to view personal emails within the CRM.Going forward, emails will sync only if they involve contacts who are not system users.
What's New?
🤩Emails sent or received by system users, who are also CRM contacts, will not sync. 🚫Emails are synced only if they include at least one contact who is not a system user. For example, if an email is sent to three recipients, where two are system users and one is not, the email will sync 👍This ensures that emails involving only system users remain private and won't be synced to CRM, even if they're CRM contacts.
conversations
fixed
1 year ago

Outlook 2-Way Sync: Bug Fix 🐞

# Outlook 2-Way Sync: Bug Fix 🐞
Scenario:
We identified and fixed an issue that affected sub-accounts where multiple users connected the same Outlook email ID with 2-Way Sync.
Previously:
Duplicate emails were created when multiple users within a sub-account connected the same Outlook email ID with 2-Way Sync.For example, if two users connected the same Outlook email ID, any email sent by a contact or by the user from their Outlook inbox resulted in two entries of the same email appearing in the CRM.
Now:
This issue has been resolved. Duplicate emails will no longer appear in the CRM, ensuring an accurate email synchronization experience.
conversations
improved
1 year ago

💬 Conversations: Enhanced Email Sync for Outlook 📨

Enhanced Email Sync for Outlook
We've enhanced how emails sync with your CRM when you connect your personal Outlook email ID to 2-way sync.
Why this change?
Previously, when users connected their personal Outlook email with 2-way sync, all emails with contacts would automatically sync to the CRM. However, we noticed that in many accounts, users were often added as contacts, causing all emails sent or received by these users to sync to the CRM. This allowed admins and users with contact access to view personal emails within the CRM.Going forward, emails will sync only if they involve contacts who are not system users.
What's New?
- Emails sent or received by system users, who are also CRM contacts, will not sync.- Emails are synced only if they include at least one contact who is not a system user. For example, if an email is sent to three recipients, where two are system users and one is not, the email will sync.- This ensures that emails involving only system users remain private and won't be synced to CRM, even if they're CRM contacts.
chat widget
new
improved
1 year ago

New Chat Widget Upgrades to Style, Designs and Customisation😎

🥳
What's New?
We're thrilled to unveil a brand-new revolutionary feature in Chat Widget - You can now customize the chat widget according to your taste with the placement, look and feel, and bring more customizations.😇
How Does It Work?
1. Navigate to Sites > Go to Chat Widget2. Click on New to Create Chat Widget3. Select the option between the SMS/Email Widget, Live Chat, or WhatsApp Chat4. Once that is done, you will be able to go to Widget to customize the look and feel with options of different styles and themes. There are options to:- Add Chat Launcher with or without a prompt- Select the Chat icon- Select the theme or customize it according to your brand- Allow users to add a message for first-time and returning visitors- Add Avatar images- Select where you would like to place the widget- Customize the widget dimensions with width and height5. Next is the Chat Window, where you can configure all the static messages visible to visitors. For each type, the chat widget adds extra fields. In the Chat Window, you can:- Add a Chat Window title- Add an Intro message- Allow users to enable email and change the CTA button- Allow users to add their own branding and legal consent for HIPAA6. The last option is messaging, which allows customization of acknowledgments and language settings. You can:- Add support contact details- Customize the acknowledgment message and greetings- Select the language for the chat widget😊
Few Notes
1. If you were already using the chat widget, it will show in the Widget option of the theme with a light blue color2. The WordPress plugin will work for the default widget. The ability for users to select the widget will be part of upcoming releases.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
email builder
improved
1 year ago

Support for Sender Name and Preview Text in Test Emails

Problem Statement:
Users previously faced limitations in providing sender names and preview texts when sending test emails, resulting in an incomplete testing experience.
What We Did:
We have introduced support for sender names and preview texts in test emails. This enhancement allows users to preview emails more accurately before finalizing them for distribution.
Benefits:
-
Time Efficiency:
Enables a quicker and more comprehensive testing of all email details.-
Improved User Experience:
Provides a more realistic preview of how emails will appear to recipients.
How to Use It:
1. Navigate to the Email Marketing section and select Templates.2. Click on the three dots to access the Test Email option.3. Enter the relevant details and send your test email.This update aims to streamline your testing process and enhance user satisfaction by offering a more robust preview functionality.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
communities
new
1 year ago

Communities - now add GIFs to your posts and comments

New Features:Enhanced GIF Support:
Get ready for a whole new level of interaction! GIFs are now more accessible and seamlessly integrated within communities, moving from simple attachments to vibrant inline content for both posts and comments. This exciting upgrade, available on both web and mobile, allows you to add a fun and dynamic touch to conversations by including GIFs directly in your posts and comments.
Enhancements/Fixes:
- Groups Pagination: Groups are now paginated on the communities-builder site, reducing latency of the get groups API and resolving the issue where some groups were not visible when the total number of active and inactive groups exceeded 50.
blogs
funnels and websites
new
improved
1 year ago

Add Blog Post Element with New Blog In Funnels/Website🤩

# Add Blog Post Element with New Blog In Funnels/Website 🤩We're thrilled to unveil a brand-new feature in Blog: the ability to add a Blog Post element to any funnel step or website page, giving you the option to add a new blog with different sorting options.😎 Prerequisite - To use this feature, you need to have a new blog created with its domain and blog posts. Check out our Help Article on
How to create a New Blog
for detailed instructions.😇
How Does It Work?
1. Go to Sites and navigate to the desired Funnels step or Website Page.2. Add the Blog Post element to the page by dragging and dropping it.3. Once the Blog Post element is added, select the blog name.- Note: If you are using the old blog flow, use the default blog site option.4. Filter the blog posts based on your preferences:- Recent Post: Displays the most recent blog posts.- Recent Post by Category: Filters blog posts based on the selected category.- Recent Post by Author: Filters blog posts based on the selected author.- Note: Filtering will be based on the updated date, which is the date when the blog post is published.For more detailed instructions, please refer to our Help Article on
How to Add Blog Post Element in Funnel(s) step or Website(s) page
.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
invoicing
new
1 year ago

Invoices: Introducing Tips

Overview
Business users can now accept Tips on their Invoices from the customers.
What’s New?
- Business users now have the capability to configure and accept tips on invoices from the system.- End users can choose to pay a percentage of the total amount (configured by the business user) or enter a custom tip amount.- This feature covers all types of invoices, including one-time invoices, recurring invoices, and invoices from workflows, documents, and contracts.- Users can configure tips on a global level or per invoice level.- Users also have the ability to refund the entire invoice amount, including tips.
How to Use it?
1. Go to Settings within Invoices and click on Payments Settings.2. Navigate to Invoice Tips and enable the feature, then save.3. Go to the Invoices tab.4. Click on "Create New Invoice" or "Create New Recurring Invoice".5. Click on the three dots at the top and select "Manage Tips".6. Choose the desired percentage for tips and start sending and accepting tips.
Why this feature?
This feature enables service businesses to collect tips on top of their invoice amounts and distribute them to their top performers.
What's next for tips?
- CSV view of tip amounts in transactions- Option to tag a tip to a specific user
certificates
new
improved
1 year ago

Certificates Updates: Expiring Certificates

What's New?
• Introducing expiring certificates in the certificate builder.• Admin can now set an expiry for certificates issued to users.• Expiry can be set at either the template level or the issued certificate level.• On expiry, certificates will no longer be available for preview for the particular user.• Reminder emails will be sent on T-2 and T-7 days before expiry.• Issued certificates take priority over template-level expiry.
Download Certificates
• The certificate download flow has been significantly enhanced and optimized.• It is now fully compatible with all major browsers, addressing the previous issue where users faced difficulties downloading certificates on certain browsers.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
e-commerce stores
new
1 year ago

Product Labels/ Ribbons for products in E-commerce stores

# About:This feature enables store owners to showcase products distinctly on product list and product details pages by allowing them to add customizable product labels or ribbons. Store owners can also set a timer for the product labels, after which the label will be removed.# How to use:Store owners can set up product labels/ribbons for products in their e-commerce stores by navigating to
Payment > Products > Enable Product label
. They can add product labels for each product uniquely and specify the duration for which the label will be displayed.# Notes:- The starting and ending date and time will be set based on the time zone of the sub-account's location.- The end date and time should be later than the start date and time. Additionally, the end date and time should be later than the current date and time for the label to appear.# Images:Setting up the product label:[Image]Preview on website:[Image]
Image without caption
payments
new
1 year ago

IDeal, Bancontact and SEPA Direct Debit payment methods now available

- Business users can now offer additional payment methods across different channels like order forms, forms, invoices, payment links, and online stores to customers.- This feature is available only for businesses using Stripe as their payment provider.- It helps increase conversions by offering payment flexibility to customers in different geographical locations.-
IDeal
is a popular payment method in the Netherlands.-
Bancontact
is a common payment method in Belgium.-
SEPA Direct Debit
is a common payment method in the European Union.- All order and transaction details will be registered under the Payments menu, similar to credit card payments. This includes the functioning of the existing Order Submitted and Payment Received triggers.- This is a migratory change from Stripe's end and requires changes to propagate to all accounts over a few days. Some accounts may already have access to this feature, while others are still in the process of receiving it.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
communities
new
improved
1 year ago

Communities Updates: Weekly subscription and Enhancements

We've got some exciting updates in this release to make user engagement even better:
What's new?
- Weekly subscription is now available for courses.
Enhancements/Fixes:
- Added support for non-English languages in member search.- Fixed video playback issues.- Thumbnails are now generated for uploaded videos without any issues.- Added support for picture-in-picture mode for video attachments.- Improved landscape mode functionality on Android devices.- Optimized post and comment image attachments by compressing them to the
webp
format. This reduces image size by 30-50% without sacrificing quality, resulting in quicker loading times and a better overall viewing experience.- Implemented pagination for the groups list in the sidebar.- Resolved the issue of attachments getting replaced due to the same name.This release focuses on stability and optimizations to enhance the overall user experience and ensure smooth engagement.
Image without caption
calendar
new
improved
1 year ago

Cancellation & Reschedule Policy (For the Booking Widget)

The Cancellation & Reschedule Policy setting allows you to define the time frame during which bookers can access the cancellation or reschedule link on the booking widget.
What's New?
Previously, bookers could cancel or reschedule appointments at any time through the booking widget. Now, businesses can set specific time frames after which the cancellation or reschedule links are disabled, requiring bookers to contact the business directly for any changes.
How to Use?
1. Go to calendar settings and select the desired calendar.2. Head to the Notifications and Additional Options section.3. Turn on "Allow Cancellation" and "Allow Rescheduling".4. Specify the time range after which the links should be disabled. (Note: Keeping the value blank means the link will never expire and the booker can access it anytime.)
When the above setting is enabled:
A cancellation and a rescheduling link will be added to the additional notes section and included in the calendar invite. These links will expire as configured, preventing the booker from canceling or rescheduling the meeting.
Image without caption
automations
fixed
1 year ago

Workflow - Trim Message body fixed

What's New?
Going forward, the message body will no longer be trimmed to 100 characters.
Previous Behavior
When a wait step was added and afterward the user added
{{message.body}}
in an action, the message was automatically trimmed to only 100 characters.
Current Behavior
The
{{message.body}}
variable will now always return the entire message body.
e-commerce stores
new
1 year ago

Shipping & Delivery rates based on States/Province in Ecommerce stores

# About: Store owners who were selling products in a specific states/ provinces only within a country, due to which there was a challenge in setting up Shipping & Delivery charges. With this feature, store owners can now define shipping & delivery charges for selected states/ province within a country. # How to use: Store owners can setup Shipping & Delivery charges for their Ecommerce stores at: *Payment > Settings > Shipping & Delivery > Add Zones*. While choosing zones, user can choose specific states/ province in a country. Store owners can also set a conditional pricing based on amount for the specific zones. # Notes: - Store owners can create differential pricing for multiple shipping zones based on states/ province. - Once a states/ province is added in a zone, it can't be added to another zone. - While defining rates, delivery rates can be defined for specific zones according to the total amount in the cart. For eg- Free Shipping, if the order amount is above $500 or else, charge $10 if it's below $500. # Images:
Image without caption
new
1 year ago

Revamped Contact Restore App

# What's New? This update introduces a new module federated app within CRM-frontend called contact-restore, replacing the existing contact restore component. The user interface has been redesigned for a better user experience. # Restoring a Single Contact: 1. Click on Contacts. 2. Click on Restore in the tabs on the top. 3. Click on Restore on the right of any of these contacts on the top right, and this modal will appear. 4. Click on Confirm. This will restore the contact(s): - Opportunities - Notes - Tasks - Appointments - Conversations - Campaigns/Workflows # Restoring Multiple Contacts: 3. Select multiple contacts and restore all of them in one go. 4. Click on **Confirm** to restore all of these contacts and their related Opportunities, Conversations, Notes, Tasks, Appointments, and Manual Actions.
Image without caption
saas mode
new
1 year ago

Bulk enable feature/re-billing for sub-accounts across WF, Reviews, Content AI and Premium Triggers & Actions

**🪄 New Feature** **✅ Agencies can enable or disable features and rebilling for locations in bulk** As an agency admin, you can now manage feature availability and rebilling for multiple sub-accounts at the same time using bulk actions. This bulk operation capability is available for the following features: 1. Workflow AI 2. Reviews AI 3. Content AI 4. LC - Premium Triggers & Actions Under **Agency view > Settings > LC - Premium Triggers & Actions**, you can see a checkbox associated with every location on the left of each row. You can select one or more of these and change feature availability using the **Actions** button on the top left. Similarly, you can enable and set up rebilling. You can also disable rebilling in bulk. Similarly, these actions can be performed for other products/features using the steps mentioned above.
Image without caption
memberships
improved
fixed
1 year ago

Courses - enhancements and fixes

Quizzes and Assignment Edit Page Revamp What’s New? - Seamless Design: The revamped Edit page boasts a sleek and intuitive design, enhancing user experience with a clean, modern interface that simplifies assessment creation and editing. - In-House Editor Integration: By transitioning from TinyMCE to our in-house editor, we’ve streamlined the editing process, providing a more cohesive and efficient toolset tailored specifically to our platform’s needs. Comments Pages Revamp What’s New? - Introducing the new and improved comments management pages (Manage Comments and Product Comments) - Managing comments at both location and product level is more engaging and smooth now. - Seamlessly manage user feedback across courses and products with enhanced features. - Tip-Tap Editor integration across all our text editors to make it more consistent with GHL-UI. Bug Fixes - Support for iframe, embed, and object tag in Text Editor: Add and edit iframes, embedded content, and object tags directly in the text editor. - Support for Inline Images: Insert images directly within text, enhancing document visuals. - Offer Thumbnail Issues: Resolved display issues with offer thumbnails for better consistency. - Video Transcoding fixes Offer Checkout Flow fixes - Enhancements - Multiple File Support in Lesson Attachments: Attach multiple files to lesson posts, making it easier to share comprehensive materials. (.svg+xml, .png, .webp, .jpg, .jpeg, .mp4, .webm, .mov, .quicktime, .pdf, .doc, .docx, .ppt, .pptx, .xlsx, .zip, .mp3, .csv, .gif, .txt, font files, audio files, other image types are supported.)
lc phone system
new
1 year ago

Incoming call priority

**🪄 New Feature** **➡️ Forward calls to business phone number** You can choose to enable or disable call forwarding to your business phone number under **Settings > Phone Numbers > Advanced Settings > Voice Calls.** **🔔 Ring User Assigned to Called Number** For an incoming call from a known contact, you can choose to route the call to the agent assigned to the contact by enabling the checkbox. Alternatively, you can disable the checkbox to route the call to the agent linked to the called number. This option resides under **Settings > Phone Numbers > Advanced Settings > Voice Calls.**
Image without caption
automations
new
fixed
1 year ago

Error handling in deleted workflows

What’s New? **Error handling in deleted workflows** - Now if you try to load a deleted workflow using a URL an error message will pop up stating that "Workflow was not found".
Image without caption
email builder
new
1 year ago

Latest Updates to the Email Builder

We have brought some exciting updates to the email builder to ensure an enhanced user experience and optimize the process of creating symmetric and impressive designs. # **New Feature** **Search in Saved Elements** **What’s New: **Users can now quickly access their saved items inside the email builder using our recent release of the search bar. **Benefits:** - **Efficiency:** Save time by reusing popular components without the need to recreate them from scratch. - **Better Organization:** Easily locate and manage saved elements, improving workflow and design consistency. Check out the [help article](https://help.gohighlevel.com/support/solutions/articles/155000002467-how-to-save-items-in-email-builder-for-quick-access-/preview) for saving, renaming, accessing and searching your saved elements. **Enhancements** **1. TikTok and Yelp Icons in Social Media Element** **What’s New**: We've added TikTok and Yelp icons to our social media element. Previously, users had to manually insert custom URLs and icon images, which often led to inconsistencies in appearance. **Benefits:** - **Consistency**: Ensure visual uniformity with the rest of your social media icons. - **Ease of Use:** Simplify the process of adding and maintaining social media links in your emails. **2. GIF Support in Image Elements and Video Thumbnails** **What’s New:** You can now add GIFs, up to 10MB, to your email builder. Additionally, GIFs can be used as video thumbnails, enhancing the overall user experience. **Benefits:** - **Dynamic Content:** Create more engaging and dynamic emails with animated GIFs. - **Enhanced Visual Appeal: **Use GIFs as video thumbnails for a more interactive visual presentation. Check the[ help article](https://help.gohighlevel.com/a/solutions/articles/155000002473?portalId=48000045315) to learn detailed steps. We hope these updates will significantly enhance your email building experience, making it more efficient and visually appealing. Happy emailing!
Image without caption
invoicing
improved
1 year ago

Support for Zero amount Invoices

**What's new?** - We have started supporting invoices which will have 0 net payable amount. How to generate them? 1. 100% Discounts 2. Negative Priced Items - Zero amount invoices will get generated directly in paid state & Receipts will be generated for them **Why do we need them?** - **Compliance & Record Keeping** - They help in tracking and documenting all transactions, which is essential for internal audits and financial transparency. In some jurisdictions, businesses might be required to document all transactions, including those where no payments are made - **Marketing & Promotions** - Issuing a zero amount invoice for complimentary services or goods provided at no charge can serve as a professional way to acknowledge the transaction, reinforcing customer relationships and ensuring clear communication - **Dispute Resolutions **- If a dispute arises regarding the delivery of goods or services, a zero amount invoice serves as proof that the transaction occurred, even though no payment was involved
Image without caption
new
1 year ago

Opportunities List View

We're excited to announce a significant enhancement to our platform: the introduction of the List View for Opportunities, now available via Labs. # What is List View? The new tabular View transforms how you can interact with your opportunities by providing a detailed, streamlined, and customizable view. Here’s what you can do with it: **Opportunities in a Listed View: **See all your opportunities organized in a clear, tablular format. **Sorting Across Fields:** Easily sort your opportunities by multiple fields - Opportunity Name, Value or Date Created. **Customizable Fields: **Choose which fields you want to display in your list view. You can also resize and reorder these fields. **Full Feature Parity with Board View: **All the features like the Advanced filters and Search functionality in the board view are available in the list view too. # How to Access: To start using the List View for Opportunities: 1. Go to Labs in your subaccount settings. 2. Enable the "Opportunities List View" feature. 3. Navigate to your Opportunities section and switch to the List View from the top right toggle. # Benefits of the List View: The List View offers several key advantages that can enhance your productivity and streamline your workflow: **Enhanced Visibility: **Check out more opportunities displayed in the same view **Increased Customization: **Tailor your columns to display or export the information that matters most to you. * Note: This feature is currently in Labs and can disrupt custom CSS/JS changes across all your Opportunity views. Request you to please get all your major changes done before the Live Date (tentatively 20th July 2025) to avoid any possible disruptions *
Image without caption
conversations
improved
1 year ago

🤩 User Experience Improvements in Conversations

# What's New? 🤩 ↗️ **Contact Avatar Interaction:** Users now have the flexibility to choose between opening contact details in a new tab or the same tab directly from conversations. This update empowers users by allowing them to customize their experience according to their preferences. **Open in Same Tab:** Click on the contact avatar. **Open in New Tab:** Click on the "Open in new tab" icon beside the contact name. ✉️ **Email Conversations** - Tooltips Added: Tooltips for "Reply" and "Reply All" options in email conversations to enhance user understanding. - Significantly enhanced the loading speed 🚀 of emails.Users can now enjoy faster access to their email content for a more efficient experience. - Implemented fixes for intermittent issues with loading user signatures.
Image without caption
lc phone system
new
1 year ago

Updates to Wallet Recharge Frequency

We're implementing a change aimed at optimizing your wallet experience by reducing unnecessary recharges. Starting soon, you'll notice adjustments to our auto-recharge feature. **What's Changing?** - Recharge Optimization: To streamline your wallet management, we're introducing a modification that reduces the frequency of auto-recharges. Specifically, after triggering three auto-recharges in a single day, your recharge amount will increase automatically. **What You Need to Know** - Notification Process: If you reach the three-recharge threshold, you'll receive an email notification informing you of this change. - Managing Your Settings: You retain full control over your recharge preferences. Should you wish to adjust your recharge amount, you can easily do so from the billing page. - Next Recharge Amount: If your current recharge amount is in one of the specified tiers, the next recharge amount will be the next tier amount in the sequence. For example: **(I)** If your current recharge amount is $10 and it triggers the three recharges on the same day, your next recharge amount will be $25. **(II)** If your current recharge amount is $100 and it triggers the three recharges on the same day, your next recharge amount will be $500. - Disabling Auto Upgrade: Currently, we do not have a feature to disable the auto-upgrade functionality. However, we're continuously working to improve our services and may consider adding this option in the future. **Why It Matters** We understand the importance of balance management and strive to provide solutions that best meet your needs. This adjustment ensures a more balanced approach to wallet recharges, offering greater control and flexibility.
lc phone system
new
fixed
1 year ago

Messaging analytics for LC phone and Advance Settings

🪄 New Feature

📈 Messaging Analytics

We're excited to introduce Messaging Analytics for LC phone clients, now accessible under the Phone Number page. Gain insights into and track the effectiveness of your SMS campaigns.

Key Features:

Comprehensive Metrics: Monitor sent, delivered, undelivered, and error rates.
Advanced Filtering: Utilize filters like campaign, workflow, and bulk request along with date filters to drill down into your data.
Detailed Reports: Access detailed message reports for each status, with the ability to navigate directly to the conversation page for full context.

How It Works:

Navigate to the Settings > Labs. Select Messaging Analytics > Enable.

⚙️ Advanced Settings Enhancements

Enhance your control with two new additions to the Advanced Settings tab under the Phone Number page.

🎛️ SMS Limit

Set and monitor SMS sending limits for subaccounts. View current limits and track how often these limits are reached.

How It Works:

Navigate to the Settings > Labs. Select SMS Limit > Enable.

📱 Voicemail & Missed Call Textback Settings

Upload custom voicemail greetings and set up incoming call timeouts to better manage caller experiences.

How It Works:

Navigate to the Settings > Labs. Select Voicemail & Missed Call Textback > Enable.

🐞 Bug Fixes

  1. Phone Number Relinking/Delinking: We've fixed an issue affecting the relinking and delinking of phone numbers to the A2P messaging service across multiple accounts.
  1. A2P Submission Error: The "Invalid status transition for bundle" error, which occurred in A2P submissions when the customer profile was in draft, has been successfully resolved.
Image without caption
memberships
communities
client portal
new
1 year ago

Kollab is now live in App Store (iOS)

We’re super excited to share that Kollab is now rocking it on the iOS App Store! It’s time to elevate your client portal experience to epic new heights! Getting started is easy! - Simply visit the App Store, search for Kollab by LeadConnector , and tap "Download." - Within minutes, you'll be ready to use Kollab! **How to sign-in:** - Make sure you are signed up with a Community group, Course or Client Portal. - Use the same credentials to sign-in i.e. same email ID and password. - If you have forgotten your password (just like me!), Sign in with OTP - If you are a part of multiple domains, you'll receive the option to choose which domain to enter into. Choose the relevant one to sign-in. - Once you are signed-in, enjoy your courses, groups all on the go!
New
Improved
Calendar
1 year ago

Appointment Webhooks

We're thrilled to announce the launch of our very first calendar webhooks! This is a significant milestone for our developer community, as it provides them with seamless integration and real-time updates.
What's New?
Now, you can effortlessly stay in the loop with three key triggers:
  • AppointmentCreate: Receive notifications when a new appointment is made.
  • AppointmentUpdate: Stay informed when an appointment is modified.
  • AppointmentDelete: Get alerts when an appointment is removed.
This feature enhances the developer experience by providing real-time updates, making appointment management easier and more efficient.
New
E-Commerce Stores
1 year ago

Search bar element in E-commerce stores

Background:
Browsing through the list of products in an Ecommerce store can be a challenging task, leading to complex user experience as many products may go unexplored. To tackle this, we are introducing a brand new element to our Ecommerce stores - the Search bar! Store owners can now add the Search bar element in two ways:
  • Within the navigation menu
  • As a dedicated element on the website
How to use?
Navigate to the page builder of your store and add the 'Search bar Element' which can be found under the 'Store' section in 'Add elements'. If you would like to enable the Search bar in your navigation menu, you can use the 'Show Search bar' toggle present in the navigation menu settings.
  1. Configure properties for the Search bar. Some of the properties that can be configured include:
  • Search button color
  • Search input box text and background color
  • Search dropdown text and background color
  • Border color for input field and dropdown
  • Font size and weights
  1. Click on 'Save/Publish' to view your changes on your site!
Note:
  • Only websites with stores can add this element to any page (Store, non-store).
  • Navigation menu customization for the search bar is limited. All customization options are available only in the standalone element.
  • The search suggestions (Dropdown) will have search results based on the title/name of the product.
  • Upon clicking on search, the user is navigated to the product list page, showing search results, which would be based on both the title and description.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
memberships
improved
fixed
1 year ago

Courses - Revamped Post Details page and Improvements for Revenue Analytics

# Post details revamp **What’s New?** - Introducing the new and improved Lesson Details Page – your go-to guide for getting the most out of your learning journey! Explore each lesson with updated features, making learning easier and more enjoyable than ever. - Presenting our new video player, designed for an upgraded viewing experience. - Enjoy effortless file management with our improved upload and download features. - Explore our upgraded text editor for a smoother writing process. **Deleted offers in revenue analytics** - What’s New? - Previously, when offers were deleted, they were not included in the revenue analytics data, leading to inconsistent information. - Now, deleted offers will be included in the revenue analytics dashboard, providing more accurate insights into one-time purchase revenue. - In the charts, deleted offers will be represented by different shades of red, making it easier to distinguish them from active offers. - Additionally, deleted offers will be displayed in a table format, with a column indicating the date of deletion, enhancing visibility and understanding of the data. **Bug Fixes** - Upsell Deleted Offer Fixes
Image without caption
new
1 year ago

Exposing Media Attachment in Custom Value Picker

What's New?
  • Until now, we were only exposing the Message Subject and Message Body in workflows. This was limiting for users with media attachments in the messages.
  • Moving forward, you'll also be able to use Message Attachments from the custom value picker.
How to Use?
  • Select the 'Message' option in the Custom Value Picker.
  • Then select 'Message Attachment'.
Image without caption
New
Automations
1 year ago

What's New Feature

What's the Update?
  • Our aim is to keep customers informed about our new and incredible features and to increase their adoption by enhancing feature visibility.
How to Use?
  • Users will find a chip on the top bar labeled 'What's New - Automation Updates'. By clicking on this, they can view a catalogue of our newly released features, and select any to read a summary.
  • Upon opening a feature summary, users have two options: Click 'Let's Get Started' to immediately go to that feature (which also removes it from the catalogue), or click 'Don't Show Again' to simply remove it from the catalogue.
  • If available, a 'Learn More' button will direct the user to a support document related to the feature.
What's the Benefit?
  • Users receive immediate updates on our fantastic new features as soon as they go live.
  • Enhances feature visibility.
  • Boosts feature adoption.
Improved
Funnels And Websites
1 year ago

Edit Forms and Surveys from Funnel/Website builder 🔥

What's New?
  • We've introduced a new edit button for the form and survey elements in the funnel builder.
  • Users can now directly open the form or survey builder from the funnel builder to make changes on the fly.
  • When you click the edit button, the respective builder will open in a new tab.
  • Once you make changes in your forms and surveys, they will automatically be visible in the funnel preview.
  • Refreshing the funnel builder will also reflect the changes in the builder.
Bug Fix
  • We've fixed a bug where changing the form or survey name didn't correctly reflect in the funnel builder. Now, when a user changes the name, the correct name will appear in the form or survey select dropdown in the funnel builder.
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Social Planner
1 year ago

Social Planner - Notification for Failed Post, Account PreExpiry, Account Post Expiry and Approved Post🤩

We're thrilled to unveil the brand-new Email Notification Settings for Social Planner! This feature will save you from the hassles caused by failed posts, rejected scheduled posts, or account expiry.😎
🤩 What’s New?
We have a total of six notifications:
  • Account Expired - For social accounts whose tokens have expired.
  • Account PreExpiry - For social accounts like Facebook pages that have an expiry of 90 days. Around the 80th day, users get notified to refresh the token.
  • Request for Approval - For social posts that are scheduled for approval, requesting the user to approve the scheduled post.
  • Post Approved update to Creator - This notifies the creator of the post if the scheduled post was approved.
  • Post Rejected update to Creator - This notifies the creator of the post if the scheduled post was rejected.
  • Post Failed - Notifies selected users when the scheduled post has failed. To change the template, users can click on settings to edit the template, or they can edit the template from Emails > Template > New > Template Library. In the template library, on the side navigation, there is an option to change the system templates.
How It Works:
To set up the notification, navigate to Marketing > Social Planner. There is an option for Settings beside the 'Create New Post' option. Users can enable or disable the email notifications.😊 Why it Matters:
For Social Planner, these updates are a game-changer. We've seen a good number of agencies experience issues with their social scheduled content not publishing due to the social account expiry, unapproved posts, or failures due to several different reasons.
🥇 Help Article - Notification for Failed Post, Account Expired, and Post Approval
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Social Planner
1 year ago

Social Planner - Updated UI Settings 🎉

We're thrilled to unveil the brand new user interface (UI) for Social Planner!
What's New?
We are introducing an improved UI to enhance user experience. The updates include changes to Social Planner settings such as Integrations, Notifications, Watermark, and Categories.
As Social Planner grows with an increasing number of social accounts, the screen requires a lot of scrolling to find expired accounts and to connect new ones.
With the option of creating new categories, improved tags, and pagination, we are also now able to render the watermark image in the list view. These changes will bring better organization and improved UI to Social Planner.
These updates are a game-changer for Social Planner. We have seen a significant number of agencies experience issues with their social content not publishing due to social account expiry, unapproved posts, or failures due to various other reasons.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Invoicing
1 year ago

We now support BNPL for invoices

**What's new?** - New payment method for invoices: - BNPL Payment methods : Klarna, Affirm, Afterpay/Clearpay **How can i take advantage of these new payment methods?** - These payment methods will be available when paying via stripe - These methods are available for one time invoice and recurring invoice without auto-payment - The payment methods you might be able to avail will depend on region and currency in which payment is made Note: Customers have the option to turn BNPL off from their stripe dashboard inside payment configuration "Invoice"
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Invoicing
1 year ago

Fetching Product Descriptions and Name editing made easy in Invoices!

We're excited to unveil a couple of enhancements we've added to invoices! **Whats New ?** **Improved Product Description Import:** - Users will now be able to add product descriptions to their invoices and edit them before it goes on to the invoice. If anyone prefers to not import these, they can easily disable it from the invoice settings. **Improved Autofilling** - We've enhanced autofilling of card and contact information on Payment Links and Invoices. Now, any autofilling extensions and browsers can automatically fill in user and card information if configured. This functionality even extends to LastPass users. **Making the Invoice Name More Prominent!** - Currently, configuring the invoice name is possible from the invoice editor toolbar. However, we've noticed that many invoices in the system are being saved with the default name. To address this, we've introduced an invoice name text box on the Send Invoice popup. If users want to update the name, they can do so directly from this popup, ensuring they're always aware of the invoice name being sent.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
New
Automations
1 year ago

Google Sheets New Action Type - Lookup Multiple Spreadsheet Row(s)

Thrilled to announce that we have launched a new action type to the Google Sheets action. **What’s New?** Ability to look up multiple rows in Google Sheets. The action type will go through the sheet and respond as output all the rows that are satisfying the lookup conditions. **How to use?** - Go to Workflows and select google Sheets Action. - Select the account, drive, spreadsheet and the worksheet. - User will have an option to start the search from the bottom or top - Select the column you want to search and the value that you want to search - User can also select how many rows should be extracted in the output. - The option to have case sensitive lookup and to create a new spreadsheet if the value is not found. **Use Cases** - Extract data based on categories. - Find leads matching a certain criteria. - Work on data with specific values.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Conversations
1 year ago

🤩 User Experience Improvements in Conversations:

🔗 **Automatic Link Formatting:** - All links and URLs included in emails will now be automatically displayed as clickable links. - Please note that for a link to be automatically formatted as clickable, it must include a scheme (such as https:// or http://), a domain name, and a top-level domain name. - Clicking on the link will open the respective page in a new tab. ↗️ **Improved Contact Avatar Interaction:** - Clicking on contact avatar will now automatically open the contact details page in a new tab. - This allows for uninterrupted conversations and ongoing calls while accessing contact information.
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Certificates
1 year ago

Certificates in workflows

Key Features - Introducing certificates triggers and actions in workflow. - Users can trigger a workflow actions based on certificate issued trigger. - They can also add filters based on certificate templates and different conditional operators. - Users can also choose certificate templates for actions, and as a result the particular template will be issued as a certificate.
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Payments
1 year ago

Enable Stripe connected accounts to manage their payment methods

What's new? Now, connected accounts within Stripe can take control of their payment methods. This new feature puts the power in the hands of each sub-account, allowing them to tailor their payment processes to fit their unique needs and clientele. Customers can now fine-tune their payment options, enabling or disabling specific methods with ease. This flexibility means they can curate a payment experience that aligns perfectly with their business goals. We're also rolling out customizable configurations for different product areas, giving users even more control. For example, they can offer "Buy Now, Pay Later" options in their online store for small purchases, while only keeping card and Bank debits in high value Invoices . Previously Unavailable Flexibility Before this update, connected accounts had limited control over their payment methods. This lack of flexibility meant that all customers had the same set of options, regardless of their preferences. Now, with the ability to manage their own payment methods, users can adapt their payment processes to better suit their needs and preferences.How to customise Sub-account users need to navigate to their **Stripe dashboard** for specifically turning on/off payment methods to display. Navigate to **Settings -> Connect -> Payment methods -> Your account** to see the list of payment methods activated by LeadConnector. Remember to select LeadConnector configurations in the dropdown here since there can be more platforms your Stripe account is connected to. Refer to the image below
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Automations
1 year ago

Multi Select for Forms, Surveys, Contains Phrase and Exact Match

**Problem Statement** - As there was no multi select functionality and users were not able to select the same filters again they had to create multiple triggers. - After this release the same can be achieved in 1 single trigger. **New functionality** - Now users will be able to select multiple options in Forms, Surveys, Contains Phrase and Exact Match fields. - This will work as an "Or" functionality. For eg. if in FB - Comments on a Post trigger, contains phrase field 5 options are present then the trigger will execute if the contact has commented any one of the phrases. **How to use?** - Forms & Surveys- In the trigger the ability to select multiple options by clicking on them from the dropdown will be available for filters. - Contains Phrase & Exact Match - In the trigger the ability to select multiple options will be available by pressing "Enter" or "Return" after typing the text.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Fixed
LC Phone System
1 year ago

Call Transcriptions and other Enhancements

🪄New Feature*✍️ Call Transcriptioncall transcriptions for recorded calls. With call transcriptions, users can now maintain accurate records of all conversations, aiding in documentation and compliance requirements..
Automatic Transcriptions: Transcriptions will be automatically generated for all outbound and inbound recorded calls, saving you time and effort. Easy Activation: Location/Agency administrators can enable call transcription conveniently under advanced settings in the voice calls tab, streamlining the setup process..
Enhanced Visibility:** Transcriptions will be seamlessly integrated into the conversation page, providing easy access and reference to call content.
*How will this help?. Efficient Documentation: With automatic transcriptions, you can maintain accurate records of all conversations without manual effort, improving documentation and compliance.. Convenient Review:** Easily review call content without the need to listen to entire recordings, enhancing accessibility and efficiency.
*How It Works:. Navigate to the Settings > Phone Numbers. Go to Advanced Settings > Voice Calls. Enable Call Transcription***⚙️ Enhancements**. Outbound SMS and Calls are now automatically disabled for paused or deleted locations. Revised outbound messaging logic to seamlessly support international messaging. Now, in addition to checking the country code, we also verify same-country requests using phone number extensions like +43 or +91, enhancing message delivery accuracy. Implemented proper error messages and notifications for suspended sub-accounts. Updated the Lead Connector logo to its new design. Enhanced user experience by displaying accurate error messages for the Missed Call Text Back feature on the UI*
🐞Bug Fixes**. Fixed an issue where saving a single custom SMS provider was causing errors, ensuring smooth functionality.. Resolved an issue where sub-accounts were not automatically linking to the telephony system for agencies with automatic linking enabled, ensuring seamless integration and functionality.. Fixed an issue where moving an agency out of the ISV endpoint was not functioning properly on the support portal, restoring the functionality for smooth operation. Corrected an issue where manual entry of area codes in the Add Number Pool feature was not yielding search results, ensuring users can efficiently find and manage numbers.. Added a backup condition to determine number type, resolving an issue where the A2P banner was not displaying correctly, ensuring accurate representation of number types.
New
Improved
Automations
1 year ago

Nested workflow folders in Snapshots

**What is new?** - Nested Folders is now supported by Snapshots. - Users will be able to organise their folders and carry the same through Snapshots to their multiple sub accounts.
Improved
Fixed
Communities
1 year ago

Communities: App bug fixes, comments sharing and more!

Hey there! We've got some exciting updates this release to make user engagement, experience & security of the data even better: **New Features:** - Push notifications for all existing in app notifications are enabled for android, windows, linux and MacOS devices via browser. - Sharing comments is now possible via Copying links to comments (click on 3 dots on a comment to share) **Enhancements:** - Web Updates: 1. Post & Comment editor: Improved user experience for add links to post content for both Web and Mobile UI. Improved attachment adding flow for mobile UI. 2. Managing notification redirection for deleted posts: Clicking a notification for a deleted post will now display a message indicating that the post has been deleted. **Mobile UI Transitions:** On switching tabs in mobile UI, users get a premium experience because of smooth UI transitions. Bug fixes: - Fixed a bug in the grant group access action of the workflow, which failed to add users to a group if they were already marked as in the requested state. - Fixed bug in post view where comment editor was not visible in case of lots of existing comments. - Sidebar & Channel settings bug fixes for both web and mobile.
New
Documents & Contracts
1 year ago

Send Quotes with Optional Items (Checklist) for your Signers in Documents & Contracts

If you were not able to send quotes so far because you wanted your clients to be able to select optional services alongwith the fixed ones in the contract, not anymore. **What’s New? / Key Features / Benefits:** - Ability for Document Creators to add optional items in the Product List - Ability to Toggle and make the quantity editable for the signer and set limits on minimum and maximum quantity that can be selected - Ability for Toggle and make the item optional for the signer. - Product List gets assigned to the primary recipient by default. - Total Amount gets updated on the basis of items that are in selected stage only. **How to Use?** - Add a Product List - Add a new product - Enable Quantity editing from the **Edit Quantity** Toggle - Make a product selectable/unselectable from the **Optional Item** Toggle **Why This Feature?** - Clients will now be able to send custom quotations with selectable items with ease.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Invoicing
1 year ago

Enhanced Apple Pay & Google Pay Support for Branded Domain Names (Invoice, Text2Pay and Payment Link )

**What's New?** We're excited to announce an enhancement to our Apple Pay and Google Pay support! Now, Apple Pay and Google Pay will seamlessly integrate with branded domain names at the Sub-Account level for Invoice, Text2Pay, and Payment Link functionalities. **Was this Already Available?** Previously, when we introduced branded domain names at the Sub-Account level, this feature encountered a hiccup due to Stripe's compliance requirements to register each domain name. However, we've made significant upgrades to our infrastructure. Our workers now actively monitor branded domain name changes and automatically register them with Stripe. Please note that this automatic registration feature is contingent upon enabling the "Register domains for Apple Pay" toggle from the Stripe integration page. Moreover, to provide even greater control, we've introduced a new button on the Stripe integration page. This button allows you to manually resync the registered branded domain name with Stripe, ensuring seamless operation.
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
E-Commerce Stores
1 year ago

Partial Fulfilment of Orders placed on E-Commerce Stores

**About**: Store owners will now have the ability to partially fulfil their orders manually on the platform. Specific items which are partially fulfilled by the store owners will have their separate tracking details. Users will receive communications of tracking details over email for the orders partially fulfilled.**Steps to partially fulfil an item in an order:** 1. Partial fulfilment can be accessed under Payments > Orders > View Order Details > Fulfil items. 2. In Fulfil items, choose the quantity of each item that needs to be fulfilled in an order. Add tracking details i.e, Tracking Number, Shipping Carrier, & Tracking URL. Store owners can also choose an option to notify users regarding their shipment details via email. 3. In the order details page, items that have been partially fulfilled will have their details along with item name, quantity & tracking details under Fulfilment(s).
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Fixed
Conversations
1 year ago

Appointment Activities in Conversations Module:

👀 **What's New:** 📆 **Cancelled Appointments:** - The "View Appointment" option is now enabled for cancelled appointment activities. - Users can now view and update the details of cancelled appointments from Conversations module. 🗑️ **Deleted Appointments:** - The activity title now reads as "Appointment Deleted" when an appointment is deleted. - Users can view deleted appointments but cannot edit them.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Automations
1 year ago

Rename Workflows Directly from the Landing Page

What is New? Now, you can easily rename your workflows without having to open them individually. Previously: You had to open a workflow and click on its name to rename it. Now: You can rename workflows directly from the landing page! How to do this? 1. Locate the workflow you want to rename on the landing page. 2. Click on the vertical three dots menu to reveal additional options. 3. Select "Rename Workflow" from the menu. 4. Enter a new name for your workflow in the provided field. 5. Click the "Save" button to confirm the changes.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Fixed
Social Planner
1 year ago

Social Planner - Enhancement in Calendar View for recurring posts😇

We're thrilled to announce our latest update to Social Planner, we have extended and enhanced the calendar view showcasing the recurring posts queue to get the full picture. This is quick win for the team. How It Works: 1.Go to Marketing > Social planner 1. Create new posts with the content and media. 2. Click on the Post Now option - Select Schedule Recurring Post 3. Set the recurring post the day, week, month and year to create everygreen content In the Calendar View, the user will be able to see the future recurring post to plan and organise the content marketing. When the user edits the post, it will allow them to edit the parent recurring post.
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
WhatsApp
Chat Widget
1 year ago

Chat Widget 😇- Whatsapp Chat Option 💚

We're thrilled to introduce one more option in Chat Widget with the option of Whatsapp Chat Type. 😇 🤗 🤗 **Prerequisite** \- Add a new Whatsapp business number from Settings > Whatsapp 😎v**How to enable Whatsapp Chat Widget?** 1. Go to Sites > Chat Widget 1. Go to the Chat Widget, navigate to Chat type and select the option of Whatsapp Chat 1. With the Whatsapp chat option, go to widget window to do the customisation of text, colors, branding and forms with email/phone. 2. Once the setup is done, the last part is to select the Whatsapp number. This is the number to which the message from the user will be redirected to when the chat is initiated. 1. Once the setup is done, please save the settings. **How does it works?** 1. Add the code to the landing page (external providers) to header code or use it by enabling toggle in Funnel/Website Settings 2. Once the chat widget is embedded, it will show on the landing page. 3. When the user visits and fills the form with name and other field 4. On submission, it will redirect to Whatsapp web option with the message to the number selected in widget window.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Email Builder
1 year ago

Introducing Google Fonts in Email Builder🚀

We're thrilled to announce the addition of Google Fonts to our email campaign and template builder, providing you with a diverse range of font options to elevate your email designs. 📌 **Problem Statement:** Previously, users lacked the ability to add Google Fonts to their email campaigns, restricting their styling options and design creativity. ✅ **What We Did:** Now, users can seamlessly access and utilise Google Fonts directly within the font selector of our email builder. Furthermore, font management is made effortless through the settings page, enabling users to add, delete, and control fonts with ease. 👷 **How to Use It:** 1. Navigate to the email builder section of our platform. 2. Open an existing email campaign or template, or start a new one. 3. Select a text element within your design. 4. Choose the font selector option. 5. Click on "**Add fonts**." 1. Select the desired font from the drop down in the modal 2. Select the desired font and save it by clicking on **"Add font".** 1. Select the desired font and save it. 2. The font will now be available in the font selector for every builder. 1. Additionally, the font can be managed from the **settings page.** Navigate to the Settings section of Campaigns and select "Fonts" 1. To delete a font, simply click on "**Delete**" next to the respective font. 2. To add a font from settings, click on the "**Add font**" section and follow same process We're excited to witness the creativity and impact that this new feature will bring to your email marketing efforts. Happy designing!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
1 year ago

Order events are available in Marketplace Webhooks

Developers can now subscribe to OrderCreate and OrderStatusUpdate in the marketplace for their custom app development.This is available as OrderCreate & OrderStatusUpdate in app settings with payments/orders.readonly scope configurable at location level (Screenshot attached for reference)OrderCreate \- This occurs whenever an order is created. OrderStatusUpdate \- This occurs whenever an order status is changed. Possible order status are pending, completed, or cancelled
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Mobile Payments And POS
1 year ago

POS on all devices - Multiple payment methods - Mobile Payments

We're thrilled to announce our latest update to Payments on Mobile - the ability to accept payments using Cash, Cards on File, and Manual Entry for your mobile Point-of-Sale! Admin and users can now record payments for a POS transaction on Mobile using either Tap to Pay, Cash, Cards on File, Cheque, Bank Transfer, and more!
🚀 What's New
  1. Cards on File for POS: Accept POS payments using credit/debit cards. Everytime a payment is accepted with a new card for a particular contact, that card gets saved automatically for future use, making it super convenient for repeat customers!
  1. Cash Payments on POS: POS can now record cash payments, displaying the exact change that needs to be tendered for each transaction.
  1. Manual Entry on POS: If a payment has been accepted via Cheque or Bank Transfer, an entry can be recorded for that particular POS transaction.
👷‍♂️ How It Works
  1. Open the mobile app with your preferred account selected.
  1. Head over to the POS tab from the bottom bar and initiate a new transaction using your Product Catalog/Keypad.
  1. Link a contact to the transaction and review all the details of the transaction. Once you're good to go, tap on "Choose Payment Instrument".
  1. Select your preferred payment method.
  1. Enter the tip amount.
  1. Accept payment via your chosen payment method!
Note: If you choose to accept payment via a saved card, make sure you link the relevant contact on the Review Payment screen. If the transaction does not have a linked contact, no saved cards will show up.
⭐️ Why it Matters
This update finally removes the restriction of POS running on devices with NFC support only. Now Point-of-Sale will work on every device (including iPads and tablets) that have the app installed. Happy transacting!
📝 Tap to Pay and Cards on File are supported for Stripe Provider only as of now.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Invoicing
Mobile Payments And POS
1 year ago

Record payment for Invoice - Mobile Payments

We're thrilled to announce our latest update to Payments on Mobile - the ability to record payment for an existing invoice! Account admin and users can now record payments for an invoice on Mobile, provided they have specific permissions enabled from the agency settings. Payment can be recorded using Cards (new or saved), manual entry (cash, cards, bank transfer, cheque, others), and tap to pay (only applicable to devices with NFC support). This feature will be available on the mobile app. 🚀 **What's New** 1. **Tap to Pay for invoices**: Now record a payment for an existing invoice using Tap to Pay. 2. **Cards + Manual entry**: Record a live payment using a new/saved card or record a manual entry for an already paid invoice. 👷‍♂️ **How It Works** 1. Open the mobile app with your preferred subaccount selected. 2. Using the hamburger menu from the top left of the screen, head over to the "Invoice" section. 3. Choose and long-press on an invoice for which you would like to record payment. 4. Select record payment. 5. Select the payment instrument. 6. Accept payment via your chosen payment method! ⭐️ **Why it Matters** This update allows subaccount admins and users to finally start recording invoice payments directly from the mobile app, also allowing for payments to be accepted via Tap to Pay.
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Calendar
1 year ago

Audit Logs for Calendar Settings

Introducing Audit Logs for Calendar Settings! Now, users can easily track edits made to their calendars, including the timestamp, editor, and all modifications. **What's New?** - Users can effortlessly check edits to their calendars, including who made the changes, when they occurred, and what specific settings were modified. - This feature simplifies troubleshooting and provides precise insights into any adjustments made, ensuring transparency and accountability. - To make it simpler, we are now also showing calendar ID in the calendar settings. **How to Use?** 1. Navigate to Settings > Audit Logs. 2. Select "Calendars" under the module to view changes across all calendars. **Alternatively, for a specific calendar:** 1. Access Calendar Settings and copy the calendar ID. 2. Proceed to Settings > Audit Logs. 3. Paste the calendar ID in the 'Document ID' search box and get all details specific to that calendar.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
App Marketplace
1 year ago

App Marketplace: Delete Custom Conversation Providers

We are excited to announce a new enhancement in our platform that allows users to delete custom conversation providers from their apps seamlessly. **Important Considerations:** - Irreversibility: Please be aware that the deletion of a custom conversation provider is a permanent action. Once deleted, the provider cannot be reinstated or readded to the application. - Data Loss: Deleting a provider will result in the removal of all associated data. We recommend ensuring that all necessary information is backed up before proceeding with deletion. - Confirmation Required: To prevent accidental deletions, users will be prompted to confirm their action before a provider is permanently removed. Should you have any questions or require assistance with this new feature, please reach out to our support team.
New
Mobile App
Conversation AI
1 year ago

Conversation AI Support in Mobile

**Suggestive Mode** Receive AI-based suggestions for new messages on supported channels. Quickly send suggestions or edit them before sending. **Auto Pilot Mode** Automatically send responses to new incoming queries in messages. **Feedback and Bot Training** Provide feedback to train the AI bot from auto-generated responses.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Automations
1 year ago

GPT 4 Turbo

**What is this enhancement?** - We have revamped the current action and added multiple new enhancements. This new enhancement will make the GPT action extremely powerful and users will be able to use the power of GPT 4 Turbo in the workflows at same price we were offering GPT 3. **What are the new feature?** **Select Model** - Users will be able to select from a "Model" to select from. By default GPT 3 Turbo will be selected but the users will have the option to select GPT 4 Turbo from the dropdown. **Select Action Type** - ​Don't know what prompt to use, try some of our pre made action types. The prompt will auto populate and the action can be used based on that. Below options are available to select from. 1. Analyze Text Sentiment 2. Summarize Text 3. Translate 4. Custom **How to use this feature?** - Click the "+" icon and search for "GPT powered by OpenAI" - Select the Model - Use Custom action type if you want to write the prompt - Use Any other Action type to get pre populated prompts **Pricing** - GPT 4 Turbo - $0.03 per execution - GPT 3.5 Turbo - $0.015 per execution​ ​
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Conversations
1 year ago

Notes and Task Management in Conversations Module

Now you can effortlessly create tasks and add notes while engaging in conversations simultaneously. 🙌 👀 **What's New:** - 📝 **Seamless Notes and Task Creation:** Users can now create notes and tasks directly from the conversations module's right pane, eliminating the need to navigate outside the conversations module. - 💯 **Parallel Action:** Users can effortlessly take notes and create tasks while engaging in conversations, enhancing multitasking capabilities. - ✍️ **Edit and Delete Tasks/Notes:** Seamlessly manage your tasks and notes within the conversations module with the ability to edit and delete. - 😃 **Undo Delete Option:** Introducing the 'Undo Delete' feature for both tasks and notes, allowing users to effortlessly restore accidentally deleted items and prevent data loss. **How It Benefits:** - **Boosts Productivity:** Managing notes and tasks within the Conversations module saves time and allows users to quickly multitask. ⏰ - **Improves User Experience:** Integration into the conversations module reduces interruptions, providing a smoother and more intuitive workflow. 😊 - **Easy Recovery**: The 'Undo Delete' feature allows users to recover accidentally deleted tasks, minimizing disruptions and preventing data loss. 👍 👉 **Note** \- This feature can currently be accessed via Labs.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
1 year ago

End IVR call

**About this enhancement:** End IVR call allows workflow owners to terminate the IVR call from their end. This will allow the contact to move further in the workflow for the non-IVR actions. **What problem is it solving?** Presently, workflow owners lack the option to terminate calls from their end. This means that after IVR actions are done, the contact waits with elevator music until the subsequent non-IVR actions finish(if any), and the call ends only at the workflow's conclusion. This leaves contact either listening to endless elevator music till the workflow reaches the end or hanging up themselves.**With this enhancement we are solving for** **Better User Experience** - Preventing users from being indefinitely subjected to elevator music. - Directly decrease IVR call durations for users once IVR actions are completed. **End IVR call options** Users can choose three different custom types : **End abruptly** \- By default IVR would be terminated instantly without any warning or a message. **Text message** \- Workflow owners can type a message along with the number of loops before the IVR call is terminated **Custom music** \- Workflow owners can choose to upload a voice message or branded music or any other audio format to be played before the IVR call is terminated along with the loops image.png
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Documents & Contracts
1 year ago

Now Set Signing Order in your Document & Contracts

What’s New?
  • Introducing the Signing Order feature for documents and contracts.
  • Clients/Users now have the flexibility to enable/disable Signing Order while sending documents. This will help all the users who need approvers for their documents to use it with ease.
  • Drag and drop functionality facilitates easy reordering of signers/recipients.
Key Features
  • Enable/disable Signing Order: Clients/Users can choose whether to enforce a signing order for recipients or not.
  • Drag and Drop Reordering: Easily reorder signers/recipients according to preference.
  • Sequential Email Triggering: When Signing Order is enabled, emails are triggered based on the order of signers/recipients.
  • Simultaneous Email Sending: When Signing Order is disabled, all recipients receive emails simultaneously.
Benefits
  • Enhanced Control: Clients/Users can dictate the signing order, ensuring a streamlined process.
  • Improved Efficiency: Drag and drop functionality simplifies the management of signers/recipients.
How to Use?
Enabling/Disabling Signing Order:
  • Navigate to the document or contract sending interface.
  • Toggle the Signing Order switch to enable or disable the feature as per your preference.
Image without caption
Reordering Signers/Recipients:
  • Click and hold on the signer/recipient’s name.
  • Drag it to the desired position in the list.
  • Release to apply the new order.
Image without caption
Managing Email Triggering:
  • When Signing Order is enabled, emails are sent sequentially based on the order of signers/recipients.
  • When Signing Order is disabled, emails are sent to all recipients simultaneously.
Image without caption
Why This Feature?
  • Signing Order adds a layer of sophistication to our document management system, addressing the need for sequential workflows in various business scenarios.
  • This feature caters to clients/users who require precise control over the signing process, ensuring compliance and efficiency.
  • By offering flexibility in email distribution and clear notifications, we aim to enhance user experience and streamline document workflows for our valued clients.
New
1 year ago

Create Workflow Flow Optimization

**What’s New?** - On clicking the "Create Workflow" button now you will see 2 options in a dropdown. - Users can select to choose from a Recipe - Or directly start the workflow from scratch **How to Use?** - Click on "Create Workflow" button in Automations.
Image without caption
New
Automations
1 year ago

Pagination in Workflows

**What’s New?** - Before you were only able to see 10 workflows at once. - Now you can choose how many workflows you will see in the landing page. - And that value will be set as default when you are logging in next. **How to Use?** - At the landing page select from the dropdown how many workflows you want to see on the landing page.
Image without caption
New
Automations
1 year ago

Custom Code

What is Custom Code?
  • Custom Code is a powerful tool that will allow users to create custom logic they want to achieve that are not available in automations currently. This provides flexibility and control beyond the pre-built actions, enabling users to automate complex tasks and integrate with various services not natively supported.
  • This is a Premium Action.
How it works
1. Add Action
In the workflows select the "+" icon to add an action and search for "Custom Code".
Image without caption
2. Programming Language
The code can be written in JavaScript. This will be the default language selected.
Image without caption
3. Property to be included in code
  • Now what if there are values in the triggers or actions above the custom code and you want to use them in the code. That's where this field comes to use.
  • These fields allow us to reference values from previous steps in our code by adding them to a dictionary called InputData.
  • You can enter the Key in the "Key" input field and assign a value to it by selecting the value through the custom value picker.
  • You can add multiple properties by clicking on "Add Property"
  • For example, if a trigger gives us information about a customer, which we then need to manipulate, we can add their name to the Input Data fields and reference it with iinputData.keyName or inputData['keyName']
Image without caption
4. Code Editor
  • You can write the code in the Code Editor
  • A sample code is pre populated for your reference.
  • Output should also be written in the code formatter itself.
  • Output should be a JavaScript Object or Array of Objects.
Image without caption
5. Test your Code
  • Testing the code is a mandatory step, if the test is not done then user will not be able to use the output of the code in the subsequent steps.
  • To test the code click on the "Run Test" button.
  • Post clicking on Run test button, if there are no errors in the code them it will show "Test Result Success" and if there is an error in code then the result will be "Test Result Failed" and you would have to recheck the code to remove the error.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Points to Remember
  • Custom value will not be passed when you are testing your code.Only the contact information will be passed when testing a code. Other properties used in the code will not pass while testing.
  • Testing the code is mandatory. No output will be available for untested code in subsequent action.
  • Use the Property fields to assign key names and map values from previous steps. Use inputData.keyName or inputData['keyName'] to access the values within the code.
Improved
Invoicing
1 year ago

Allowing negative priced item within invoices

For clients in various part of world, it becomes necessary to capture information of Advances/Returns/Buybacks within their invoices. This help them for legal purposes and to provider finer details inside invoice **What's New** - Inside invoice we allow customers to create product on the go. Here we allow the customers to have negative prices - Products with negative prices won't be available to save for later use nor they can have taxes assigned to them as this might break existing apis in places using products - The calculation done here will be same like it used to be so far, with just negative prices subtracted from final total **Why It Matters** - Increased flexibility - Allows user to be move creative while creative invoices. - Stay compliant - Simple, intuitive yet effective way to stay compliant!
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Email Builder
1 year ago

Enhanced Reply Management for Email Campaigns

With the recent release, users can now enhance their reply management of email campaigns. 🚩**Problem Statement:** Previously, users were restricted to setting a global reply-to address or using the sender’s email for managing replies to their campaigns. This setup lacked flexibility for cases where different campaigns needed distinct reply addresses, managed by specific teams like marketing or support. Also, in some cases during replying, if contacts were marking someone in CC, it was not visible from conversation tab 🌟**What’s New:** Users can now specify custom reply-to addresses for individual campaigns, enhancing reply management. 👷‍♂️**How to Use:** 1. Navigate to Email Marketing. 2. Choose your campaign and click “Send” or “Schedule.” 1. If the sender email or global reply-to address isn’t suitable, select “Set a custom reply-to address for this campaign.” 1. Input the desired reply email address. 🚀 **Which Reply-To Address Takes Priority?** **Priority 1:** Custom reply-to address set in the campaign’s Send or Schedule screen. **Priority 2:** Reply address specified in Location Settings -> Email service -> Reply & Forwarding settings.**Priority 3:** Current defaults
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Documents & Contracts
1 year ago

Configure from Name and from Email in Settings within Documents and Contracts

**What’s New?** - Configure from name and from email inside document & contracts settings - Users will now be able to configure from name and from email for every email/notification sent by document and contracts - Earlier this was limited to default name and email of the active user. **How to Use?** - Navigate to Settings under Documents and Contracts - Change the from name and from email within Customer Notifications for customer facing emails - Change the from name and from email within Team Notifications for internal emails **Why This Feature?** Earlier users were not able to change from name and from email that was being sent to the users, thereby creating a hiccup in the flexibility.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Payments
1 year ago

Capability to delete a Payment Link

**What's New** - Addressing numerous agency requests, we've implemented the ability to delete payment links directly from the payment links dashboard. - The purpose of this feature is to remove the payment links from dashboard which are no longer useful for the business users. - Audit logs would be generated for the payment links that are deleted from the system. - Once deleted the payment links won't be accessible to the end user for capturing payments and shows up a 404 page. **How to Use?** - Head over to the Payments Page - Go to Payment Links Tab -> Click on the three dots option for any payment link -> choose delete - Once the confirmation modal opens up -> choose ok and voila your dashboard would now be refreshed and the payment link is deleted. - To check the audit logs one can go to settings -> audit logs -> filters -> payment links for the same.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Conversations
1 year ago

Additional Capabilities for Outlook 2-Way Sync

**What’s New?** 👀 Sync your Outlook mailbox and CRM effortlessly by connecting 2-way sync! 👏 **New Contacts:** - You can now create new contacts directly from your Outlook mailbox 🤩 - Add the ‘Auto BCC’ address to the CC or BCC field while sending an email in Outlook. - 💥 Your contact will be automatically created, along with the conversation in the CRM. **Existing Contacts:** - All emails sent 📤 from your Outlook mailbox to existing contacts will be visible in CRM. - All Incoming emails from existing contacts are automatically imported into CRM. 📥 **Where can you find this?** - Under the sub-account settings in the 'My Profile' section, you can see Auto BCC Sync address. - This is unique to each user's email and location. **How does it help?** - **Enhanced Visibility:** Syncing your Outlook mailbox and CRM provides a comprehensive view of interactions for better relationship management. - **Efficiency Boost:** Creating contacts directly from Outlook saves time, helping you stay focused on tasks. - **Primary Inbox:** With these added functionalities, you can now use the CRM as one of your primary inboxes for consistent communication management. 👉 **Note** \- This feature can currently be accessed via Labs.
Image without caption
New
1 year ago

Settings for Decoupling Contact and Opportunity Owners

With this new feature, you can now have separate owners for contacts and opportunities in your system. This flexibility allows for more nuanced management and delegation of responsibilities within your organization.To enable this feature, follow these steps: - Navigate to Settings > Opportunities & Pipeline. - Find the "Allow different owners for contacts and its opportunities" option. - Toggle the setting to "On." Functionality **Default Opportunity Owner:** When creating a new opportunity, the default owner will be the same as the contact owner. However, this can be updated as needed to reflect the appropriate ownership. **Subsettings:** There are two additional subsettings available - - Allow updating the contact follower based on the opportunity owner change: Enable this setting to automatically update the contact follower when the opportunity owner is changed. - Allow updating the opportunity follower based on the contact owner change: Enable this setting to automatically update the opportunity follower when the contact owner is changed. This will also work in the same manner when opportunities and contacts are created/updated via Automations and Bulk Actions **Note**: 1. Once the setting is turned on, the automations which currently update owners might not update the opportunity owner so please check all automations where owners are updated once the setting is turned on 2. We are also working on adding an opportunity action to add and remove owners which will be coming soon after this release. How It Helps **Improved Customization:** Tailor ownership settings to match your organization's specific structure and workflows. **Efficient Communication:** Automatically update followers based on ownership changes, ensuring seamless communication and collaboration. With the ability to decouple owners for contacts and opportunities, you have greater control and flexibility in managing your CRM.
Image without caption
New
Client Portal
1 year ago

Client Portal - Domain Connect

Domain Connect Integration with Client Portal We're thrilled to introduce Domain Connect feature for client portal where user can add and migrate there domain as doing this users domains will me more secure **Key Features:** - Load time for client portal are now 15% faster than before. - Better caching of pages, easy prevention of DDoS attacks. - More added security features. - Migrate existing domain. - User can also modify domain. - User can delete/remove domain.
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Fixed
Certificates
1 year ago

Certificates: Undo/Redo buttons, Location level permissions and bug fixes

**Location and User level permissions** - Introducing location level permissions for certificates module, users can now enable/ disable certificates for respective locations. User-level permissions have been implemented to manage access rights within the certificates module for various users. **Undo Redo in certificate builder** - Introducing undo redo functionality in certificate builder. - Users can now seamlessly control there edits, they can now also creatively experiment knowing they can backtrack if needed. **Accessibility in certificate builder** - Introducing keyboard shortcuts in the certificate builder for quick actions such as previewing, saving, and undoing/redoing edits, providing users with greater control and convenience. - Users can now utilize shortcuts like CTRL / ⌘ + Z for undo and CTRL / ⌘ + S for save in the certificate builder, enhancing workflow efficiency. **Bug Fixes:** - Added a close button for Send button nav bar (inside builder)
Improved
Conversations
1 year ago

Conversation & email composer enhancements

We have made enhancements to the conversation page's central panel, email composer, and spacing issues: - Central Panel of Conversations: The feature for fetching older messages malfunctioned in terms of scrolling. This has been fixed; now the scroll position is maintained. - Left Panel of Conversation in the Unread Tab: Previously, when a message was replied to, the conversation moved out of the unread tab. This has been fixed; now, when an unread conversation is replied to, it remains marked as unread and does not move out of the unread tab. - Activity Changes in the Central Panel: When changes were made to the Activity, an activity message would be added to the chat. Due to a peculiar bug, only 10 messages would remain visible in the chat; the rest were removed. We have released a fix for this issue. - Message Composer Line Spacing Issue: There was extra space between lines, which caused template and signature issues, and a general mismatch between composed and sent emails. We've released a fix for this.
Improved
App Marketplace
Conversations
1 year ago

Retrieve messages and emails by Message ID and Email ID - API available for the OAuth channel

Get message by Message ID and get email by Email Id API is now available for public access through the OAuth channel. **What's New?** - User can fetch message details using get message by message id API. - User can fetch Email Message details using get email by email id API. - Email Message ID under a message thread is now available in Get Message by Message ID API and Get Message by Conversation ID API.
Improved
Payments
Invoicing
1 year ago

Improved Payment Element while recording customer payments

- Refactored the entire core logic and UI for capturing internal payments by migrating to the payment element. - Adding billing fields on invoice live links as well as internal record payment modals for capturing payments Why It Matters 1. Enhancing Capturing Payments Experience - Eliminating the AVS failures to record payments leads to a significant betterment of customer experience for users of [authorize.net](http://authorize.net) and NMI payment providers. 2. Consistent UI - We now have consistent UI across the entire invoicing system for capturing payments be it a customer facing page or on the invoicing dashboard. 3. Scalability and Eliminating bottlenecks - With the use of payment element we ensure that the invoicing system won't face any scalability issues in the future especially when there arises a need to connect it with different payment providers.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Payments
1 year ago

Payment Integrations redesign

Simplified UI: More compact, intuitive & served from micro frontend app Added new pages to the payment integration section to accommodate future development scopes. Introduced Default Provider Listing, along with Native Providers List. Implemented an All Providers Page, displaying all connected and disconnected providers. (Exciting updates coming soon! Stay tuned)Why It Matters? - Improved User Experience - Enhanced consistency between UX of different payment providers - Better use of screen estate to accomodate more providers
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Conversations
1 year ago

Capture contact details via Live Chat message

We have started capturing contacts' Phone Numbers and Emails if sent through Live Chat messages. **What's New?** - We capture phone numbers and emails via live chat messages. - For example, if the message is sent through live chat - Hi, this is my number 9876543210 - we will capture this number as the contact's phone number. - If the contact already has a phone number, we will ignore the number coming in the message. - If there is already an existing contact with that phone number, then we will merge the Live Chat visitor contact and conversation with the existing contact. - All the above is applicable for capturing emails as well. **How to Use?** In a Live Chat send a Phone Number or Email as a message. Our system will parse the message and capture the details.
New
Invoicing
1 year ago

Introducing Partial Payments For End Customers On Invoicing

**What's New?** - Previously, End Users or Customers could only accept full payments through the Invoices, there was no provision of partial payment for the end customer. With this new feature, Business Users can now set a minimum percentage of the total Invoice Amount to be collected from the end customer. - The customer can pay any amount that is equal to or greater than the percentage amount specified from the Invoicing Dashboard of the subaccount . - Feature available for both one-time and recurring invoices. **Why This Feature?** - This feature empowers business owners with more control over the payment plans for their customers as well as helps them to capture more payments from their potential clients/customers. **Note:** - For recurring invoices the partial payment as a feature is available for invoices that have autopayment disabled. In case of autopayment enabled and customer card it will have the option for partial payment for the first invoice but for the subsequent one's it would autodraft the full amount. **Summary** - This feature introduces partial payments for end customers by allowing businesses to set minimum percentages for invoice payments, empowering them with greater flexibility and control over payment plans, ultimately enhancing client payment capture rates. **How to Use?** - Ensure that a payment gateway (Stripe / [Authorize.net](http://authorize.net) / NMI) is integrated. - Go to Payments -> Invoices -> Invoices Settings. - From this page menu click on Payment Settings and enable the Partial Payments Toggle - Add a percentage in the input field (Percentage is calculated based on the total amount of the invoice amount to be paid). - Click on "Save." and Voila you now have Partial Payments Enabled !
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
App Marketplace
Conversations
1 year ago

Conversations: Accept External ID in Inbound Message API

**What's New;** - We are now accepting external IDs as AltId in the Inbound message API. - The external ID will be passed in the Custom Provider delivery payload - We are also returning the external ID in the integration Webhooks This will help to map inbound messages with external message IDs, especially when the user is trying to thread messages appropriately in case of message replies.
New
Improved
Social Planner
1 year ago

Social Planner - Say bye to error while login for Facebook Page Connection🤩

We are thrilled to announce upgrades to better version of Facebook API which solves the issue mentioned below - 1. Navigate to Marketing > Social Planner 2. Go to Settings 3. Connect your Facebook Page While connecting it the page, it would mention that the **page doesn't have adequate permissions**. 😇 **With the new upgrade, the people using business manager access will be able to connect.**😎 😎 With the upcoming changes to Facebook Group API, Facebook is shutting down the APIs to connect the Facebook Group, publish the content is taken away. This is market wide initiative, it is same for everyone in market. What to suggest to everyone asking about Facebook Group API? Please use HL Communities with similar concept of Facebook Groups, Social Planner team is going to expand on it soon.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Communities
1 year ago

Communities - Updates

Hey there! We've got some exciting updates this release to make user engagement even better: **New Features:** - Image cropping New users can now crop the avatars from the mandatory profile modal. - Unsubscribe from emails Users can now unsubscribe from emails, except OTP emails/ invite emails/ payments and cancellation emails.
Image without caption
New
Improved
Calendar
1 year ago

Calendar Availability for Service Calendars

This enhancement empowers users to **configure availability** for service calendars. Now, in addition to staff availability, the system will also **consider calendar availability** when determining free slots. **What's New?** - **Previously**, service calendars only checked the availability of staff members when determining available slots, creating constraints for businesses. - With this enhancement, we've introduced Calendar Availability, allowing users to set up their service calendars' availability **similar** to **other calendar** types. - **Now**, users can configure **weekly working hours** and **date-specific hours** for their service calendars. - When calculating available slots, **both** the configured **calendar** availability and the **staff member's availability** will be considered. **How to Use?** 1. Navigate to calendar settings. 2. Select your service calendar or create a new one. 3. Access the availability settings. 4. Configure your weekly working hours and/or date-specific hours. 5. Click on save.
Image without caption
New
Fixed
1 year ago

Courses - Assignments now available in PWA, bug fixes

**Assignments in Mobile:** No more being tied to your desk! With our latest update, you can now take your assignments on the go, right from your mobile device. Whether you're lounging at the park or stuck in traffic (as a passenger, of course), managing your assignments has never been easier. - Mobile-friendly assignment now available on your phone. Can be accessed through mobile browser and PWA. - Check out your latest assignment submission in a snap! - Peek at your instructor's feedback without breaking a sweat! **Assignment UI optimisations in Desktop for all themes:** - Experience a revamped confirmation message toggle and a sleek new design for mobile devices! - We've created a tidy gap between assignment instructions and your submitted answers and files. - We've boosted the performance of the previous and next buttons for seamless post browsing! **Bugs** - Fixed post completion count issue in PWA.. - Scroll for assignment, quizzes and their inner pages too. - Post completion fix for client portal enabled locations.
New
Forms
1 year ago

Order confirmation support with product in Forms 🚀🚀

We are excited to introduce Order Confirmation support in Forms experience! With this update, users can choose to add order confirmation page on submissions of forms with products. 💪💪**What's New**💪💪 - Order confirmation support is available for product with forms. - After successful payment of purchased product, Order confirmation page with basic details of the customers will be shown. - Theme of order confirmation page is automatically taken from form theme selected. - Details Shown in Order Confirmation: - Name, Email, Phone, Address, Country, Product details and total amount paid 🌟**How to Use**🌟 Under the Integrations, add the "Payment" element. Add products to your forms Under Styles and Options: Go to On Submit actions There is an option to choose order confirmation page on successful payment. 🔥**What's Next** 🔥 - More customization options for order confirmation will come - As per width of the form, the orientation of details in order form can change.
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Calendar
1 year ago

Google Organic Booking: Enabled for Selected Few Locations

We have **enabled** Google Organic Booking for selected locations! This feature is now live for locations that have either **one service menu or one group** created in calendars. With this integration, your bookers can seamlessly schedule appointments directly from Google Search without any additional cost to you. **Key Points to Note** - Google Organic Booking is enabled for sub-accounts with only one service menu or one group. You can **disable** this feature at any time by navigating to **Calendar Settings > Connections > Account Connections.** - Enabling Google Organic Booking is **awesome** as it enhances your online presence and attracts more bookings **organically** through **Google Search.** - For locations with multiple service menus or groups, you will need to enable Google Organic Booking in Calendar Settings and select the specific service menu/group/calendars to upload. **How to Enable or Disable Google Organic Booking?** - Navigate to Calendar Settings > Connections tab > Account Connection. - Toggle the Google Organic Booking option on or off according to your preference. - Any **change** made typically takes **24 to 48 hours** to reflect on your Google Business Profile.
New
Forms
1 year ago

Products in Form Builder 🚀🚀

We are excited to introduce new feature Products in Forms to enhance your Forms experience! With this update, users can seamlessly add products to their forms with better customization and layout options.
🔥What's New🔥
  • Payment Type: Now you have an option to either sell product or collect custom amount from the forms.
  • Ability to select products, include descriptions and images, and choose layouts.
  • Users will also be able to select different variants which are available for the specific product
  • Quantity of product will be respected as per inventory management.
  • Inclusion of tax calculation when someone purchase the product.
🌟How to Use🌟
  • Under the Integrations, locate the "Payment" element.
  • Drag and drop the payment element onto your form canvas.
  • Connect the payment gateway
  • Toggle between live and test modes.
  • Click on "Add Product" to select from available options.
  • Customize product details, including description, image, and layout.
  • You can customize the look by choosing themes and styling options.
  • Save your changes and preview the form to see the products in action.
💪💪Key Highlights💪💪
Customizations:
  • You can add upto 20 products
  • Three different layout options are available.
  • These forms can be easily added in the funnels and can be used as one step order form with unlimited customization.
Tracking payments:
  • Upon form submission, the payment amount, order id and payment status are included in the submission details.
  • On clicking OrderId, users will be able order details.
  • These details can also be exported via export options.
Email Notifications:
Email notifications also reflect the status and amount of payment.
Workflow Trigger:
Payment received trigger can be used with "Forms" as source.
🎉Notes:🎉
  • Recurring products are not supported right now.
  • NMI and Authorize.net requires First Name as mandatory field while having payment element in the form.
  • Refund amount will not be captured right now
  • Old way of API based Stripe connect is not supported.
  • In Calendars with custom form payment element, Payment element will not display.
  • Multi payments with Multi native forms not supported in funnel yet
  • Undo/Redo is not supported with Payment element yet
Examples:
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Automations
Email Builder
1 year ago

Email Template Builder available in "Send Email" workflow action

**About this enhancement** We're thrilled to announce the integration of the email template builder into our "Send Email" workflow action. This enhancement brings unparalleled convenience and efficiency to user’s workflow creation process. With this you can now view and edit email templates directly in the workflow! **Key Benefits** - Streamlined User Experience: Say goodbye to the hassle of navigating between tabs. Now, you can conveniently view and edit your email templates within the workflow environment, streamlining your user experience and enhancing productivity. - Reduced Back-and-Forth: Bid farewell to the back-and-forth confusion. By eliminating the need to toggle between different sections, you can focus on creating workflows seamlessly, ensuring swift and efficient execution.
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Email Builder
1 year ago

Enhanced Drag and Drop Email Template Editor in Workflows

We're thrilled to announce an improvement we made in Email builder integration to ensure seamless experience in Workflows! With this update, users can now both save changes and save them as new templates when using the Email Template Builder within Workflows. **What's New:**🚀 Save as New: Create fresh templates based on your edits without altering the original. Preserve Originals: Your original templates remain intact while you experiment with changes. **Why It Matters:**💃 Flexibility: Tailor templates to specific needs without starting from scratch. Efficiency: Streamline your email workflow with these new options. **Where can you see it?**😎Under Workflows -> Open the Email Action - Choose a Template from the drop down - Click on Edit option on the Thumbnail Make the required edits and " Save as New Template" 1. Specify the name of the new template **Note:** In other integrations (Like Template builder integration with Contacts), we still support only **"Save"** option.
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Calendar
1 year ago

Outlook Recurring Events

We've **resolved** the **limitation** where recurring events edited in Outlook didn't sync properly. Now, **all edits** made in Outlook will **sync accurately**. **What's New?** - **Previously**, our synchronization system only captured **modifications** to the first event in a **recurring** series, resulting in **discrepancies** when changes were made within Outlook. With this enhancement, we've **eliminated this limitation.** - **Now**, whether you edit a single occurrence, choose 'This and following events', or modify all occurrences of a recurring event in Outlook, those **changes** will be **accurately reflected**. This **enhancement ensures** consistency and accuracy across platforms, avoids confusion caused by discrepancies in event details and helps in obtaining accurate slot availability to avoid any double bookings. **Important Note:** For this to work accurately, it's essential to disconnect and then reconnect your Outlook integration.
New
Fixed
Memberships
1 year ago

Courses - Offer validity and other updates

**What’s New :** 1. Gone are those days of indefinite offers; now, seize the opportunity with limited-time validity, where every moment counts. 2. Explore three distinct pathways designed to empower learners: Offers with Access Start Date Only: - Dive into exclusive offers starting from a designated date, or provide early access. - Offers with Access Number of Days Only: - Seize short-term deals available for a specified number of days, for limited-time accessibility. Offers with both Access Start Date and Number of Days: - Mark your calendars for exclusive launches and enjoy limited-time offers for a set duration, such as our holiday promotion. **Bug Fixes:** - Kajabi fixes to extract posts and videos - Added customization support for Mark as complete button for quizzes and assignments - Common Navbar UI Hotfixes
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Automations
1 year ago

GPT Powered by OpenAI Upgrade

**What’s New?** All new UI and action type with a new name. The action is renamed to "GPT Powered by OpenAI" - New UI - Easier and simpler to use with helper text to guide you through the process. - New Action Types - Now there are multiple "Action Types" to choose from. Get pre written prompts for the action type you have selected. **How to Use?** Same as before, click on "+" icon to open the action side bar. Search for or directly navigate to "GPT Powered by OpenAI" **New Action types** - **Analyze text Sentiment** \- Grenerate the analysis of the input text sentiment - **Summarize Text** \- Generate a summary of the input text. Get an option to select the length of the summary. - **Translate content** \- Translate your input text to language of your preference. Select the "From language" and "To Language" to translate the input text. - **Custom** \- Write your own prompt
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Automations
Payments
1 year ago

Subscription and Refund trigger live in automations

Along with the current support for Payment Received, Order Submitted trigger and Invoice trigger, we have added the support for 2 new additional triggers 1\. Subscription Trigger - Allows to automate processes around the status changes for subscriptions - When a subscription is created for a customer - When the subscription moves over from trial to active - When a subscription is cancelled Businesses can also use subscription status filters to create IF conditions based on status changes or the product associated with the subscription and can also make use of the custom values inside Payments custom values. 2\. Refund Trigger Allows automations to be built around payments that are processed as refunds by you or your sales agents. Users will be able to trigger a workflow based on a refund attempt and then branch conditions based on: - Whether the refund was success or failed - Whether the refund was for full amount or partial amount - OR based on the amount or source of the refund Refund custom values are also available inside the Payments section in custom values to allow businesses to send customised notifications based on different scenarios
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Fixed
Email Builder
1 year ago

Enhanced Drag and Drop in Template Builder🎉

We've improved the Email Template Builder to make it easier and smoother to use. **Problem Statement:**💥 Previously, users encountered difficulties in adding or rearranging elements, leading to a subpar user experience. Approximately 50% of valid bug reports in the builder were related to this issue, often requiring troubleshooting steps such as removing extensions or using incognito mode. **What we did?**🚀 We've transitioned our Email Template Builder from using to a more efficient Modular Federation approach. With this modular federation release, we have ensured that drag and drop in template builder is seamless. checkout this video to see how Drag n Drop is working seamlessly [Loom Video](https://slack.com/openid/connect/login%5Finitiate%5Fredirect?login%5Fhint=eyJhbGciOiJSUzI1NiIsInR5cCI6IkpXVCJ9.eyJpc3MiOiJodHRwczpcL1wvc2xhY2suY29tIiwic3ViIjoic2hyZXlhLmJhbmVyamVlQGdvaGlnaGxldmVsLmNvbSIsImF1ZCI6IjkyNjU5NDUwMDM3LjMyMjA2MTU4Mjg4NiIsImV4cCI6MTcxMjMyNjI5MywiaWF0IjoxNzEyMzI2Mjg2LCJhdXRoX3RpbWUiOjE3MTIzMjYyODYsImh0dHBzOlwvXC9zbGFjay5jb21cL3VzZXJfaWQiOiJVMDVWQ0VUQzgyMSIsImh0dHBzOlwvXC9zbGFjay5jb21cL3RlYW1faWQiOiJUQkw3NTJETTAiLCJodHRwczpcL1wvc2xhY2suY29tXC90YXJnZXRfdXJpIjoiaHR0cHM6XC9cL3d3dy5sb29tLmNvbVwvc2hhcmVcL2FhM2JiNTc3MjE5YTRlYTM5NzQ3OGJhNGFiZTE3N2Q4In0.qXv-Y0Y82IJSdAFJOtTKiP77pqTWl%5FjR%5FZMBq3%5FBD1jNF6-Ei%5Fl6bmH6t9puPJTahKMSFI1oRrXMZO%5FT0srxS6MUmkUJS7XRUDXURxnVaem6MBRpHFcb94tTaXB17i24lKtDCd8WPF8iA5Dn-czIA9cWXCuG%5FLUS0Ssdk8ySrGvl7bYcuuF6KZOHzBEsuSxPjRONLQez6aA5GCWYsqm4KHGp0bdsz2AeaWrlHfkRJs4hoyR%5F8DFhlCpMQLLgt0DMHssD9ROwGy9fCZlVLZwS2vYjXfEgB7GTwCQM%5FhubKB2uPIN-KuDGumd2cqBtOz29V1%5FektHos4wDLGa80%5Fjftg) **Coming Soon :**😎 The similar seamlessness would be available for the campaign builder as well
New
Email Builder
1 year ago

Introducing Kajabi email template importer 🎉

We're excited to announce a new addition to our template import functionality - the capability to import templates directly from Kajabi! **What's New?**😎 Now, users can seamlessly import templates from Kajabi by simply sending it in an email from Kajabi to our dynamically generated email ID in just a few steps. **Why We Did It?**🚀 Simplicity: We wanted to ensure a straightforward importing flow that can be easily followed by both technical and non-technical users. Reusability: Providing the option to reuse already created templates from Kajabi enhances efficiency and saves valuable time. **How to Import?**🤩 1. Navigate to Email Marketing -> Templates in your account. 2. Click on **New -> Import** Templates. 1. Select **"Kajabi"** from the dropdown menu. 1. Copy the dynamically generated email ID provided. 1. Send the desired template as a test email or campaign to this email ID from your Kajabi account. 2. Click on **"Continue"** to start the import. 3. Specify the desired name for this Template and click on **"Create Template"**
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
1 year ago

CRM - Location Timezone and Date/Time Format Update

In our latest update, we're thrilled to introduce enhancements to the date and time formats across various features, along with a location timezone update. Here's what you need to know: What's Changed : **Updated Date and Time Formats:** We've standardized the date and time formats across all contacts' task areas, opportunity fields, and opportunity notes. The updated format is DD Mon YYYY, HH:MM AM/PM - 04 Apr 2024, 8:00 PM **Location Timezone Update:** Additionally, we've implemented a timezone update to provide accurate time references based on the sub-account/location timezone. Location Timezone setting: Impacted Areas:Why It Matters: **Consistency Across Features:** By standardizing date and time formats, you can seamlessly navigate between different features without confusion. **Standardized UX:** Our goal is to provide a unified and intuitive user experience across the platform.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Automations
Conversations
1 year ago

Facebook & Instagram comment automation

TABLE OF CONTENTS
  • What is this feature?
  • Pre Requisite
  • How to integrate Facebook and Instagram account?
  • What are the new Triggers?
  • When the contact will be saved?
  • What are the new Actions?
  • Here is how the workflow will look
  • Here is how the message will look in Facebook and Instagram
  • Important points to be noted
What is this feature?
  • This is an amazing feature to drive more sales and conversations with the customers on Facebook and Instagram.
  • Attract and engage with customers when they're ready.
  • Never let a lead slip away and never miss a follow-up opportunity. Identify interested leads and reengage them without running expensive retargeting ad campaigns.
  • Instantly engage with each comment so you attract customers faster than ever before and never miss an opportunity with a potential lead.
Pre Requisite
  • To use this feature Facebook account should be integrated.
  • To use the actions in the workflows, the Facebook User comments on a post or Instagram User comments on a post trigger should be available.
How to integrate Facebook and Instagram account?
Follow the below mentioned steps to integrate your account
  • Go to settings
  • Go to integrations
  • Hover over to Facebook and Instagram section
  • Connect your account
Image without caption
What are the new Triggers?
When creating a workflow click on "Add Trigger". The triggers related to comment automation are present in the "Facebook/Instagram events" category. You can directly search for the trigger or scroll down to the category.
  • Facebook - User comments on a post
  • Instagram - User comments on a post
  1. Go to triggers and select from the available triggers based on your use case.
Image without caption
  1. After clicking on the trigger the sidebar will open. There are multiple filters present here. The first step is to select the Page.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
  1. After selecting the Page you have to select the Post Type. Post type can be "Published" or "Custom"
  • Published Post - 'Published Posts' tab includes all posts on your business page - it could be text, photo, video or live video types of posts. You can also select the "View on Facebook" hyperlink to take you to the post.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
  • Custom Post - 'Custom' tab allows you to find and connect the post by entering the Facebook post's URL or ID. Select Custom in Post type, add the "Post is" filter and paste the URL of the post in the field against Post is field.
Image without caption
  1. After selecting the post you have to enter what are you looking for in the comment. You can select from 2 options "Contains Phrase" and "Exact Match". Below are some examples to understand these 2 dropdown better.
Image without caption
  1. You can also use the toggle to turn on tracking of only first level comments. If this is turned on only first level of comments will trigger the workflow.
Image without caption
When the contact will be saved?
When a contact is coming through the trigger, it will be saved as a contact and First Name and Last Name of the contact will be stored.
What are the new Actions?
There are 3 new actions in the "Communications" category.
Facebook Interactive Messanger & Instagram Interactive Messenger
  1. On selecting any of the above mentioned actions the sidebar will open where you can capture all the relevant details.
Image without caption
  1. First thing to do here is to select the "Reply Type". You have 2 options to select from, Reply to DM and Reply to comment via DM
  • Reply to DM - This is to be selected when you want to send an outbound message to the customer based on a direct message received from the customer.
  • Reply to comment via DM - This is to be selected when you want to send an outbound message based on the comment made by the customer. If you want to use multiple actions in the same workflow remember that first action will be a "Reply to comment via DM" and subsequent actions will be "Reply to DM".
Image without caption
  1. After selecting the reply type we have to configure the message that needs to be sent. You can select from pre existing templates or even right your own message.
  1. User also have the ability to attach files. Click on "Add attachment" and select an attachment from your drive or enter the URL to add the files.
Image without caption
  1. You can also add buttons with your messages. Now what are buttons, buttons are a great way to communicate with your customers and gives you the functionality to perform actions based on the button selection, share your number or share the website link.
Image without caption
Click on "Add Button" to add the buttons, you can add upto 3 buttons.
  1. There are 3 types of buttons to select from -
a. Open website - Add a URL to this button. Enter the link here and user will go to that link when button is clicked.
b. Call Number - You can enter the number here and user can call on that using this button.
c. Perform Actions - This button can be used to further progress the conversation with the customer. You can add actions after this button to continue the flow.
Image without caption
  1. The first thing to be added in a button is the Button Name. Next is the selection from the 3 button types and last is entering the phone number or URL for Call or Website button respectively.
Image without caption
  1. Default Wait Time - This is a mandatory step. By default a wait time for 1 minute is added and it will be editable. After the given time has passed the contact will go to the "Default Branch"
Image without caption
  1. Default Branch - A default branch will be available for the action all the time. If no reply is received from the customer or the "Call" action button is selected the contact will move to this branch.
Respond on comment action
  • With the help of this action you can comment on the comment entered by the customer.
  • You can add multiple replies and system will randomly select from these options and reply to comment.
  • You also have a toggle button, switching the toggle button on will also like the comment.
Image without caption
Here is how the workflow will look
Image without caption
Here is how the message will look in Facebook and Instagram
Image without caption
Important points to be noted
  • In triggers "Page is" is the first field to be selected. All the other fields are dependent on it and if the "Page is" filter is deleted all the other filters will also be deleted.
  • Upto 3 buttons can be added in the Interactive Messenger action.
  • No further actions can be added after the "Call" button.
  • After the call button the contact will directly move to the Default Branch.
  • By default a wait of 10 seconds is added which is editable.
  • If no button is selected, contact will go to the "Default Timeout" branch.
  • If Reply to DM is selected, the system will check if there is any conversation that happened within the last 24 hrs and if yes then it’ll send a message else it’ll fail to send.
  • Reply to DM will be used in 2 scenarios. First one is when you want to start the conversation with the user who has send you a DM and second when you want to continue the conversation with the user after the Reply to comment via DM. For eg. when in the first action Reply to comment via DM is selected as Reply Type, subsequent actions will haveReply to DM as Reply type.
  • When using Reply to comment via DM, if the contact has not replied to the First Interactive Messenger action then Interactive Messenger Action will not work in the Default Timeout Branch.
  • For Reply to comment via DM a 7 day window is applicable. You need to send a reply to the comment via DM in 7 days otherwise the delivery will fail.
New
Funnels And Websites
Domain Connect
1 year ago

Seamless Migration to CloudFlare

🚀 Seamless domain migration is now live 🚀 We've made migrating your existing domains to CloudFlare easier. No deletions and re-additions necessary! 🤩 Introducing One-Click Migration with Domain Connect Benefits: - ⚡️**Speed Upgrade:** Your funnels and websites get a 15% speed boost! - 🛡️**Security Shield:** Enhanced protection against DDoS attacks and other threats. - 🧠**Smart Caching:** Visitors enjoy faster loading times thanks to optimized caching. **❓How to Switch (It's Super Easy):** Automated flow with one-click migration: 1. Click "Migrate Domain" 2. Follow the Domain Connect flow. 3. Simply follow the prompts, and your DNS updates automatically – magic! 🪄 4. Done! Your domain is now powered by Cloudflare. Manual Migration (Unsupported Providers): 1. Click "Migrate Domain" 2. Make these small DNS updates: - CNAME records -> [sites.ludicrious.cloud](http://sites.ludicrious.cloud) - Apex record -> IP address 162.159.140.166 1. Click "Authorize Domain" to verify 2. Congratulations! You're all set! Your domain is now on CloudFlare. Get ready for a faster, safer, more streamlined domain experience!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Calendar
1 year ago

Partial Payments for Calendar

Partial payment offers bookers the opportunity to **secure bookings** by paying a **deposit** upfront, with the remaining **balance** settled at a **later** time. Users can now collect either the full amount or a deposit amount from bookers, aiding in seat reservations. **What's New?** **Previously**, users could accept **full payments** through the booking widget, but there was no provision to specify a reservation fee or **deposit amount.** With this **new feature**, users can now set a **flat amount** or a **percentage** of the total booking cost, which will be charged to the booker at the time of booking. The remaining amount (to be paid) will be displayed in the Payments > Invoices tab, serving as a reference for future payments. **Note:** When partial payments are enabled, **two entries** will appear in the **payments section**: \- **Transaction:** Displays the amount charged during booking (Deposit Amount). \- **Invoices**: Indicates the pending amount to be collected from the booker (Total Amount - Deposit Amount). Invoices remain in draft status, and users must manually collect the pending amount. **How to Use?** 1. Ensure that a payment gateway (Stripe / [Authorize.net](http://authorize.net)) is integrated. 2. Enable the "Accept payments" toggle for the calendar in Calendar Settings > Forms & Payments section. 3. Enter the total amount and select the currency. 4. Enable the "Accept partial payment" checkbox. 5. Choose between a Flat Amount or a percentage (Percentage is calculated based on the total amount). 6. Optionally, enter a description. 7. Click on "Save."
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Funnels And Websites
1 year ago

SEO Suggester and HTML Language Attribute Selector

🎉 Time to Level Up Your SEO Game 🎉 Get ready to boost your SEO score with these awesome new features: - 🔥 **SEO Suggester:** Get actionable tips and insights to optimize your website's content for better search results. - 🌐 **HTML Language Selector:** Easily set the correct language attribute for your funnel/website pages, improving accessibility and search engine understanding. - 💡 **Meta Preview Enhancements:** Users can now see the domain and path URL of the page in the Meta preview 🤔 **Why this matters** Strong SEO means more visibility, more traffic, and reaching the right audience. With SEO Suggester feature, you can easily optimise your content without the need for extensive SEO knowledge, helping you achieve better results and attract more visitors to your website. ❓ **How to Set the Language Attribute:** 1. Open your page in the builder. 2. Go to SEO Meta Data Settings. 3. Find the new "Language" option and select your language code (default is "en" for English). Start optimizing and watch your website climb the search rankings!
New
Documents & Contracts
1 year ago

Easy Management of Documents and Contracts within Contacts

**What’s New? / Key Features / Benefits:** - Documents and Contracts will now be available in the document management section under Contacts - This will list documents associated with the contact irrespective of the criteria that the contact was a primary or a secondary recipient - Sent and Completed documents will be listed here. - Users will be able to download the PDF, view source of documents, copy link in case of sent documents **How to Use?** - Go to a Contact - Click on the Document Management Icon - Under All tab: View Documents and their status. Also, get the ability to Download, View the source in the editor and copy link in case of send documents - Get all documents in a folder within Sent Tab **Why This Feature?** - Users will now be easily able to manage documents and contracts related to a particular contact
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
E-Commerce Stores
1 year ago

Shipping & Delivery Rates

- E-commerce store owners can now define manual delivery charges based on shipping zones. - A zone can be created by selecting countries (by “Add Zone”) and manual rates can be defined inside a zone using Add Rates - Store owners can define multiple pricing for each zone. Multiple Shipping zones can be created with different delivery charges. - While defining rates, delivery rates can be defined according to the total amount in the cart. For eg- Free Shipping, if the order amount is above $500 or else, charge $10 if it's below $500. This feature can be found at Sub-Account > Payments > Settings > Shipping & Delivery - This feature will help store owners to create differential pricing for multiple shipping zones
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Calendar
1 year ago

Pre & Post Buffer Enhancement

With this enhancement, we now consider blocked slots when applying pre and post buffers for appointments. This ensures that buffers do not overlap with blocked slots, providing appropriate buffer times for appointments.
What's New?
Previously, if a 30-minute appointment with a 30-minute interval and 30-minute pre and post buffers was set, and a slot from 12:00 PM to 12:30 PM was blocked, the next available slot displayed would be 12:30 PM and the previous available slot displayed would be 11:30 AM, ignoring the blocked slot entirely.
Now, considering the same scenario, the next available slot would be 1:00 PM, accommodating the required 30-minute pre-buffer. The previous available slot would be 11:00 AM, considering 11:00 AM to 11:30 AM as the duration and 11:30 AM to 12:00 PM as the required post-buffer.
How to Use?
  • Choose the calendar to which you want to add buffers for appointments.
  • Navigate to the "Availability" section.
  • Specify the duration you want for both the pre and post buffers and click on save.
New
Funnels And Websites
1 year ago

Support for Subscript and Superscript in Funnel/Website Builder 🚀🚀

This new feature allows users to format their text effortlessly with raised (superscript) or lowered (subscript) characters. This enhances the versatility and clarity of their content in funnels or websites.
The superscript and subscript use the sup and sub tags for improved SEO and HTML structure.
Why use this feature? Superscript text is generally used for exponents, measurement units, or trademark symbols like TM, SM, and ®. Subscript text is typically used for mathematics and chemical formulas, but it can also be used to denote footnote numbers.
How to use this feature?
  • Add or edit any elements with a text editor like a headline, sub-headline, paragraph, etc.
  • Select the characters or word.
  • Toggle the subscript or superscript icons from the text editor bubble menu.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Fixed
Communities
1 year ago

Communities updates

Hey there! We've got some exciting updates this release to make user experience even better: **Enhancements:** - Search Members by email : - Group Admins/Owners can now search for members in members page and also while tagging them in comments and posts using email Ids. **Leaderboard** - Group Admins will **no more** be a part of the leaderboards to allow non admin members to part of the leaderboard. This will bring more engagement in the groups by motivating members to generate quality content. **Backend Caching** Added a layer of redis cache on some extremely frequently database reads. This will significantly lower the read and compute time spent by service on mongo **Bug fixes** - Fixed a bug in leaderboard calculation that was inflating the points of some users of the groups - Fixed known issues with role based filter in members screen. - Fixed 5xx error in reactions API - Optimised & removed extremely heavy reads on database
Image without caption
New
Funnels And Websites
1 year ago

Support for Subscript and Superscript in Funnel/Website Builder 🚀🚀

This new feature allows users to effortlessly format their text with raised (superscript) or lowered (subscript) characters, adding versatility and clarity to their content in funnels or websites. The superscript and subscript uses the sup and sub tags for better SEO and HTML structure 🌟**Why?**🌟 - Superscript text is generally used for exponents, measurement units, or trademark symbols like TM, SM, ® etc. - Subscript text is generally used for mathematics and chemical formulas. It can also be used to denote footnote numbers. 🔥**How to use?**🔥 - Add or edit any elements with text editor like headline, sub-headline, paragraph etc. - Select the characters or word. - Toggle the subscript or superscript icons from the text editor bubble menu.
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
1 year ago

Automate Follower Management in Contacts!

Are you struggling to keep your followers updated in contacts? Say goodbye to manual updates and hello to automation with our latest feature release! Here are the details:
Feature Details:
Previously, users faced challenges in automating the addition and removal of followers in contacts, which led to inefficiencies and manual workarounds.
We're thrilled to introduce the ability to add and remove followers directly within contacts via workflows!
How It Works:
You can seamlessly integrate the 'add' and 'remove follower' actions into your workflows in the Contacts section.
Use the "Add Contact Followers" action for automating the addition of followers to a contact by selecting users you would like to add as followers.
Use the "Remove Contact Followers" action for removing all or selected followers from the contact.
Why It Matters:
Streamlined Processes: Automate the management of followers to save time and eliminate manual tasks.
Enhanced Efficiency: Ensure that your contacts stay up-to-date with the right followers, without the need for manual intervention.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Memberships
1 year ago

Courses - In-app Notifications for comments, unlocked & drip content

Introducing Course Notifications!
  • Stay Connected with Comments: You'll now receive notifications whenever someone comments on a course or replies to a comment. This keeps you connected and facilitates smoother interactions within the learning community.
  • Unlocked Content: No more missing out! You'll be promptly notified when a previously locked post or category becomes accessible, ensuring you're always informed and ready to explore new content.
  • Timely Access to Drip Content: Say goodbye to guesswork! Receive notifications when drip content becomes available in your courses. This allows you to access the latest content when it's released.
  • Enabling Instructor Interaction: Instructors will now receive notifications for learner comments, fostering better communication between them and learners.
UI Enhancements:
  • Common Client Portal Navbar Integration: We've integrated a single Navbar component across all the child apps within the client portal to enhance your experience.
Bug Fixes:
  • Fixed the Category Post Tree
  • Implemented a hotfix for the course exporter
  • Made layout changes for the Classic and Neue themes
New
Improved
Certificates
1 year ago

Certificates - Download certificates from Client Portal and more custom values

Introducing certificate preview and download in the client portal:
  • Users can now keep track of all their issued certificates in one place.
  • Users are now able to download certificates.
  • Users can copy the link of certificates (from the copy button) to share.
Bug Fixes:
  • Previously, if templates were deleted, the corresponding issued certificates were not visible. This issue has now been fixed.
More Custom Values:
  • Users are now able to use standard custom values like 'user', 'contact', and 'right_now'.
  • In addition to these, users can also use manually created custom values found in Settings > Custom Values.
New
Email Builder
1 year ago

Email Campaign Statistics Dashboard 🚀

We're excited to introduce our Enhanced Email Campaign Statistics, which offer detailed analysis reports for the past 7 and 30 days. This tool enables you to unlock valuable metrics and effortlessly track performance trends.
Problem Statement: Until now, there was a limited overview available for analyzing sent campaigns.
What Did We Do? We have launched detailed campaign analysis reports under Beta labs, empowering you to better understand performance trends over the past 7 and 30 days.
What Does It Include?
  • Conversion Summary: Gain insights into key metrics such as orders placed, total revenue, order rate, and average order value at a glance.
  • Engagement Summary: View a summarized funnel overview of delivered, opened, clicked, and ordered metrics for deeper engagement analysis.
  • Performance Analysis: Track metric trends over time including sent, opened, clicked, and unsubscribed metrics.
  • Top Performing Emails: Identify the top 5 revenue-generating emails to set performance benchmarks effortlessly.
  • Recent Email Analysis: Access the 10 most recent emails for in-depth analysis.
Coming Soon:
  • Analyze campaigns over the last 60 and 90 days for broader insights.
  • Soon, you'll be able to identify top-performing campaigns based on open rates.
How to Access:
  • Navigate to Email Marketing.
  • Click on Campaigns.
  • Select the Statistics option.
  • Choose the date range: last 7 or 30 days.
  • For performance trend analysis, select the relevant metric from the dropdown in the Performance Analysis section.
Note:
  • These reports currently focus solely on emails from Email campaigns.
  • This feature is currently available on Beta Labs, so ensure you have the permission enabled.
For further details, please refer to the help document.
We're committed to enhancing your campaign analysis experience. Stay tuned for more updates!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Email Builder
1 year ago

Media Thumbnail Support in RSS Feeds for Email Builder!

We are thrilled to announce a new enhancement, based on a valid customer request, to elevate the RSS campaign experience for our users.
Problem Statement | Customer Requests: 🌟
Websites, like YouTube, now include media thumbnails in their RSS feeds. Consequently, many of our users have expressed the desire to enhance our RSS campaign capabilities to support this functionality.
What's New? 🚀
In response to this request, we are delighted to introduce support for thumbnails in the media group of RSS feeds. This enhancement ensures a more advanced and visually engaging experience when creating RSS campaigns in Email Builder.
Image without caption
New
Domain Connect
1 year ago

Branded Domains - Migration to CloudFlare (Custom Hostnames)

We are delighted to announce the migration of new branded domain connections to CloudFlare.

Key Features & Benefits:

  • Enhanced security features
  • Simple prevention of DDoS attacks
  • Effortless generation of SSL certificates and automatic renewal from CloudFlare

How to Switch?

For New Branded Domains:

  • Domain Connect: Automatically added with the domain connect flow
  • Manual Addition: Customers need to add a new CNAME - brand.ludicrous.cloud

For Old Branded Domains:

  • Navigate to Location Settings -> General Information
  • Remove the branded domain and save
  • Re-add the same domain with the domain connect flow or the manual flow and save
New
Documents & Contracts
1 year ago

Customizable Subject Line in Email for Documents and Contracts

What's New? Key Features & Benefits:

Customizable Subject Line for Documents and Contracts

  • Users can now change the subject of the email that is sent along with documents and contracts.
  • Previously, this was limited to changing the body template, not the subject of the email.

How to Use?

  • Go to 'Settings' under 'Documents and Contracts'.
  • Change the subject line within 'Customer Notifications' for customer-facing emails.
  • Change the subject line within 'Team Notifications' for internal emails.

Why This Feature?

  • Previously, users could not change the subject of the email being sent to them, limiting flexibility.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
1 year ago

Introducing Enhanced Opportunity Management!

Tired of hunting for opportunity IDs and sifting through audit logs? We've got you covered with our latest feature release! Here's what's new:
Streamlined Access to Opportunity ID and Audit Logs
  • You can locate the opportunity ID directly at the bottom left of the opportunity dialog box.
  • Click on the opportunity ID to be seamlessly redirected to the audit logs for that specific opportunity.
Effortless Opportunity Restoration
  • We've added a new option under the kebab menu on the top right of the Opportunities page.
  • Clicking on "Restore Opportunities" opens the audit logs with deleted opportunities filtered.
Why It Matters:
Simplify Workflow: With easier access to opportunity IDs and audit logs, you can navigate your opportunities with confidence and efficiency. Faster Recovery: The ability to quickly restore deleted opportunities streamlines your workflow and minimizes downtime.
Unlock enhanced opportunity management and experience unparalleled ease in tracking and restoring opportunities. 🌟
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Forms
Surveys
1 year ago

Introducing Opportunity Custom Fields for Forms& Surveys 🚀 🚀

We are excited to introduce the ability for users to incorporate Opportunity Custom Fields within forms and surveys in this release. This feature allows users to improve their data collection process by seamlessly integrating opportunity-related information into their forms and surveys.
What’s New?
  • Opportunity Custom Fields: Users can now effortlessly add Opportunity Custom Fields to their forms and surveys, enabling them to gather specific data related to opportunities.
  • Opportunity Settings Configuration: Users have the flexibility to configure Opportunity Settings by selecting a pipeline, stage, status, and opportunity value for each form or survey.
  • Create Pipeline Option: In the Opportunity Settings modal, users can conveniently create a new opportunity pipeline by utilizing the Create Pipeline option.
  • Dropdown Categorization: Custom fields are now categorized into two dropdown categories - Contact and Opportunity, facilitating organized data management.
  • Collapsible Format: All custom fields are neatly displayed under their respective parent folders in a collapsible format, ensuring a streamlined user experience.
  • Automated Opportunity Creation: Upon form or survey submission, an opportunity is automatically created and mapped to the contact generated from the submission, enhancing efficiency in opportunity tracking.
How It Works
  • Access the form or survey builder.
  • Navigate to the custom fields section under Add Form/Survey Element.
  • Select the Opportunity category.
  • Add desired Opportunity Custom Fields to the form or survey.
  • Configure Opportunity Settings as needed and save the form or survey.
  • Submit the form or survey to automatically generate an opportunity for the associated contact.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Automations
LC Phone System
1 year ago

Match Conditions are now part of "IVR Gather" action

About this enhancement:
This enhancement introduces "Match condition" branching options to the IVR Gather action. Now, users can configure the Keypress options they want directly within the "IVR Gather" action.
What problem does this solve?
Previously, users had to first configure the IVR Gather step by entering the message that would be played for the caller. The caller would then make a choice by pressing a key. Afterward, users had to add a separate “If/Else” action to map further actions based on the keypress.
This process was not very intuitive and required an additional action to achieve the outcome from the IVR gather action itself. This enhancement improves:
  1. User Experience
  1. Efficiency by reducing the number of actions needed to perform the same task
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Calendar
1 year ago

Reschedule - Calendar Widget

Summary
This enhancement provides bookers with a more informative rescheduling experience. By displaying essential details such as Meeting Location and Former & New Appointment time, bookers can better understand their adjusted appointments.
What's New?
Previously, the reschedule confirmation page did not display the Former Time or the Meeting Location. Now, when using the reschedule link, bookers will be presented with the following details for enhanced clarity:
  • Duration of the appointment
  • Former appointment time, displayed with a strikethrough for differentiation
  • New appointment time
  • Meeting location
  • Timezone information
In addition to this, bookers can seamlessly add scheduled appointments to their Google, Outlook, or iCloud Calendar with the 'Add to Calendar' button.
Image without caption
New
Forms
1 year ago

Email Verification for Forms and Surveys 🚀🚀

We are thrilled to announce the launch of the Email Verification feature for our Forms and Surveys module. This new functionality allows form and survey participants to verify their email addresses directly within the form or survey, enhancing the integrity of the data collected and providing a more seamless user experience. 🚩**What’s New?**🚩 - **Email Verification Button**: A “Verify Email” button is now displayed next to the email input field in forms and surveys. - **Verification Code**: Users receive a unique verification code via email, which they need to enter into the form to confirm their email address. - **Enhanced Data Accuracy**: This feature aims to minimize errors and fraudulent submissions by ensuring that the email addresses collected are valid and accessible by the users. - **User-Friendly Process**: Designed to be intuitive, guiding users through the verification process smoothly. - **Verified Email Field**: In addition to the email verification feature, we’ve introduced a “Verified Email” field in form and survey submissions. When an email is successfully verified, it will be marked as “Yes” under the “Verified Email” field, allowing for easy identification of verified email addresses. 🌟**How It Works**🌟 - Users will enter their email address in the designated field of a form or survey. - Upon entering a valid email, the “Verify Email” button will become visible. - Clicking this button sends a verification code to the user’s email. - Users must enter this code back into the form or survey to verify their email address. 🤩 **Why This Feature?** 🤩 The introduction of email verification is a response to the need for generating more quality leads. By ensuring email addresses are verified, we can significantly reduce the chances of receiving inaccurate data, thus benefiting both the data collectors and the participants.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Communities
1 year ago

Custom CSS/JS in communities and more enhancements

**New Features:** **Support for custom HTML, CSS and Js:** - Group admins can now add custom JS, CSS and html code specific to each group. - Group admins can also preview custom css ,html and javascript before making it live for all users. - Using this feature admins can have custom headers and footers of each group. **How to customise groups:** - You can add custom code from group settings -> Branding -> Advanced **Enhancements:** - Leaderboard UX We have now updated the Leaderboard web UI, making it more easy to use.
New
Funnels And Websites
1 year ago

Introducing Custom Field and Value Picker in Funnel Page Builder

🎉 Power-Up Your Funnel Pages with the Custom Field and Value Picker! 🎉 Get ready to streamline your funnel building with this awesome new feature. Designed to simplify and accelerate the page-building experience for our valued users. 🚀 Enhancements Implemented - **✨ Custom Data Option Picker**: We've put the power of custom fields and values right at your fingertips. Easily access and insert them in two ways: 1. **Toolbar**: Find the Custom Data Option Picker directly in the funnel page builder toolbar. 2. **Speedy Shortcut**: Type "{" in your text editor and the picker magically appears! - **🚀 Build Faster, Smarter:**: Simplifying the way users create pages within our Funnel Builder. By automating the process of selecting and inserting custom data options, unnecessary steps are eliminated. - **💪 Maximize Your Workflow**: Say goodbye to tedious custom data tasks. This picker lets you focus on creating amazing funnels by quickly selecting a custom field/value. We're always listening to your feedback and working to make your funnel building experience even better! 😄
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Forms
Surveys
1 year ago

New date formats and improved date picker in forms and surveys

We're excited to streamline your form and survey experience with new date formats and an improved picker. Our new date format offers improved clarity, flexibility, and usability, catering to a diverse range of preferences and international standards. **Key Features:** ✨ **Clarity is Key:** Update ensures clear representation of dates, minimizing ambiguity and confusion. With support of multiple date formats, choose the format that works best for you and your audience (DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY-MM-DD, MM.DD.YYYY etc). No more confusion! 🌍 **Global Flexibility:** Easily collect accurate dates no matter where your respondents are located. ⛔️ **Say Goodbye to Errors:** Built-in smart validation helps users enter the correct date format, improving your data quality and preventing submission errors with real-time feedback. ✅ **Seamless Integration:** Easy integration from builder. 🗓️ **Improved Date Picker:** Easy visible month selection from date picker. 🛑 **Disable Picker options:** Easy way to disable the picker from builder, customer can write out the date. **How to Get Started:** 1. Add a date field to your form or survey. 2. Click the field to open settings. 3. On right side, choose your preferred format and separator. **Effect on existing Forms:** - Existing form won't be affected by this update. - Old form will still work with default format YYYY-MM-DD. - Customer can edit the old form to opt for new formats. **Upgrade your forms and surveys with better dates today!**
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
1 year ago

Preview in Browser - Email Builder

We’re excited to announce and add an exciting new feature to our Email Builder tool: the addition of a “Preview in Browser” link. With this update, users now have the ability to include a preview link in their email campaigns, ensuring consistent rendering across various email clients. **Problem Statement:**⚡ Emails may appear differently across various email clients, leading to inconsistent user experiences and potential loss of campaign effectiveness. **What we did:** 🚀🚀 Users can now easily include a “Preview in Browser” link to accurately represent the email design, to their new and existing campaigns. **How to Add:** 👷 **Default Inclusion**: All blank email templates will now include the “Preview in Browser” link at the top by default. **Manual Addition to existing campaigns/ templates:** - Navigate to email marketing and open any campaign/template. - Add the element - Preview URL. - Customize the text styling/formatting by editing or using the add link option **How to test it? 🤔** 1. You can preview the email and click on the preview link to view the browser version of the document 1. You can also send a test email and click on the view in browser link. **Note**: If under the settings, agency or location has provided API Domain, it will be used by default in the preview URL adhering to whitelabel guidelines.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
LC Email System
1 year ago

SMTP Credentials For LC Dedicated Domains

**Overview:** We are excited to announce the release of SMTP credentials for dedicated sending domains, enhancing your email delivery capabilities and providing seamless integration with warm-up services. This feature empowers you to efficiently manage and optimize your email sending practices while ensuring maximum deliverability. **Key Features:** - **SMTP Credentials for Dedicated Sending Domain:** Users can now generate unique SMTP credentials specifically for their dedicated sending domain. This ensures secure and authenticated access for sending emails via SMTP servers. - **Streamlined Configuration:** Setting up SMTP credentials for dedicated sending domains is straightforward and user-friendly. Our intuitive interface guides you through the process, making integration with warm-up services hassle-free. **Here's how to access this Feature:** Navigate to **Sub-account Settings - Email Service -> SMTP Service -> Dedicated Domain and IP -> SMTP Settings** under the dedicated domain.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Fixed
Conversations
1 year ago

Conversation UI Enhancements and Fixes

We’ve added enhancements and fixes in this update, enriching your experience with our conversations page. **Here’s what’s new:** **Enhancements:** - PPTX Attachment Support: We’ve added support for uploading PPTX attachments. This expansion broadens the types of files supported for attachment uploads. - Extended Messaging Support: We’ve enhanced our API to now include support for adding Webchat, Facebook, and Instagram messages. - Custom Field Date Format Update: We’ve updated the date format used when compiling custom contact date-type files. The new format is “Mar 22nd, 2024”. This change ensures consistency across our service’s date formats, making them unambiguous for users across different locales. **Fixes:** - Enhanced Segment Count Logic: Previously, customers reported inconsistencies in segment calculation, leading to inaccurate estimations. We’ve revamped our approach by integrating Twilio’s SMS-segments-calculator package. This upgrade ensures precise segment calculations, guaranteeing reliable message delivery. - Improved Twilio Attachment Download: Some customers didn’t provide Twilio apiKey and apiSecret, causing difficulties in downloading attachments for incoming messages. We’ve addressed this by enhancing our attachment download logic. Now, regardless of whether apiKey and apiSecret are provided, attachments will be retrieved accurately, ensuring seamless display on our UI.
Improved
Integrations Marketplace
1 year ago

Enhanced Notification System for Email Address Changes

We have added an enhancement to how agency admins and owners are notified of any user-level email changes. **What's New;** Now, the agency owner and the top 20 agency admins will be notified by email if a user changes their email address. This step was taken to enhance security and communication with key stakeholders, enabling them to understand account-level activity and proactively identify if any unusual activity is taking place.
New
Conversations
1 year ago

Contact Engagement Score Triggers and Actions

We are excited to introduce new functionalities to our workflows, focusing on enhancing how you interact with and manage Contact Engagement Scores. These features provide you with greater flexibility and control, allowing for more personalised and responsive engagement strategies. What's New?**Contact Engagement Score - Trigger** This new trigger allows users to initiate any workflow actions when there's an update to a contact's Engagement Score. To offer precise control, we've included the ability to apply filters based on various numerical conditions related to the score. These conditions include: - Equal to a specific score - Not equal to a specific score - Greater than a specific score - Greater than or equal to a specific score - Less than a specific score - Less than or equal to a specific score - Is empty - Is not empty **Modify Contact Engagement Score - Action** This action allows you to add to or subtract from a contact's existing score, providing a straightforward method to update engagement levels based on interactions or behaviours.
Fixed
Improved
Conversations
1 year ago

Enhanced Email Interaction in Conversations

We're excited to share improvements to the conversations module, specifically addressing the email messages experience. Our goal is to ensure a seamless and efficient interaction with email messages, recognising the importance of quick and reliable access to email content. Email View Freezing: Customers experienced occasional freezing when clicking on email messages, caused by delays in fetching email content, which took an average of 2-3 seconds. We've addressed this issue by improving the message load time within email threads, enhancing the overall user experience. This enhancement is a step towards optimising user experience on the conversations screen, ensuring smoother customer interactions and bolstering the performance overall.
New
E-Commerce Stores
1 year ago

Custom layout for product list page in e-commerce stores

1. E-commerce store owners can now customize the number of products shown per page in the product list page. (Previously restricted to 6 products) 2. The minimum and maximum limit for number of products that can be shown per are restricted to 3 and 24 respectively. 3. This setting can be found upon selecting the product list element under "Layout options", as shown in the image. 4. This feature would help store owners to build better layouts around the products list
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Funnels And Websites
Domain Connect
1 year ago

Domains - migration of custom hostnames to CloudFlare

🎉 We are thrilled to announce the migration of custom hostnames for domains to CloudFlare. Get ready for a faster, safer, and more streamlined domain experience. 🎉 🤩 **Key features & benefits** - **Enhanced Security:** Enjoy robust protection against DDoS attacks and other online threats. 🛡️ - **Turbocharged Performance:** Websites and funnels will load up to 15% faster 🚀 - **Optimized Caching:** Intelligent caching means quicker load times for your visitors. ⚡️ - **Effortless SSL:** Easy generation of SSL certificates and auto renewal from CloudFlare ✅ 🤔 **How to switch?** - New domains: automatically added during the domain connect process. - Existing domains: 1. Navigate to settings -> Domains 2. Select the domain which is already connected to flash funnels/level0 and click "Remove" 3. Reconnect the same domain using the domain connect flow Important note: Moving forward there won't be level0 or flash funnels to ensure a better experience.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Funnels And Websites
1 year ago

Cookie consent in funnels/websites builder 🎉🎉🎉

🎉 We are thrilled to announce one of the most requested features from our customers - cookie consent for website and funnels 🎉 Helps you ensure compliance with data protection regulations by obtaining user consent before collecting any personal information. 🤩 **Key features & benefits** - Effortlessly implement cookie consent across your entire website for a streamlined user experience - Ensure compliance with customizable cookie settings - Easily customizable cookie categories and settings to meet specific business requirements 😎 **How to use ?** - Navigate to funnel/website builder interface - Click the cookie icon within the action header bar - Toggle the switch from cookie consent sidebar on the right - Accept the T&C and click on agree - Personalize the look and feel of cookie consent banner to match funnel/website's branding - Finalize your changes by saving or publishing the updated settings 🎨 😎😎 How to use Marketing tools? If you are planning to use any of the following marketing tools please follow this [documentation](https://help.leadconnectorhq.com/support/solutions/articles/155000002126-marketing-tools-to-use-in-funnel-website-cookie-banner) - Facebook Pixel - Google Analytics - Google Tag Manager Other marketing tools or 3rd party codes are not supported and has to be whitelisted in the advanced settings of the cookie banner and the owner of the funnel or website is responsible for adding them to the cookie policy and getting a consent for the same LeadConnector Cookie Policy - [Link](https://help.leadconnectorhq.com/support/solutions/articles/155000002118-what-things-you-should-include-in-your-cookie-policy) Loom explanation: <https://www.loom.com/share/a0d33a1d3f854716af34e3b23cc4362d>
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Forms
Surveys
1 year ago

Version History for Forms and Surveys 📝📊

🎉 We're thrilled to introduce Version History to Forms and Surveys! 🎉 This update gives you the tools to track changes to your forms and surveys, allowing more robust management of form and survey versions 👀 What's New? 💾 **Automatic Version Creation:** Every time you save changes in form or survey, a new version is automatically created ✅ **Edit Tracking Simplified:** Every edit is captured as a distinct version, allowing for detailed version tracking.Never worry about losing track of your edits! ⏳ **Version Preview:** Take a peek back in time! Preview any previous version of your form or survey directly within the builder. Click on the versions icon to see a list of all available versions, complete with timestamps and version numbers ↩️ Restore Previous Versions: Made a change you regret? Easily restore your form or survey to any previous version in a snap! 🕹️ Enhanced Version Management: Our improved interface makes navigating and comparing different versions a breeze, so you can choose the most appropriate version for your current needs. Get ready for streamlined form and survey management! This feature gives you the power to confidently track your changes and always have the option to revert if needed.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Documents & Contracts
1 year ago

New fillable element: Initials within Documents and Contracts

**What’s New? / Key Features / Benefits:** **New fillable element: Initials** - While going through a multi-page PDF, a lot of senders wanted to add option for the signer to add Initials on every page to ensure that they have gone through it. - Editors will now be able to drag and drop initials and assign it to the recipient that they want. - Signers will be able to click on the initials element and either type or draw their initials. **How to Use?** For Document Editors: Drag and drop initials from the side tab and assign it to recipients For Document Signers: Click on the initials field -> Use Pre-filled text or edit your initials -> Click on Accept **Why This Feature?** This helps to make the editor for documents and contracts more powerful and increases the usability.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Fixed
Communities
1 year ago

Communities updates - Improvements & Fixes

Hey there! We've got some exciting updates this release to make user engagement even better: **New Notifications:** New Comment - Post author will now get Email & In-App notifications when other members of the group comment on their post New Comment Reply - Comment Authors will now get Email & In-App notifications when other members reply to their comments Invite Link Flow: Now group members can also invite users to a group using invite links which was previously restricted to admins only. **Enhancements:** Creation of Default channels for new groups On creation of a new community a new default channel will be automatically created, making it more easy to get started with a new group. Mandatory complete profile Now its mandatory for all the members to complete their profile by adding profile picture, title and bio. This will help members of community to know each other better.
New
Improved
Reputation
1 year ago

Introducing Email Builder Integration in Reputation Management! 🚀

We're delighted to announce the launch of our latest enhancement: Email Builder Integration in Reputation Management. Now, managing your review requests just got easier and more stylish than ever before! **Key Highlights:** 🖇️ **Seamless Integration:** Access the Email Builder directly from your Reputation Settings. 🎨 **Customise Your Emails:** With the Email Builder, users can now design visually appealing and personalised emails for their review requests. Add your brand logo, customize colors, fonts, and layout to create eye-catching emails that reflect your brand identity. 🚀 **Enhanced User Experience:** Say goodbye to generic review request emails. With our Email Builder Integration, users can now craft engaging and compelling messages that resonate with their audience, increasing the likelihood of receiving positive reviews. ⚙️**Effortless Setup:** Setting up your email campaigns is quick and easy. Simply follow the intuitive interface of the Email Builder to design your email templates, and start sending out review requests in no time. **How to Access Email Builder in Reputation Management:** 1. Go to Reputation Settings ⚙️ 2. Navigate to Email Review Requests section 📍 3. Click on 'Open Email Builder' to customise your emails 📂 **Some Screenshots for Email Builder:** Unlock the power of personalized communication and elevate your review management strategy with our Email Builder Integration. Start creating impactful review request emails today!
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Opportunities And Pipelines
1 year ago

Introducing Advanced Filters for Contacts!

We've just added two new filters under Contacts that make finding the right contacts a breeze! **1\. Last Email Clicked Date:** Reach out to contacts who recently clicked on your emails **2\. Last Email Opened Date:** Find contacts who've opened your emails recently We've made it super simple to fine-tune your search: **Is Empty / Is not Empty:** Find contacts with or without activity. **More than / Less than:** Set a timeframe that suits you. **Range / This month / in month:** Customize your search based on dates. Accessing these filters is simple: - Navigate to the Contacts tab within your dashboard. - Click on the Filters option. - Select either "Last Email Clicked Date" or "Last Email Opened Date". - Choose your desired filter options to tailor your search criteria. Voila! Instantly access segmented contact lists tailored to your specific needs. **Note:** Please be aware that we will only store dates for new and upcoming email data subsequent to this release.
Image without caption
New
Improved
Fixed
LC Phone System
1 year ago

New A2P Checkboxes, Audit Logs and additional Upgrades ☎️

🪄New Features **1\. Introduced Direct Lending and Age Gated Content checkboxes while A2P submissions** **2\. Introduced agency/sub-account audit logs capturing the below updates:** - A2P Brand and Campaign Submissions/Re-submission - Delete Connection for sub=-account from agency Phone Integration page 🐞**Bug Fixes** 1. The Save button was disabled in the case when one custom provider was present, this has been fixed now. 1. For new agencies, that had not integrated with a phone system were not able to send test messages, this has been fixed now. 2. When call recording for a number was enabled, a few call reporting metrics were getting wrongly attributed this has been fixed now. 3. When Verified CallerID was enabled, then forwarding the call to the agent's number was getting rejected or giving a busy tone, we made a fix to not show the verified callerID in that case instead showing the actual Phone System number. 4. Sub-account migration from one phone system to another was causing issues with Mobile App calling, this has been fixed now.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Automations
LC Phone System
1 year ago

Call connect on keypress toggle for call action

**About this enhancement** We had observed for some carriers the DTMF tone after keypress was not recognised by twillio. As a fix and an enhancement, we have provided a toggle "CONNECT CALL AFTER KEYPRESS". When enabled (default), we will wait for the agent to press any key to connect the call with the contact. When disabled, we will play the whisper message three times and automatically connect the call. Also we have moved this and DISABLE VOICEMAIL DETECT toggle under advanced settings.
Image without caption
New
Improved
Payments
1 year ago

Stripe support for updating payment method for an ongoing subscription

We are excited to announce stripe support for updating payment method for an subscription.Key Highlights - Business users can now conveniently send customers a link to update their payment method for ongoing Stripe subscriptions. - This feature enables customers to easily update the card on file used for their subscription charges. - With this release the feature to update payment method for a subscription is available for [Authorize.net](http://authorize.net), NMI and Stripe. How it works - The option to send this link is available through the quick action menu on the subscription list page and the Actions section on the subscription detail page. - Business users can either email the link directly to the customer or copy it to send separately. - These links are one time use only, and valid only for 30 days. - Customers simply click the link to view and update their subscription details. - Upon updating, the new payment method will be charged starting from the next billing cycle. - Business users can generate multiple links, as well as deactivate all outstanding links right from the subscriptions page for any given subscription.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
E-Commerce Stores
1 year ago

Buy now button on product detail page

We are thrilled to announce a new addition to our ecommerce store - the ability for users to buy a product directly through a "Buy now" button. This enables users who would like to buy a single item to directly skip all the cart addition steps and just click on one button to go directly to the checkout page with the selected product. Some key aspects: - Ecommerce store owners now have an option to add a "Buy now" button to their product detail page. - This option will by default be switched off for new and existing stores. The option can be toggled on by the toggle as shown in the image. - By default, the buy now button will have a border and transparent background. - Border color, text color, button color, and button texts for add to cart, as well as buy now, can be customised. - Upon clicking on buy now, the user will be taken to the checkout page directly with only 1 quantity of the item selected. The item selected for buy now will be added to the cart too. - Upon abandoning a cart, the abandoned cart notification will only contain the product that has been added via buy now, in case of buy now flow. - Upon a successful purchase, any other items apart from the selected buy now item is present in the cart remain unaffected.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Fixed
Chat Widget
1 year ago

Chat Widget - Consent checkbox for A2P Compliance🤩

We’re thrilled to unveil enhancements in our latest update, enriching your experience with Chat Widget - the Consent Checkbox. This new addition allows you to include a consent checkbox in your chat widget settings, which will be displayed on the chat window form when your contacts provide their phone numbers/email during filling chat widget form. 🤩 **Here's what you need to know:** **Why it matters:** - **Compliance:** The Consent Checkbox is crucial for compliance, especially regarding A2P 10 DLC regulations. It helps you avoid compliance issues with telecom providers. 😎 **Enabling the Consent Checkbox:** 1. When Selecting a default the chat type - SMS/Email and Live Chat option 2. In the Widget Window, it will allow users to add the legal message to take consent and enable the checkbox for HIPPA to collect. You'll now find an option called "show consent checkbox." 3. By default, this option is enabled for your convenience. However, if needed, you can disable it. 4. Recommendation: We strongly recommend keeping it enabled to ensure you capture vital information such as consent and the IP address of the contact who agrees by checking the checkbox during the appointment booking process. **Customizable Text:** You have the flexibility to customize the text of the consent checkbox to align with your specific requirements. 🐥 **Benefits** - Compliance: This release ensures adherence to upcoming A2P regulations by providing an easy way to include consent for phone information collection. - Customisability: Users have the flexibility to add, modify, or remove the Terms and Conditions element as required, tailoring it to their specific needs. We’re dedicated to enhancing your experience and welcome your feedback. Enjoy the improved functionality of our app!
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Documents & Contracts
1 year ago

New Filters and Status for Documents and Contracts in Workflows

**What’s New? / Key Features / Benefits:** **New filter: Template** - Users will now be able to select a Template from the list of templates made by them in the Documents and Contracts section while configuring the workflow. - This will enable users to configure different workflows for different templates **New filter: Recipient Type** - Users will now be able to trigger a different workflow based on whether the document is being sent to the Recipient Contact or the Business User itself **New Status: Viewed** - Users will now also be able to trigger different workflows based on the fact that the document has been viewed or not by the recipient **How to Use?** - Filter: Recipient Type, Template Type Customize the filter based on Recipient Type and template type to have different workflows for different types. - New Status: Viewed Customize the workflow based on whether the recipient contact has viewed the document or not by configuring the status to viewed. **Why This Feature?** This helps to make the workflows for documents and contracts more powerful and increases the usability.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Payments
1 year ago

Update payment method for ongoing subscriptions

We are thrilled to announce one of the most requested feature on our ideas board, updating payment method for subscriptions.Key Highlights - Business users can now conveniently send customers a link to update their payment method for ongoing subscriptions. - This feature enables customers to easily update the card on file used for their subscription charges. How it works - The option to send this link is available through the quick action menu on the subscription list page and the Actions section on the subscription detail page. - Business users can either email the link directly to the customer or copy it to send separately. - These links are one time use only, and valid only for 30 days. - Customers simply click the link to view and update their subscription details. - Upon updating, the new payment method will be charged starting from the next billing cycle. - Business users can generate multiple links, as well as deactivate all outstanding links right from the subscriptions page for any given subscription. - **This feature is currently supported only for [Authorize.net](http://authorize.net) and NMI connections** Coming up next We are adding support for this to work with Stripe as well.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Payments
1 year ago

100% Discount Coupons on Subscriptions

- Customers can now apply a 100% coupon or apply a full fixed amount discount on subscriptions - This is useful when businesses want to sell a subscription for free and have upsell purchases configured in the next step - The credit card added for 100% discount will be saved on file to charge the customer at a later date
Image without caption
New
Payments
1 year ago

User permissions for exporting payments data as a CSV

- Business admins will now be able to configure user permissions for exporting payments data as CSV from the sub-account - This applies for exporting invoices, transactions or subscriptions CSV - This is useful when businesses do not want specific users to have export permissions on their payments data - The toggle is turned on by default for all users, which means that they will have the permissions to export data by default
Image without caption
New
1 year ago

Allowing root level arrays in Array Function

We have brought another exciting enhancement to the Array Functions. Before this update, an array should be inside a variable in order to be visible in Array Functions, like this: { "users": \[ { "name": "John Doe", "email": "john@example.com", "age": 30 }, { "name": "Jane Smith", "email": "jane@example.com", "age": 25 } \] } In this case the user was able to select the array source, and then the field users **After this update, the array can be in this format:**\[ { "name": "John Doe", "email": "john@example.com", "age": 30 }, { "name": "Jane Smith", "email": "jane@example.com", "age": 25 } \] The user will select only the array source, and we’ll use the root level.
New
Payments
E-Commerce Stores
1 year ago

Product collections for online stores are now live

- Business users now have the ability to assign to products to different collections for easy navigation in online stores - This is available as an option for existing as well as new products under **Payments -> Products** - Collections page will be available under Products to delete or update existing collections for businesses. - Once collections have been assigned to products, business users will be able to use the navigation menu inside the website builder to list collections under custom menu items names - This solves a lot of challenges in providing easy navigation to customers on online stores, specially for businesses who deal with a lot of products falling into different categories - Along with placing menu items having different categories, users are already to place a cart icon as well inside the navigation menu
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Automations
LC Phone System
1 year ago

Custom Phone Number Support in Connect Call Action

**About the enhancement:** The connect call action now supports the ability to add a custom phone number, which earlier was not possible. This would be helpful in case when you don't want to have users in connect call, specifically in cases where the call is getting connected to someone in a different location. Ex: A central store would have the IVR inbound call, and based on the inputs this can be redirected to different stores (sub accounts) IVRs. **How to set it up** With this enhancements users can simply click on the "Add Custom Number" field and add the phone number along with the country code.
Image without caption
New
Payments
E-Commerce Stores
1 year ago

Variant specific images in E-commerce Stores

- E-commerce store owners can now map each variant combination with a unique image for that variant selection. - This feature can be accessed via the variants section while editing or adding a product. Each variant combination will have a small thumbnail on the left representing the image. Upon clicking on the thumbnail, a modal will open up allowing the users to select from already existing media images or upload a new image. - In the product detail page, upon selecting a variant, the associated media image will automatically be selected if there exists a variant image. - However, selection of an image will not change the variant, even if there is a variant combination associated with the image.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Email Builder
1 year ago

Resend to unopened: Boost engagement of Email Campaigns

We're thrilled to introduce an update that lets you easily resend emails to people who missed them the first time, helping you increase engagement. Following best practices in resending can significantly increase engagement while keeping the risk of complaints or unsubscribes at minimum. **Problem Statement:**💥 Research shows that a considerable number of emails are overlooked in crowded inboxes. This update is designed to capture this missed opportunity, ensuring that your carefully crafted messages get the attention they deserve. **What we've Implemented:**💃 Now users can easily resend campaigns to non-openers with just a few clicks. They can also modify the subject line (if required) to refresh your message and reduce the chance of user complaints. **Benefits:**🚀 1. **Boosted Engagement:** By targeting non-openers, you're likely to see improved engagement metrics. 2. **Efficient Use of Content**: Maximize the reach and impact of your meticulously created content without additional effort. **How to use?:**😎 1. Navigate to Email Marketing -> campaigns 2. Select your sent campaigns and click on the three dots 3. Choose "Resend email to Unopened" 4. Update the settings for the email with desired subject and schedule time 5. This will ensure the resend camapign gets rescheduled **Note:**🔎 1. Resending is available within the default window of 12 hours to 10 days after sending the original email. This timing minimizes complaints and aligns with industry norms. 2. Resending isn't supported for Batch schedule and RSS campaigns. 3. For tips on maximizing engagement and reducing complaints, check our help document. **Coming Soon:**🤩 - Soon, you'll be able to set up resend options in advanced settings when sending or scheduling the original email. Look out for this feature on the send or schedule screen. - Soon you will have the analytics of original and sent email linked
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Automations
LC Phone System
1 year ago

Showing phone numbers next to user in "Connect Call" action IVR

**What's New:** We've implemented a subtle yet impactful improvement by displaying the phone number alongside each user, streamlining the configuration process within the IVR. This enhancement is designed to make the setup more intuitive and user-friendly, empowering our users with an enhanced level of control. **Impact** 1. User-Friendly Configuration: Now, users can effortlessly configure the IVR with the phone number conveniently presented next to each user, ensuring a seamless and efficient experience. 2. Enhanced Visibility: The addition of phone numbers provides clear and concise information, allowing users to make informed decisions during IVR setup. **User Selection Optimization:** To further refine the user experience, we've disabled the selection of users who do not have an associated phone number in the Connect Call action. This ensures that the call forwarding process remains efficient and avoids any potential roadblocks that may arise in the absence of a phone number.
Image without caption
New
1 year ago

XML Support in Inbound Webhook

Inbound webhook trigger will accept XML payload also going forward. This will provide more flexibility to trigger the workflows.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Email Builder
1 year ago

Set Default Addresses in Test Emails🚀

We’re thrilled to announce significant improvements to our test email feature, aimed at optimizing your email testing process for efficiency and effectiveness. Save time and don’t waste writing emails to - from addresses in every test email. This along with access to test emails on send or schedule screen were one of the top voted requests on ideas dashboard. **Problem Statement:**💥 a. Previously, users had to manually input the 'from' and 'to' addresses for each test email when evaluating new campaigns. b. To assess email appearance across different clients or systems, it was necessary to send out several test emails. **What we did?**🤩 - We’ve introduced the ability to set default ‘from’ and ‘to’ addresses for your test emails, eliminating the need to enter these details for every test email you send. SAVE TIME, MORE EFFICIENCY. - Our update now facilitates sending test emails to multiple recipients simultaneously by simply separating email addresses with a comma. **How to Use:**😎 - Go to 'Email Marketing'. - Choose a template or campaign, click 'Test Email'. - Input 'from' and recipient addresses, tick the box to save as default. Embrace a more streamlined and efficient way to test your email campaigns with our latest update. **Support Video** \- [Video Link](https://drive.google.com/drive/u/0/folders/1XhwXkK1HpXy9HoS8OF35Zap8oG6Tio0g)
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Template Library
1 year ago

Introducing Customisable View Preferences in Our Template Library!🚀

We're thrilled to announce a new feature in our template library to enhance your preview experience. Admins now have access to settings where they can customize view preferences for each product in the template library **Problem Statement:**💥 - All products previously had similar view styles (4 thumbnails per row), with no admin control. - Users had to open each template to preview, which was time-consuming and inefficient, especially for websites needing a larger landscape thumbnail for proper representation. **What's New:**😎 - Introducing a settings page for agency admins to select view preferences for individual products. - Now users can customize view styles to enjoy a 2 X list view for funnels and websites, and a list view for forms. **Benefits:**🤩 - Better representation of templates for easier and faster decision making. - Empowerment for agency admins with more control. **How to Use:**🚀 1. Go to the template library. 2. Click on "Settings." 3. Choose your preferred view for each product (e.g., landscape view for websites, list view for forms). 4. Click "Save." This will change the view style for the library and ensure all locations would have this optimised viewing option **Note :** - The settings access is provided only to Agency owners - The change in settings would be reflected to all locations Enjoy a more tailored and efficient preview experience with our updated template library!
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Certificates
1 year ago

Ability to send Offline Certificates from Certificate Builder

**Introducing manual/offline certificates** - Users can now send offline certificates to any contacts. - Offline certificates will facilitate users to send certificates manually. **How to send manual/offline certificates** - Go to Memberships > Certificates - Choose a template or create from scratch > Click on Send Button - Add an instructor name, recipient mail (or add a new contact via Add New) - Click on Send **Pagination & Filters** - Added Date and Search filters in Certificates templates and Issued Certificates for refined use. - Users can now search for templates and issues certificates based on a date range.
Image without caption
New
WhatsApp
Conversations
1 year ago

WhatsApp - Enhancements and Bug Fixes! 🛠️

We've made some awesome enhancements to make your experience even better! Check it out: **🚀 Enhancements** **1\. Real time update of conversation timestamp** The timestamp in the conversations tab now updates correctly after sending WhatsApp messages, ensuring accuracy in your communication history.**2\. Last activity Icon on the Contacts Page** The "Last Activity" column on the contacts page displays WhatsApp icon whenever your most recent communication with a contact occurred through WhatsApp. Previously, this column relied on a generic email icon **🐛 Bug Fixes** - Resolved an issue that previously prevented users from setting a WhatsApp number as the default. - Addressed a problem with the WhatsApp template to show the correct error message in case of update or creation failures. - Fixed an issue in WhatsApp onboarding flow to display an appropriate error message when the integration process fails. - Ensured backward compatibility for the attachment API in the WhatsApp Mobile API used in the mobile app. - Addressed a scenario in WhatsApp Name Change where alterations to WhatsApp names were not consistently reflected on the WhatsApp Settings Page. - Fixed an issue in WhatsApp Workflow where, during execution, certain variables were replaced with empty values instead of their correct values.
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
1 year ago

Reorder Custom Fields in Opportunities

We're thrilled to introduce a highly anticipated enhancement to our platform: the ability to **reorder custom fields in opportunities**! Here's what you need to know:What's New Now you can easily rearrange custom fields in opportunities to better organize your data and streamline your workflow. The updated order of fields will be reflected in the opportunity add and edit dialog boxes. Important Details **Customization Limitation:** Please note that only custom fields, not standard fields, can be reordered. The same applies to folders.Simple Steps 1. Navigate to Settings. 2. Go to Custom Fields. 3. Select "Opportunity" from the dropdown. 4. Drag and drop fields to reorder them according to your preferences. Why It Matters **Enhanced Flexibility:** With the ability to customize your views, you can tailor your opportunities to meet your unique needs and workflows. **Improved User Experience:** This much-requested feature empowers users to take control of their data and optimize their productivity.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
Automations
1 year ago

Go To UI Improvements

We have made a small but significant change in Go To action to make it more easier and simpler to understand. After selecting the Go To action in addition in addition to the glowing action steps you will also see the prompt stating "Click on the Go To destination.
Image without caption
New
Social Planner
1 year ago

Create your first Facebook Reel in Social Planner 😎

Short form videos are in trend with ever-growing way in social media marketing world. With the same, in social planner we are launching Facebook Reels. 🤩 **How to create Facebook Reel?** 1. Go to Marketing > Social Planner 2. Connect your Facebook account by going to settings > integrations. Give the permissions to the facebook account. 3. Go to Create New Post 4. When creating new post, select Facebook Page for posting the Reel. Note - Reels are only available for pages at the moment. If you choose a group it'll be shared as a feed post. 5.Go to Reels Tab 6.Add caption and add one video attachment😍 7.Schedule your Reel**Specification for Facebook Reels** 1. 1 GB video size 2. Duration - 3 seconds to 90 seconds (1 mins 30 sec) 3. Video Format - .MP4, .MOV, .webm 4. Aspect - 1080 \* 1920 pixels (recommended) Minimum required is 540 x 960 pixels 5. Aspect Ratio - 9:16 6. Thumbnail support is not available for Facebook Reels.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Documents & Contracts
1 year ago

Fillable Date Field and Custom values support inside floating text elements

**What’s New? / Key Features / Benefits:** **1\. Fillable Date Field Element** - Users can now easily drag and drop a fillable date field element into uploaded PDFs or documents, streamlining the process of adding date-related information. **2\. Custom Values in Fillable Text Field** - The new drag and drop element allows users to incorporate custom values in fillable text fields, facilitating the dynamic customization of fields that need to be changed for each PDF sent. Eg: Custom name field on a Fixed PDF template which needs to have receiver’s name on it can now be filled automatically using Custom values. **3\. UI Enhancements** - Added support for moving draggable element via keyboard. - Users can utilise Shift+Arrow keys to easily move (signature/text/date) elements, improving precision in document arrangement. - Use Shift+Arrow keys for precision - Use Ctrl+Shift+Arrow keys for moving the elements faster. - Added new tooltip over every assigned fillable elements (Date, Text) - Editors can now hover over fillable elements to view the assigned signer, making it easier to edit documents with multiple signers. - Signature Element is now resizable instead of scale . **How to Use?** **1\. Fillable Date Field Element** - Drag the “Fillable Date Field” element from the toolbar and drop it onto the desired location in your document. - Click on the field to fill the date, customize the date format and other properties. **2\. Custom Values in Fillable Text Field** - Drag the “Fillable Text Field” element from the toolbar and drop it onto the document. - Single click on the field and select Custom Value icon to input dynamic values. **Why This Feature?** - The addition of fillable date fields, customizable text elements, and improved UI aims to provide users with a more flexible and efficient document editing process.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Payments
Funnels And Websites
1 year ago

Product descriptions live in order forms

Product description in order forms: 1. The product description toggle will now display the product description that is added by the user in the products screen. This allows the user to show their customized description in order forms. 2. This option is by default turned OFF in new and existing order forms. 3. The existing product description (Recurring and trial information) now comes under the new label of "Pricing information". This toggle is turned ON for new funnels, and existing funnels will retain the user's preference. 4. This overall improves the understanding of these toggles as we noticed customers were confused with the existing product description toggle. Full name validation in order forms: - Order forms now have a toggle called "Full name validation" present which would enable these forms to validate names entered. - Upon turning this on, names entered will now need to have atleast two parts, and some other small validations such as not allowing two special characters as a name, limited special characters, etc. - Turning this option off will retain the existing behaviour of the field.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Image without caption
New
Improved
Fixed
Communities
1 year ago

Communities - Dropping a whole new UI and Gamification

**New UI** - The new layout can be turned on from Labs. - The look and feel of communities has changed: Changed the default colours, improved the fonts to make it more readable - All fresh and more readable with the all new Reading Mode - We are introducing a Reading mode which will give more real estate while you are scrolling through the posts - This will make the transition from Discussion to Learning Tab seamless **Gamification** - Introducing "Gamification" - Points, Levels and Leaderboards - Points - You get 1-point when someone likes your post/comment - Levels - Your avatar and profile will display a blue badge with a number, indicating your level. Gain more points to move up to higher levels - Leaderboards - You can find members who earned the highest points in the past 7 days, 30 days, and overall - Rewards - Group admins/owners can choose to add offline rewards as texts. Example- Get a chance to win $2000
New
Payments
Invoicing
1 year ago

Invoice Line Items in CSV Export

What’s New? Business users would now have a detailed breakdown of the invoice line items in a particular invoice on export. The detailed breakdown for the invoice would consist of invoice line item details like item name, item description, tax on item, discount on item, itemId, currencyWhy is this Important Having the line item details in invoices export is very crucial from a reporting and accounting point of view as it allows to build reports based on the line items mentioned on the invoices How to Use it Go to Payments Tab -> Invoices --> Click on the Export Button and you'll receive a mail with CSV link for your export!
New
Improved
Calendar
1 year ago

Custom Form for Service Menu

**What's New?** - **Previously**, the service menu collected only **default information** like name, email, and phone number from bookers. With this update, you can create personalized forms with all the fields you desire. - These custom forms can be **seamlessly integrated** into your service menu. - When a booker schedules an appointment, they'll be prompted to fill out your **tailored form.** - You can conveniently view the submitted details within the app under **Sites > Forms > Submissions.** **Note:** Custom form selected in the service menu will **supersede** any form selected at the individual calendar level. **How to Use?** 1. Begin by creating your custom form. Navigate to **Sites > Forms > Builder.** 2. Craft your form with the specific questions you wish your clients to answer. 3. Once your form is ready, proceed to **Calendar Settings > Service Menu.** 4. Select the desired service menu and navigate to **Service Menu Details.** 5. Under Forms, **choose the custom form** you've created and save your selection.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Improved
LC Email System
1 year ago

Ability to Add Multiple Domains in Domain Configuration

We're thrilled to announce an enhancement to our existing feature. Users can now add up to five email domains for email types: Workflow, 1:1, Campaign, and Bulk emails. With that error notification was provided if a domains lacks a default header, helps avoid potential DMARC and other deliverability issues. **Here's how to access this Feature:** Sub-account Settings - Email Service -> SMTP Service -> Dedicated Domain and IP -> Domain Configuration. **Key Benefits:** **Improved Deliverability:** By spreading email sending volume across multiple domains, reduce the risk of triggering spam filters or being marked as spam by internet service providers (ISPs). This can lead to better inbox placement and higher deliverability rates. **Reduced Risk of Blacklisting:** If one sending domain gets blacklisted or flagged for spam, having multiple domains ensures that entire email marketing operation won't be affected. **Distributed Workload:** Distributing email sending workload across multiple domains can prevent overloading any single domain and ensuring consistent performance. **Upcoming:** The sending domain can be selected for individual workflow, campaign and bulk email level. **Support article:** <https://help.leadconnectorhq.com/support/solutions/articles/48001226590-how-to-set-up-a-dedicated-sending-domain-within-a-sub-account#How-to-set-up-a-dedicated-sending-domain-for-Targeted-Email-Categories>?
Image without caption
New
Payments
1 year ago

Configure setup fees for Agency Plans

**What’s New?** Agency plans now support adding one-time setup fees, which means users can configure setup fees for any agency plan in their sub-account - This provides a way to sell subscriptions along with a setup fees or a trial period or both, which typically increases conversions and revenue for agencies. This is a also small step in our endeavor towards allowing users to manage Agency plans on **Payment>Products** section
New
Improved
Calendar
1 year ago

Pre Buffer for Calendars

**Buffers** represent **additional time** that can be added **before and/or after an appointment.** **Previously**, calendars only had post buffers. We are now excited to introduce **pre-buffers** as well, allowing users with more flexibility. **What's New?** - You can now add both pre and post buffers for an appointment. **Pre buffer** is added **before** an appointment whereas **post buffer** is added **after** an appointment. - Adding this would **allocate buffer** time to be considered when scheduling any **new appointments.** - This feature can be beneficial if you need **extra time** to get ready before an appointment, or wind down after a presentation. **Important points to note:** 1. Buffers **only apply** to events booked through the **booking widget** or **directly from the app**. However, events created outside the app (e.g., Google, Outlook, iCloud) are taken into consideration when finding a free slot while scheduling a meeting with a buffer from the widget / app. This means that buffers **cannot overlap** with any other existing calendar event. 2. If there's a 30-minute appointment with **15-minute buffers before and after,** someone else booking on the same day will see an available slot 30 minutes after the existing booking. This is due to **two buffers being applied consecutively**, as there will be a 15-minute post buffer for the existing appointment and a 15-minute pre-buffer for the new appointment. **How to Use?** 1. Choose the **calendar** to which you want to add buffers for appointments. 2. Navigate to the "**Availability**" section. 3. Specify the duration you want for both the **pre and post buffers** and click on save.
Image without caption
Improved
Fixed
WhatsApp
1 year ago

WhatsApp - Enhancements 🛠️

We've made some awesome enhancements to make your experience even better! Check it out:🚀 Enhancements **1\. Subscription Check & Visibility:** - Goodbye, confusion! We've introduced a WhatsApp subscription check on both the conversation and contact pages. This means you'll only see the WhatsApp tab and relevant options in the message type filter dropdown if your location has an active WhatsApp subscription. This ensures you see the features you need and avoids clutter in the interface. **2\. Outbound WhatsApp Number Selection** - We've enhanced how we handle phone number selection for outbound WhatsApp messages, ensuring smoother communication and addressing previous limitations. **Previously:** - Outbound messages always use the default WhatsApp number configured in your settings. **Now:** - The system attempts to prioritise the contact's last used WhatsApp number for each conversation, providing a more personalised experience. This number is retrieved from the most recent inbound message received from the customer. - If no recent inbound message exists, the default WhatsApp number is still used as a fallback. **This change addresses:** - An issue where attempting to reply to a contact using the default number might fail if your location has multiple WhatsApp phone numbers. - Previously, the system wouldn't necessarily use the number the customer originally messaged you on, potentially leading to a 24-hour window closure error **3\. Outbound WhatsApp Number Selection** - **Improved Error Messaging:** Enhanced error handling for Facebook error messages in edge cases, providing more specific reasons for message failures.
Image without caption
Image without caption
Powered by Notaku